Copyright: NetSupport © 1991 - 2006 NetSupport Ltd. All rights reserved.
Citation: NetSupport © 1991 - 2006 NetSupport Ltd. All rights reserved.


NetSupport Copyright

Manual COPYRIGHT (C) 2006 NetSupport Ltd.  All rights reserved.

The Information in this document is subject to change without notice. NetSupport Ltd. reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person or persons of such revisions or changes.

The software described in this document is supplied under a licence agreement and is protected by international copyright laws. You may copy it only for the purpose of backup and use it only as described in the Licence agreement.

Any implied warranties including any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose are limited to the terms of the express warranties set out in the licence agreement.

Program COPYRIGHT (C) 1991 - 2006 NetSupport Ltd.  All rights reserved.

Trademarks

NetSupport is a registered trademark of NetSupport Ltd.

Windows, Windows 95/98/2000/2003/Millennium(Me), XP, Windows NT and Windows CE are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc.

Other products, trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.


NetSupport Licence

Please read this agreement before installing or using your copy of NetSupport Software. This is a legal agreement between you and NetSupport Ltd.  If you do not wish to be bound by the terms of this licence agreement you must not load, activate or use the software.

TERM: Subject to termination under Termination Clause below the Licence shall be perpetual.

GRANT OF LICENCE: This software is designed to run on standalone computers and computer networks. You may load the software from a Network File server but you must purchase a licence for each workstation on which you will install or run the software.

COPYRIGHT: This software is protected by international copyright laws. You may copy it only for backup purposes. The software is licensed to you, but not sold to you.

RESTRICTIONS: Neither you nor any reseller may rent, lease, sell licensed copies on approval, or otherwise transfer the right to use this software to another person, except that you may sell or give away your original copy, as long as you do not keep any copies. The software may not be modified, disassembled or reverse engineered except with the prior written consent of NetSupport Ltd.

LIMITED WARRANTY: NetSupport Ltd warrants that the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. NetSupport Ltd’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be either a) the replacement of the defective software or b) return of the price paid.  This remedy shall be at NetSupport Ltd’s option and subject to proof of purchase from an authorised source.

Any implied warranties including any warranties of satisfactory quality or fitness for a particular purpose are limited to the terms of the express warranties. NetSupport Ltd shall not in any event be liable for loss of profits, data or information of any kind or for special, incidental, consequential, indirect or other similar damages arising from any breach of these warranties or use of the Software even if they have been advised of the possibility of such damages.  Some countries do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.  This warranty does not affect your statutory rights and you may have other rights that vary from country to country.  In any event NetSupport Ltd’s maximum liability shall not exceed the price paid by the end-user / licensee.

TERMINATION: You may terminate this Licence and this Agreement at any time by destroying the Program and its documentation, together with any copies in any form.

NetSupport Ltd may terminate this Licence forthwith by notice in writing to you if you commit any serious breach of any term of this Licence and (in the case of a breach capable of being remedied) shall have failed within 30 days after receipt of a request in writing from NetSupport Ltd so to do, to remedy the breach (such request to contain a warning of NetSupport Ltd’s intention to terminate). Upon termination you will destroy or return to NetSupport Ltd the original and all copies of the software and will confirm in writing to NetSupport Ltd that this has been done.

SUPPORT: If you have a problem with the installation of the software you should in the first instance contact your supplier. You can separately purchase support and maintenance which will also cover the supply of enhancements and upgrades.

GOVERNING LAW : This agreement shall be governed by the laws of England.


Planning an Installation

Installing NetSupport School is exceptionally easy and provided you follow a few simple rules you should be up and running within a very short time.

The first step is to decide what functions you want to install on each workstation.

Do you want it to be a Tutor or a Student?

To be able to Show to and Control this workstation from another you install a Student, sometimes called a Client.

If you want to be able to Show to or take over another workstation from this one, you install both a Tutor, also called a Control, and a Student.

What network protocol do you use?

The next step is to decide what networking protocol you have available on the workstation. NetSupport School supports, IPX/SPX, NetBIOS/NetBEUI and TCP/IP.

Note: By default the Tutor will be configured to use TCP/IP. If you are using a different protocol, you must configure this the first time you start a Tutor.

What naming convention are you going to use for the Student workstations?

NetSupport School requires that each Student workstation be allocated a unique name. To take advantage of the full range of connection and administrative functionality of NetSupport School you need to have a sensible naming convention for the Student workstations.

For example you might decide that all workstations in one classroom would start with the name CLASS1_WK. You can then configure the Tutor program to automatically connect to the workstations in that room only.

Alternatively you might decide to use the Machine Name or Computer Name that is already set up as part of your networking environment.

Whichever method you use it is important that it easily identifies the individual workstations in a way that is recognisable to the user, at the Tutor workstation.

You are now ready to install NetSupport School Tutor (Control) and Student (Client) programs.

See

System Pre-Requisites

Starting an Installation


Creating an administrative (network) installation

An administrative installation (distribution copy) of NetSupport School is designed to assist administrators to install NetSupport on Networked PCs where the installation media or License details may not be readily available, and it is anticipated that a number of installs will be performed either at once or over a period of time.

This type of installation can also be preconfigured to setup NetSupport School with certain options, therefore ensuring that all NetSupport installations are configured the same.

Once created, the distribution copy can be used when performing a standard install, a Silent Installation or as part of a remote deployment.

To Setup a distribution copy of NetSupport on a Server

1.	Create a folder on the network that is accessible to all PCs that you may want to install on.

2.	Copy, from your original source media (CD or download) the file SETUP.EXE.

3.	Create and copy a valid NSM.LIC file to this folder. If a License file is not present in the folder when running the install, NetSupport will be installed using the default Evaluation license.

4.	Create and copy a CLIENT32.INI file to this folder.

Note:	You can make the network folder ‘read only’ to avoid the configuration being altered by unauthorised users.

To Install NetSupport from a Server onto individual workstations

1.	At the required workstation, navigate to the network folder containing the NetSupport School setup files.

2.	Run Setup.exe.

3.	Follow instructions on Starting an Installation.

See also

Silent Installation

NetSupport Deploy


Silent Installation

A silent installation is one which requires no input from the user, providing a convenient method for performing a set installation at several machines.

To perform a silent install

1.	Create a distribution copy of NetSupport containing the required NetSupport Installation files.

2.	To determine the properties for the Installation, at the command line run INSTCFG.EXE /S from the NetSupport program folder. The Install Configuration Options dialog will appear. The selected properties are stored in a parameter file, default name Values.TXT.

3.	Choose {File}{Save} and save the ‘Values.TXT’ file to the folder containing the distribution copy of NetSupport.

Note: For the purpose of a Silent Install, you can save this file with a name of your choosing.

4.	To perform the Silent Install at the required workstation, from the folder containing the distribution copy, run:

Setup.exe /s /m=values.txt. (where Values.TXT = the filename created in 3)


Hardware and Software Requirements (NetSupport School)

Hardware

Control (Tutor) and Client (Student)

100% IBM compatible, 80386SX or higher

Software

Control and Client (depending on Network protocol)

Windows 2003/XP/Me/2000/98/95 or

Windows NT 4

NetBIOS/NetBEUI, IPX or TCP/IP

See also

System Pre-Requisites


Networking Requirements

This section sets out the Networking requirements for running NetSupport.

NetBEUI and NetBIOS

If you are using NetSupport configured for NetBEUI and/or NetBIOS support as the default protocol then no further changes are required to either the Client or the Control workstations.

If NetBEUI is not the default then you must make sure that the Control and Client are configured to use an alternate NetBIOS Adapter.

Use NBSTATUS to determine NetBIOS Adapter numbers and then set the Adapter number for NetSupport using the Configurator.

Note: We do not advise running the Client on NetBIOS over TCP/IP - it will hang, GPF or reboot the workstation.

IPX

To run a NetSupport IPX Client under IPX, simply ensure that you have installed IPX support.

If you are using Novell's NetWare Client for NT, you must install the NetSupport Client after installing the Novell Client.

Make sure that all workstations are using the same frame type. You can check/change this in {Control Panel}{Network}{Protocols}{IPX/SPX Compatible Protocol}{Properties}{Advanced}{Frame Type}.

If your system completely locks up, expand file NWLINK.VXD from the NetSupport release disks and copy it to your WIN95\SYSTEM, directory.  The version of this file shipped with Windows 95 and Windows 95B contains a "problem", but it does not seem to affect all workstations.  This affects both the Control and the Client.

TCP/IP

If you are using NetSupport in a Windows environment configured for TCP/IP support then no further changes are required to either the Client or the Control workstations.

Note: If your workstation has more than one IP address, the Client will only report the first in the Application Event Log and in the about box.  It will listen on all IP addresses, however.

Connecting by hostname on Windows 95B (OSR2) seems to take forever if you have configured a Domain Name Server in Control Panel, Network but the server is not available.

Dial-up Networking

Both the Client and the Control work correctly over Windows 95 Dial-up networking with all protocols.

You can use Windows 95's Dial-up Networking to dial into your Internet service provider (TCP/IP only), a RAS server or any other PPP server.

If using IPX make sure that all workstations are using the same frame type.  See Windows 95 - IPX.


Changes to Windows 95 System Files

NetSupport makes minimal changes to your system files.  These are made automatically when you install NetSupport or run the NetSupport Configurator.

Most of these changes are needed for the Client only.  The Control programs require only those changes marked with an asterisk.  The exception is if you will be using the Show Feature in which case you must also install the Client.

The changes to SYSTEM.INI made by the NetSupport Set-up program are:

[Boot] Section

Display.drv=drivername 	Changed to Display.drv=path\NSMVGA.DRV

Display.old=Olddrivername	Added

Display.nsm=NSMVGA.DRV 	Added

wclient=path\CLIENT32.EXE	*Added on Windows 95 systems

[386Enh] Section

NetHeapSize=16	* Added unless already greater than 16

Device=NSMVXD.386	* Added

Notes

•	NSM Files NSMVGA.DRV, PROCHOOK.DLL are installed in the system directory.

•	The NetSupport video driver, NSMVGA.DRV, uses the video driver defined by Display.old.  This will be the same your original video driver when NSM was installed.

•	If you change your video setting using Set-up, Display.drv will be set to the new value and you must run "Reset Video Driver" from the NetSupport Program Manager Group to change it back to NSMVGA.DRV.  This will also update Display.old with the filename of the new driver.

•	Under Windows 95, you can elect to load NSMVGA.DRV via the registry.  To do this run "Reset Video Driver" after installing NSM.  This permits changing screen resolution without rebooting with some video cards.

•	If you do run NSMVGA via the registry the DISPLAY.DRV line in SYSTEM.INI will read Display.drv=pnpdrvr.drv.

•	In an emergency, you can edit SYSTEM.INI directly to amend the Display.drv line.  (Display.drv=vga.drv always works).  You can then reinstall your desired video driver and then run "Reset Video Driver".


Changes to NT4 Registry and System Files

The following changes are made when the NetSupport Client is installed on Windows NT4.

On installation of NetSupport, the following files are installed on an NT4 PC.

In the WINNT\SYSTEM32 Directory:

GDIHOOK4.DLL

CLHOOK4.DLLl

PCIGINA.DLL

PCIMON.DLL	 which is renamed to LOCALMON.DLL

In the WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS Directory:

PCISYS.SYS	(NT4.00 only)

Changes to the system Registry:

To locate these entries use the find option in REGEDIT.

GDIHOOK4.DLL is inserted before each listed driver in registry entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\<videodriver>\Device0\InstalledDisplayDrivers.

To determine the <videodriver>, look in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\VIDEO\Device\Video0.

PCIGINA.DLL is loaded via the registry entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL.  The previous GINA DLL (usually MSGina) is moved and loaded from key GinaDLL.old

Event log sources (i.e. where your event log is stored) are set up in registry keys HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\Application\PCIApp and in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\System\PCISys.

The Client is installed as a service in registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Client32\.  The Image Path registry entry in this key contains the Client command line parameters.

The device driver PCISYS.SYS is installed via registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\PCISys.

File SYSTEM32\LOCALMON.DLL is renamed to LOCALMON.ORG, and a PCIMON.DLL is copied to this directory and renamed to LOCALMON.DLL.

An entry is added to the AUTOEXEC.NT file to enable full screen DOS box support.


Dialling into Windows 2000, NT and XP using RAS

The NetSupport Bridge supports NetBIOS and IPX.  This section discusses running NetSupport over RAS, which supports all protocols simultaneously.

A RAS server is supplied with Windows NT/2000/XP.  The Windows 95 plus pack supplies a cut-down RAS server that only supports NetBEUI.  Once dialled into a RAS server, the NetSupport Control can connect to any Client on the network to which the RAS server is attached.

You can dial into a RAS server from Windows 9x/NT/2000/ME. You can also dial into your Internet service provider or any other PPP server in the same way.

IPX

If you do not have a NetWare server on the network to which the RAS server is connected, you must assign a non-zero IPX network number to that network on the RAS server workstation. Any other workstations that assign this number must use the same value.

On Windows 2000, this is done from Network and Dialup Connections. Select the network connection, right click and choose Properties. Select the IPX protocol and press properties.

On NT 4, this is done from {Control Panel}{Network}{Protocols}{NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport}{Properties}.

NetSupport's {Lookup} function may not work - see Lookup does not find the loaded Clients.

When dialling out from an NT workstation, you may need to set the Frame Type in {Control Panel}{Network}{NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport}{Configure}.  Select Remote Access Wan Wrapper from the Adapter list.

NetBIOS

With the link dialled up, run NBSTATUS on the Control workstation to determine the correct NetBIOS Adapter number to use at the Control to connect to Clients over the link.

Under NT, you can also check NetBIOS Adapter numbers in {Control Panel}{Network}{Services}{NetBIOS Interface}.

TCP/IP

Ensure that your gateway and DNS or WINS server are correctly set up in {Control Panel}{Network}{TCP/IP Protocol}{Configure} or {Properties}.  To test this, use PING.EXE


Uninstalling

To uninstall NetSupport, run the 'Uninstall' icon from Program Manager or select the NetSupport option in Control Panel – Add/Remove Programs.


Unloading a Client

Should you wish to unload the NetSupport Client on Windows ME/98/95, you can obtain a utility called Clunload.exe from our company website.

For NT/2000/XP

Use Net Stop Client32 from the command line.


Windows XP/2000/NT Client - Full Screen DOS Box Support

The Windows XP/2000/NT Client supports full screen DOS applications using a TSR, NTFSDB.EXE, which must be loaded in each DOS session.

The installer adds NTFSDB to WINNT\SYSTEM32\AUTOEXEC.NT, which is the file run when a DOS session initialises.  You can remove or comment out this line if you do not want to use this feature.  This will make more memory available to your DOS applications.

NTFSDB uses about 12k of DOS memory, and usually loads high.  To get a list of NTFSDB command line switches, type NTFSDB /?.  If you want to use any of these, or disable full screen DOS box support, edit AUTOEXEC.NT manually.

NetSupport does *not* currently support 32 bit console apps, nor does the NT 32 bit command processor (CMD.EXE).  You can get around the latter problem in one of the following ways:

•	Set up an icon to run the DOS application from the desktop

•	Start your DOS application from a command window, then press <Alt+Enter>.  When the DOS app terminates, press <Alt+Enter> again to return to Windowed mode

•	Set up an icon to run COMMAND.COM.  Note that if you do this, you lose the 'command line recall' facility

•	Use a third party DOS shell

When using option 3, if you see the message 'out of environment space', append "/E:1024" to the icon's command line.

If you want to set your PATH or any other environment variable, from a batch file, use NT's FORCEDOS command, e.g. FORCEDOS SETPATH.BAT


DOS graphic modes supported from a Windows Control

The Windows Control supports the following DOS graphics modes:

•	SVGA 800 x 600 x 16 (specify graphics mode with /G)

•	EGA  320 x 200 x 16	(mode 0x0D)

•	EGA  640 x 200 x 16	(mode 0x0E)

•	EGA  640 x 350 x 2	(mode 0x0F)

•	EGA  640 x 350 x 16	(mode 0x10)

•	VGA  640 x 480 x 2	(mode 0x11)

•	VGA  640 x 480 x 16 (mode 0x12)

Note: The Windows Control does not track changes to the EGA Palette or VGA DAC Registers. Applications that use these features will display incorrect colours at the Control.


How to connect to Clients on different NetBIOS adapters

NetBIOS adapters are treated as separate transports with in the Control. The Transport Configuration dialog lists the available adapters along with a description i.e. NetBEUI or TCP/IP NetBIOS.

You can set multiple NetBIOS adapter support by highlighting the appropriate adapters in the list.

When connecting to Clients over NetBIOS it is important that you include the correct adapter number at the Control. The most common adapter type for Local LANs using NetBIOS is NetBEUI. The NetBEUI adapter can have a different numerical value between workstations so it is important that you set this correctly for both Client and Control.

If you want to connect to a Client that is using NetBEUI on adapter 0 then you need to configure the Control to use NetBEUI. This may not necessarily be adapter 0, as long as it’s name matches you will be able to connect to the Client.


Limitations

NetSupport aims to make you feel that you are seated in front of the Client workstation you are remote controlling.  There are some limitations however, and these are listed below.

Limitations within NetSupport School

•	Block all Internet function only works with IE based browsers.

•	The Co-Browser is not support with websites that use Flash Navigation or Java Scripting.

General Limitations

•	The Inventory functions included with NetSupport Manager are designed to run over TCP/IP. The Network adapter details will not be displayed if TCP/IP is not installed.

•	Print output cannot currently be captured from a Network printer at the Client.

•	By default Software application packages that by-pass GDI video calls cannot be viewed using the NetSupport Control program. In certain circumstances it may be possible to view the application using "Screen Scrape Mode".

 Please refer to the NetSupport Technical Support Web site   www.netsupportsoftware.com/support for further guidance.

•	Show Hotkeys utility is only supported in Windows 2000, XP and above.

Functionality Limitations Across a NetSupport Gateway

You may experience problems when using the following features across a Gateway:

Client Connect.

Power On.

ActiveX.

Help request to specified controls.

Show.

Broadcast Show.

Broadcast messages.

Connect on start up.

Any function that specifically requires UDP.

Windows 2000 Known Issues

If you are upgrading your operating system to Windows 2000 you must ensure that you de-install NetSupport prior to upgrading. NetSupport can then be re-installed once the operating system upgrade has been completed.

Windows 95 and 98

•	You cannot remote control the Close Program dialog (CTL-ALT-DEL); invoking this will hang the Client workstation.

•	Changing screen resolution without rebooting does not work with all video cards (see Reset Video Driver.

•	Colour cursors are displayed in monochrome at the Control.

•	The Client does not send the NumLock, CapsLock and ScrollLock lights to the Control when viewing a windowed DOS box.

Windows NT

•	Full screen applications (including the NT command prompt, CMD.EXE) are not supported (you can type, but you cannot see them).  DOS applications running full screen are supported, however.

•	Colour cursors are displayed in monochrome at the Control.

•	If you change the colour depth without restarting NT, you need to stop and restart the Client to get colours displayed correctly at the Control.

Windows 64 Bit Platforms

•	File Transfer does not support access to 64bit folders (windows\system32 will not be accessible).

•	NetSupport Manager provides a 32bit Remote Command prompt.

•	Blank client screen is not supported.

•	Full screen command shell is not supported.

•	NetSupport Regedit is restricted to a 32bit Implementation.


NetSupport Licencing

When you purchase NetSupport you are allocated a Serial Number. This combined with your company name and product related information is used to produce a unique software licence key that enables you to use the product.  You can enter your Licence and generate your key during installation or you can use the NetSupport Licence Manager described below to generate a licence key after installation.

Note: NetSupport is Licenced by each workstation that it is installed or used on. It is not licenced by concurrent usage. Therefore if you have 100 workstations on which you install or run a NetSupport Client or Control you must buy a 100 User licence even if the software is loaded from a Server. See License Agreement.

Entering Licence details during installation

If you are installing NetSupport from the original installation media you will be prompted to enter your Licence information. By entering the information provided on your serialisation certificate you will create your unique licence key during the installation of the product. The licence key is stored in a file called NSM.LIC which resides in the directory in which you installed NetSupport.

Notes

•	If when prompted for your licence information, you enter EVAL in the licensee field and leave the other fields unchanged you can install NetSupport for a 14-day evaluation period.

•	If you copy the contents of your installation files to a server directory and replace the default NSM.LIC with your NSM.LIC file generated from your serialisation certificate details, installs ran from the server directory will automatically use your generated key and the installer will no longer prompt you to enter licence information. This is particularly useful if you are installing on large numbers of workstations and when combined with the silent install facilities (refer to the defaults.txt file for details of how to do this) enables you to fully automate the installation of the product.

Limitations

The installer program will enable you to generate your licence key for the majority of keys but it does not support some of the advanced key options.

The following types of keys cannot be generated by the installer program

•	Demand load keys

•	Quiet mode keys

•	Special evaluation keys with extended expiry dates

For these types of keys you will need to use the NetSupport Licence Manager described below

Generating Licence Keys without installing

There are a number of reasons why you may need to do this:-

•	You have previously installed using an EVAL key and do not want to re-install

•	You have a special type of key (see limitations in the above section)

You can use a utility called the NetSupport Licence Manager to generate the licence key. Then you can distribute the key to workstations that have NetSupport already installed or use the generated key to replace the default key supplied on the installation media for new installations.

To start the NetSupport Licence Manager, run PCILIC.EXE which you can find in

the directory where you have installed NetSupport.

When it loads it reads in the details from your existing licence file called NSM.LIC and allows you to update the information.

PCILIC.EXE can also be found on your installation media in compressed format. To uncompress copy PCILIC.EX_ and the expand program EXPAND.EXE to a temporary location and run EXPAND PCILIC.EX_ PCILIC.EXE

There are four Tabs in the NetSupport Licence Manager

•	General

•	Advanced

•	Defaults

•	Enforce

The information must be entered exactly as it appears on your Licence Certificate. The process is case sensitive and needs to be exact. If your Authorisation key does not match the information that you enter, the licence key will fail to be generated.

GENERAL TAB

In most cases this is the only information that you will need to change. Here you enter the details from your serialisation certificate.

Licensed to	This is usually your company name

Max Clients	This is the number of client licences that you have purchased

Serial Number 	This is your unique serial number

Expiry Date	If you have purchased the product you will enter 0 in this field as there will not be an expiry date. If you have been provided a special evaluation key you will enter the date supplied.

When you have completed making the changes to this and any other Tabs you will need to enter your authorisation code and select the generate button to create your updated licence key file. If this fails please check and re-enter the details. Also see below for details of common problems.

ADVANCED TAB

You will only need to check the boxes on this tab if you have specifically asked for the functions provided when placing your order

Demand Load Key: This type of key is only provided where specialist requirements prevent the Client program from loading on start-up of the client workstation.

Quiet Client: This type of key is provided to prevent the client icon from displaying

DEFAULTS TAB

Settings are placed in this Tab to change NetSupport default configuration settings. Please leave this tab unchanged unless advised otherwise

Enforce Tab

Settings are placed in this Tab to change / disable NetSupport functions. Please leave this tab unchanged unless advised otherwise

COMMON PROBLEMS:-

•	The process is case sensitive please enter as per the serialisation certificate

•	Entering additional spaces between text

Once you have successfully generated your licence key (NSM.LIC file) you can distribute the file to the workstations that you have previously installed the product on. Alternatively, you can use it to replace the default NSM.LIC on your installation media when installing on new workstations


Resolve Initial Network Errors

When you start NetSupport Manager for the first time, the network transports are loaded and may result in an error.  These errors usually indicate that one of the transports NetSupport uses is unavailable.

By default, NetSupport will have set TCP/IP as the default protocol, so it's worth checking your settings before you proceed.

Select {Network}{Configure} from the Control drop down menu bar. Each transport will be identified and you can select which of these are to be used.

For each transport you select click on the [Test] button. This will check that the stack is installed and properly configured.

For NetBIOS, you must also select the NetBIOS adapter to use by selecting it. Normally this will be the stack identified as NetBEUI.


Using NetSupport's security features effectively!

NetSupport has a large number of security features that can be used to restrict access to the Control and Client. Knowing how these work together and their limitations is useful when planning your security policy.

Firstly, we recommend that if you want to restrict access to or protect a Client you do it at the Client, not at the Control.

There are a number of reasons for this. If the workstation contains sensitive information that you want to protect it is likely that the workstation will have some physical security measures. Perhaps it is located in a locked room, a restricted area or maybe it has some local security measures  e.g. it runs NT using NTFS.

It doesn’t matter how good the NetSupport Client’s security is if people can just walk up to the workstation and access the information.

We recommend the following measures are used to secure a NetSupport Client. They are ranked from most secure to least secure. See the help in the Client Configurator for more information.

•	Physically protect access to the workstation.

•	Use a secure operating system such as NT and use its security to protect the workstation locally. i.e. use NTFS and user profiles for NT.

•	Store the Client Configuration files in a secure area such as NT Server.

•	Set Client Profiles that restrict the access rights that individual Control users or Groups of Users have to what they actually need.

•	Set a security key at the Control and Client. This only allows Controls to connect to the Client only if they have the same security key. For example, you can use this function to provide someone in a department with access to their departments workstations only.

•	Use the audit log/event log so you can determine who has connected and when.

•	Disable features at the Client that you know the Control User will not  need. For example, disable File Transfer or set Watch Only if you don’t want people to manipulate the screen.

•	For NT Client Workstations use the NT Security features such as validate USERID.

•	Set a password on the Configurator and restrict access to who can run it.

•	Password protect the Controls and set Control profiles for individual users.

•	Set restrictions in the Control Profile for accessing certain features like File Transfer, Viewing, Show etc.


Using the Client cache efficiently

NetSupport can store areas of the Client screen in local memory. This enables the Control to determine whether it needs to get the area from the Client (relatively slow) or from local memory (fast), this is commonly referred to as a cache.

The Client and Control use the same size cache, the size of the cache for the Client is set via the Configurator, the size of the Control cache is set in the View settings. The lower of the Control and Client values is used.

Use the Cache tab of the About box to determine how efficiently the cache is currently working. If the hit rate is low then not many items have been requested from the cache (or your remote control session has not been very intensive). You could save memory by reducing the size of the cache. If the hit rate is high then the cache is being used heavily, in this case you may like to increase the size of the cache to speed up the remote control session.

The cache on the Control is created for each Client when it is viewed, bear this in mind if you regularly view multiple Client’s screens. If each Client has a 4Mbyte cache and you view 6 of them, the Control will allocate 24Mbytes of memory. If the total size of all the caches exceeds you physical memory size then the operating system will start paging memory to disk, this will affect the performance of the cache.

If you have Clients with different cache sizes set, configure the Controls to be as big as the largest Client setting. That way the Control will always allocate the largest cache the Client can support.


Using Compression efficiently

Compression can be configured to three different settings, on, off or Delta File Transfer.  When compression is turned on, screen data and file transfer operations are compressed. However, if a file is transferred that is already stored compressed (such as a zipped file or certain graphic files) NetSupport will stop trying to compress it further after 64KBytes. If User Compression is turned on then the file is compressed no matter what its internal structure is, this can be useful for encrypting the file.

The compressing and decompressing of the information takes time. On a dial up link the overhead of compressing and decompressing is minimal compared to the transfer speed of the modems. However, on a local LAN, if either the Control and/or Client are low specification workstations the time taken to compress, transfer the data and then decompress can be greater than just sending the information directly. In this case, it is probably better to turn compression off.

You can use the Compression Tab in the About box to determine if file and screen information is being compressed efficiently. Time copying files of known sizes to determine if compression is speeding up your connection to the Client.


Null Session Shares

These type of Shares are required when you need to access a share on an NT workstation and you cannot pass any user credentials to the WinNT workstation. For example, a Win95 workstation trying to connect to a WinNT share at startup before you have a chance to log in or a process running as "local system" which tries to access files on a WinNT share. These are needed for NetSupport when you are using a centrally stored Client Configuration file on an NT workstation and you are trying to access it with a non-NT workstation.

This is covered in greater detail in the NT 4.0 resource kit, file regentry.hlp (look up Null Sessions Shares in the index).

To create a Share session

1.	From {Start}{Run} run the regedt32 utility.

Note: the regedit utility is not able to make these changes.

2.	Click on the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE

3.	Navigate to the Registry Branch - System/Current Control Set/Services/Lanman Server/Parameters.

4.	If it is already there edit the value for the Null Session Shares key, if not add it:

•	Click {Edit}{Add Key}

•	Add a key called Null Session Shares of Type REG_MULTI_SZ

•	Add a value to the Null Session Shares key for each of the Shares that you wish to have one per line.

5.	If you have not done so create the Share on your local workstation.

Note: When you are browsing to these Shares in NetSupport you may need to enter a username and password. This won’t be required later when NetSupport is attempting to read or write to this Share.


NT Client Fails to Load

Symptom

After installing NetSupport on an NT Workstation, you re-start NT but the client fails to load.

Possible Causes

1.	You installed NetSupport but were not logged in as an NT Administrator at the time.

2.	You have or have previously had other Remote Control products installed.

Possible Solutions

1.	You need to ensure you are logged onto NT as Administrator when installing or de-installing NetSupport Manager. Logon as administrator and run the Set-up program again

2.	Uninstall the other product(s) before installing NetSupport Manager.

Notes

•	Any problems loading or running the NT Client are recorded in the System Event Log, and can be viewed with the Event Viewer program supplied with NT. Look for entries of type Error from source PCIsys.

•	The file winnt\system32\pcimsg.err may also contain error information, especially on NT 4.

•	If there is an error in the NT Event log "ERROR - Cannot open write pipe - is GDIHOOK installed" see GDIHOOK


Hotkeys do not work

Symptom

You press the Hotkey combination but nothing happens.

Possible Causes

1.	You have re-mapped the Hotkey combination to a different setting or one that is already used by another program.

2.	Your keyboard cannot handle three keys pressed simultaneously.

Solutions

1.	Change the Control's Hotkeys from the Configure menu, or the Client's hotkeys from the Configurator.

2.	Change the Hotkey combination to use only two keys.


Poor Performance over Dialup Links

Symptom

After allowing for the speed of the link, screen updates and file transfer, are slower than would be expected. If you have an external modem you may notice pauses of two to three seconds between sending and receiving data as indicated by the transmit and receive lights.

Possible Causes

1.	Poor line quality.

2.	The modem is receiving data faster than it can pass it to the PC. Characters are therefore being lost and Control is having to request the Client to re-send them.

3.	The PC is sending data to the modem faster than the modem can pass it on. The modem is unable to buffer the overflow and again characters are lost.

4.	The modems themselves may be incompatible.

5.	Wallpaper is enabled at the Client.

6.	Active Desktop is enabled at The Client.

7.	You are running in a high colour depth.

Solutions

1.	Disconnect and re-dial.

2.	Reduce the Baud rate between the PC and the modem.

3.	Enable hardware RTS/CTS flow Control on the modem.

4.	Try to use modems from the same manufacturer at each end.

5.	Set the option in the Control to turn off Wallpaper (default).

6.	Turn off Active Desktop at the Client.

7.	Configure the Control for a lower colour depth to reduce data volumes.

Notes

•	The PC-to-modem baud rate is an important figure. If this is set too high or too low then the modem may not be able to keep up with the PC or vice versa and data will be lost. This is one of the most frequent causes of communication failures.

•	We recommend the use of 16550 UARTs in the PC's, especially with Windows. Unlike the more common 16450 these UARTs have a 16 character buffer and can therefore run at higher speeds without losing data.

•	Use NetSupport's built-in Modem Diagnostics to tune your modem set-up and baud rate.


Clients not found on Browse

Symptom

Workstations that you know have the Client loaded are not listed by the Control's lookup function.

Possible Causes

1.	A network router has been configured to filter out broadcasts. When the Control looks for Clients it broadcasts a message asking all Clients to reply. If broadcasts are filtered out, Clients on the far side of the router will not receive it and thus receive no reply.

2.	The Client and the Control are using different network transport protocols.

3.	The Client and the Control are using incompatible NetBIOS stacks.

4.	The Client and the Control are using different IPX frame types.

5.	The Control cannot discover the Clients' IPX network number(s) (this applies if you dial in over RAS and have no NetWare server).

6.	On TCP/IP networks, you may need to add Broadcast_ entries to the [TCPIP] configuration .

Solutions

1.	If the offending router cannot be configured to transmit broadcasts, you can use Clients, Manual Connect to connect to the Client by network address.  In the Control, this adds an entry to the Client File, and thereafter you can use Clients, Connect.

2.	Check that the network transport protocol (IPX, NetBIOS or TCP/IP) reported in the Clients' and Control's About boxes are the same.

3.	Use NBSTATUS to report on NetBIOS stacks and adapter numbers.  If using RAS, see the comments under NetBIOS.

4.	See the IPX sections in the Technical Reference.

5.	See the Test Networks Section

6.	See TCPIP Configuration .

If one or more workstations on the network can successfully perform a Lookup, you can use it to build a Client File (which you can then copy to those that can't).


Running Dr. Watson

If NetSupport Manager has incompatibilities with hardware or software the information about the problem can be found in the Doctor Watson log (drwtsn32.log) normally found in the OS system directory.

Doctor Watson is installed and run automatically in Windows NT, installed but not run in Windows 98 and is not included as part of Windows 95.

More information about Dr Watson can be found in the Windows Help -> Dr Watson entries.


Keystrokes do not get through to Client

Symptom

You can see the Client's screen but keystrokes at the Control do not appear to be passed through.

Possible Causes

1.	You are watching instead of sharing or Controlling the Client.

2.	The application at the Client is 'Filtering out' the keystrokes.

3.	A key has got 'stuck' (in a software sense).

4.	The Client has become locked out.

Solutions

1.	Switch to sharing or Controlling.

2.	Try using the BIOS keyboard instead of the Low Level Keyboard and vice versa.

3.	Try tapping the CTRL, SHIFT and ALT keys.

4.	Disconnect and reconnect the Client.

If the problem is repeatable with a particular application, please submit a problem report to your vendor.


Colours are incorrect at the Control

Symptom

The Colours on the Client and the Control do not match.

Possible Causes

1.	You have incompatible video cards on the Control and the Client.

2.	The Windows Control does not handle DOS applications that change the colour palette.

3.	The Windows Client does not handle full screen DOS applications that change the colour palette.

4.	The colour palettes on the Client and Control are out of step.

5.	The Control and the Client are running at different colour depths (Windows).

6.	You have a video driver that NetSupport cannot handle.

Solutions

1.	If possible, run the application on another workstation, which will at least help to narrow down the problem.

2.	If you are using the Windows Control to control a DOS application, try using the DOS Control.

3.	Try running the offending DOS application in a window, or in DOS (with the DOS Client).

4.	Disconnect and reconnect the Client. This will cause the Client to re-send its colour palette.

5.	Try running the Control and the Client at the same colour depth. If the Control and Client are at different colour resolutions, for example a 16 colour Control watching a 256 colour Client, then NetSupport has to convert those colours. It is not always possible to find an exact match so an approximation is made.

6.	Try using the standard VGA driver (all cards should handle this).  If this fixes the problem, try to get hold of later Drivers from your video card vendor, or try running the Drivers for that card supplied with Windows.  If this fails, please contact NetSupport Technical Support.

Note: that background windows on 256 colour workstations do not always appear correctly.  This is a compromise between faithful colour rendition and good performance.


Browse does not find IPX Clients

You need to ensure that you are using the same IPX frame type at both the Control and the Client.  Otherwise you may find problems detecting the Client.  Using Auto detect (default) does not always set this correctly.  It is best to set it explicitly it at both the Control and the Client.

This is done by choosing Control Panel -> Network -> Protocols -> IPX -> Properties and setting the frame type.  Normally this is set to 802.3.

More information about Dr Watson can be found in the Windows Help -> Dr Watson entries.


Setting the correct NetBIOS Adapter Number

Using Net Support Manager with an unavailable NetBIOS stack in Windows 98/95 will cause the computer to hang about 30 seconds into start up.  The logical location of the NetBIOS stacks can change in Win95/98 after any change of Network settings.

The best solution to this problem is to disable NetBIOS before making changes to your network settings.

Once this problem has occurred then there are two ways to fix it.

1.	Start up as normal and attempt to disable NetBIOS through the Configurator before the computer hangs.

2.	Start the workstation in safe mode (without any networking) and disable NetBIOS through the Configurator.

Note: That there appears to be a bug in the Windows 95 implementation of TCP/IP NetBIOS, which causes the workstation to ‘blue screen’.  Avoid this protocol on Windows 95 (it works OK on Windows NT and Windows 98).


The Control connects but cannot View Clients screen's

Symptom

The Control can connect to the Client, but the Client's screen does not appear at the Control.

Possible Causes

1.	The Control has missed something sent by the Client.

2.	You have a video driver that NetSupport cannot handle.

3.	On Windows 95, change the hardware acceleration in {Control Panel}{Display}{Settings}{Advanced}{Performance}. Try setting this to Full, and reduce it only if you have problems.

Solutions

1.	Stop and restart remote controlling, or disconnect and reconnect to the Client. This will cause the Client to re-send its screen to Control.

2.	Try using the standard VGA driver (all cards should handle this).  If this fixes the problem, try to get hold of later Drivers from your video card vendor, or try running the Drivers for the card supplied with Windows (if any).  If this fails, please contact NetSupport Technical Support.

3.	Change Hardware acceleration in {Control Panel}{System}{Performance}{Graphics}.  Try setting this to Full, and reduce it only if you have problems.


Text appears in wrong font at the Control

Symptom

The fonts on the Client and Control screens do not match.

Possible Causes

1.	The application running on the Client is using a screen font that is not available on the Control. Control uses the nearest available match that it finds in the Windows font mapper; the results are not always attractive.

2.	You are using a Windows Control to view a DOS Client.

Solutions

1.	The best solution is to make sure that whatever screen fonts are used on a Client are also available on the Control.  Installing the application in question on the Control workstation often achieves this.

2.	If the Client is running, try starting the Client with the Send Physical Fonts option (this only works for True Type fonts).

3.	If the application is running full-screen, try Change DOS Font.  If this fails, try using the DOS Control.

4.	If the application is running in a DOS box, try changing the font used for the DOS box at the Client.

Note: You can install additional fonts on the Control with Control Panel, Fonts.


IPX Control takes a long time to Browse or Connect

Symptom

The IPX Control takes more than a few seconds to connect to a Client by name, or excessive time when Browsing.

Possible Causes

On some networks, the list of network numbers discovered by the Control can be incorrect.  When the Control tries to communicate with non-existent network numbers, delays are encountered.

Solutions

On Windows 9x and NT Clients

1.	From the Control main Window choose Network Configure.

2.	Select Transport.

3.	Check the IPX Box and press the TEST button.

4.	Make sure that the IPX Networking is confirmed as working.

5.	Accept the prompt to Check IPX Numbers.

6.	Check the box to ignore Networks not responding.

You should also investigate why the Network numbers are not responding. It may be a router problem or more likely that the Network Numbers no longer exist but have not been deleted from a table on a server, bridge or router.

This condition is sometimes a transient one, caused by servers starting up or shutting down.


IPX Client takes a long time to load

Symptom

The IPX Client takes more than 30 seconds to load, and the workstation may be unresponsive during this time.

Possible Causes

On some networks, the list of network numbers discovered by the Client can be incorrect.  When the Client tries to communicate with non-existent network numbers, delays are encountered.

Solutions

1.	Run Client Configurator.

2.	Select Transport.

3.	Check the IPX Box and press the TEST button.

4.	Make sure that the IPX Networking is confirmed as working.

5.	Accept the prompt to Check IPX Numbers.

6.	Check the box to ignore Networks not responding

You should also investigate why the Network numbers are not responding. It may be a router problem or more likely that the Network Numbers no longer exist but have not been deleted from a table on a server, bridge or router.

See also: IPX Control Takes a Long Time to Lookup or Connect.


Cannot open write pipe - Is GDIHook Installed?

Symptom

The above error message is displayed in the NT Event log.

Cause

Some system files required by NetSupport are missing or have been incorrectly installed.

Solution

Refer to Changes to Windows NT4 Registry and System Files.

If the files do not exist then run the NetSupport Installation program again ensuring that you are logged in as an NT Administrator.

If the files do exist then run the utility "Reset Video driver" found in the NetSupport Manager folder,  (ENSURE YOU ARE LOGGED ONTO NT AS ADMINISTRATOR before running this). Re-start the workstation.

If after following the above procedure the problem persists, please report the problem through your distributor and provide the following information:-

Check the NT event log to see where you get the error CLIENT32: Cannot open write pipe (is GDIHOOK installed?). Record the bytes info displayed in the lower portion of the screen.

Check for the existence of a file called winnt\system32\pcimsg.err and check the contents for an entry corresponding to the time / date of the current error.

If you are proficient with using the NT utility REGEDIT you can refer to the help files "" and check the sections on GDIHOOK and PCISYS are registered correctly.  If the entries have not been correctly updated please record the current Key entries.


Windows Standby Mode

If you configure your Windows workstations to enter standby mode during periods of inactivity you will find that NetSupport Manager will not find the Clients when performing a browse of the network.

A connection to the Client will only be possible once the Client workstation has been resumed.


Restarting the Client

In order to save any changes made to a Profile the file Client32.INI must be saved. Once saved, Windows should be restarted for these changes to take effect. On Windows XP, 2000 and NT you can stop and start the Client32.INI from the Client Configurator dialog box.

To save changes made to a Profile

1. Choose {Save} from the File drop down menu in the Client Configurator dialog box.

To restart the Client from the Client Configurator dialog box

1.	Click on the Restart button on the toolbar. A general information and licence NetSupport dialog box will appear.

Or,

1.	From the File drop down menu, choose Stop Service. A dialog box will appear informing you that the Client32 Service is being stopped.

2.	From the File drop down menu, choose Restart Service.

3.	A dialog box will appear informing you that the Client32 Service is being started.

4.	A general information and licence NetSupport dialog box will appear.


Understanding IP Addresses

An IP address is made up of 4 bytes, each byte being made up of eight bits, which can have a value of 1 or 0. This gives possible IP addresses of 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255.

Each IP address is also split into two portions, a network portion, which identifies the network the device is on, and the local or host portion, which identifies a particular device.

The subnet mask defines the position of this split between the network and host portions of the address, which is associated with the address. The subnet mask is also a four byte number. Each bit in the subnet mask that is set to 1 denotes that the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network portion.

For example if we have an IP address of 10.10.2.21 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0

IP Address	10	.	10	.	2	.	21
Subnet Mask	255	.	255	.	255	.	0
IP Address In Binary	00001010	.	00001010	.	00000010	.	00010101
Subnet Mask in Binary	11111111	.	11111111	.	11111111	.	00000000
Network Portion Of IP Address	00001010	.	00001010	.	00000010	.	00000000
Host Portion Of IP Address	00000000	.	00000000	.	00000000	.	00010101
Network Portion Of IP Address	10	.	10	.	2	.	0
Host Portion Of IP Address	0	.	0	.	0		21
Therefore when we send an IP packet to 10.10.2.21 we are actually sending a packet to device 21 on network 10.10.2.0

In the example above, the network 10.10.2.0 can have 256 host addresses, 0 to 255.  However, two of the host addresses, the first and last, on each IP network are reserved. The reserved host address with all bits set to 0 is the Network Address, and the one with bits set to 1 is the broadcast address.

In our example network of 10.10.2.0

10.10.2.0 is the network address

10.10.2.255 is the broadcast address.

When an IP packet is sent to a networks broadcast address each device on the IP network will receive this packet.

It is this IP network broadcast address, which is used when configuring NetSupport Control to browse on an IP subnet other than its own.


Understanding IPX Addresses

An IPX address is made up of two portions, a network portion, which denotes which network a particular device is attached to, and a node portion, which denotes the physical device on the network.

The network portion of an IPX address is an eight digit hexadecimal number, valid network addresses ranging from 00000000 to FFFFFFFF. There are no reserved IPX network numbers, however each IPX network on an internetwork must have a unique network number.

The node portion of an IPX address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number, this is normally the MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is a unique number that is burnt into the EPROM of a network card by the cards manufacturer

Below is an example of an IPX address

Network		Node
00000001	:	0000E8D67295
When configuring a NetSupport Control to browse a remote IPX network you must know the IPX network address of the remote network.

The NetSupport Client can display the IPX network number of the IPX network to which it is attached.

1.	From the Client Main Window select {Help}{About the Client}.

2.	Click Transports.

3.	The IPX address is shown in full. Make a note of the network portion of this address, it will be required when configuring the Control.


Configuring the NetSupport Manager Control to Browse Remote IPX Networks

Before configuring a NetSupport Control to browse a remote IPX network it is useful to understand how IPX addresses are formatted. You will need to have the IPX network numbers for each IPX network that you wish NetSupport Manager to browse, this includes the IPX network number for the local network on which the NetSupport Manager Control is installed.

See Understanding IPX Addresses

To Configure the NetSupport Control to Browse Remote IPX Networks

1.	Choose {Tools}{Configurations} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select the required Configuration file and click Connectivity and Startup Settings.

3.	Select Connectivity-IPX.

4.	Check the Use IPX and Record Clients’ Network Numbers options.

5.	In the Use Networks box enter each of the IPX network numbers that you wish NetSupport Manager to browse. If multiple network numbers are required, separate each with a comma (,).


Using Command Line Instructions

The NetSupport Control program, PCICTLUI.EXE, can be called from the command line. A range of parameters are available, enabling you to create shortcuts to many commonly used tasks.

Using these parameters you can, for example, create different Control profiles, set-up a connection to specific Clients, and then create a desktop icon to automatically execute the commands when required.

NetSupport Command Line Options

At the command line run ‘PCICTLUI.exe’, from the NetSupport Program folder, followed by the appropriate parameters:

/N	Loads a specific Control Configuration. (Created using {Tools}{Configurations} from the Control Window drop down menu)

Note: When using control configuration profiles, it is advisable to password protect the configuration and keep the standard configuration unchanged to avoid locking yourself out of the control.

Syntax

PCICTLUI /NPROFILE NAME (where profile name = the stored configuration name)

/F	Used with /N, restricts the control to only use the specified profile. By including this parameter, you prevent the Control User from being able to alter or add configurations.

Syntax

PCICTLUI /N /FPROFILE NAME

/C	Connect to a specific Client by name or address.

Syntax

If connecting by IP address:

PCICTLUI /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" (where "NN.NN.NN.NN" = the IP Address)

If connecting by name:

PCICTLUI /CNNNNNN (Where NNNNNN = client name)

/V	Used in conjunction with /C, opens the View Window, in share mode, of the connected Client.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /V

/VC	Opens a View Window to the connected Client in Control Mode.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VC

/VW	Opens a View Window to the connected Client in Watch Mode.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VW

/VS	Opens a View Window to the connected Client in Share Mode.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VS

/E	Used in conjunction with the /V options, opens the View Window without loading the Control. When the View Window is closed, the remote control session ends.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /V /E

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VC /E

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VW /E

PCICTLUI.EXE /C">NN.NN.NN.NN" /VS /E

/G	Connect to a defined group of Clients on startup.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /GNNNNN  (where NNNNN = the Group name)

/D	Dial into a Remote Network. Can be used in conjunction with /C

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /DNNNNN /Cxxxxx  (where NNNNN = the name of the Remote Network and xxxxx = the name of the Client to connect to)

/U	Specify the protocol to use. Use IP for IPX/SPX, TC for TCP/IP, and NBn for NETBIOS where n = the stack 0-7.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /Unb1 (where nb1 = netbios stack 1)

/R	Display a NetSupport replay file.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /RNNNNN.rpf  (where NNNNN.rpf = the file name)

/A	Open a Chat session with a selected Client.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /CNN.NN.NN.NN  /A

/I	Retrieves a Hardware/Software Inventory from the selected Client machine.

Syntax

PCICTLUI.EXE /CNN.NN.NN.NN  /I

See also

Profiling a control/Create Shortcut Icons

Remote Command Prompt Window


Changes to Windows 98/ME System Files

The following changes are made when the NetSupport Client is installed on Windows 98/Me.

On installation of NetSupport, the following system files are installed on Windows 98/Me PCs.

In the windows\system Directory:

PROCHOOK.DLL

PCIMSG.DLL

NSMVGA.DRV

Changes to the system Registry:

To locate these entries use the find option in REGEDIT.

The Client is installed as a service in registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\software\Microsoft\windows\Currentversion\RunServices.  NetSupport Client registry entry in this key contains the Client and its command line parameters.


System Pre-Requisites

Some areas of NetSupport’s functionality rely on the presence of certain files/applications.

General

Internet Explorer 4.01 service pack 2 or above.

Testing Module

The Test Designer requires MDAC 2.1 or higher and COMCTL32.dll version 5.80 or higher. During installation, NetSupport will check to see if these files are present and advise if not. However, if installing ‘silently’ using the NetSupport Deploy utility, you will not be warned if the files are missing.


Implementing NetSupport School in a Terminal Server Environment

A NetSupport Control can connect to Clients within a Terminal Server environment.

For ease of implementation NetSupport provides a downloadable setup package which will guide you through the required installation and configuration processes. Our online Knowledge Base provides full instructions, please visit www.netsupportsoftware.com/support and refer to the Technical Document Setting Up NetSupport School to run in a Microsoft Terminal Server Environment (TD128).

When the setup is ready you can configure the NetSupport Control to browse for the required Terminal Server Clients.

1.	Select {School}{Configuration} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	From the Configuration options choose Connectivity.

3.	With the TCP/IP transport checked, click Settings. The Configure TCP/IP Client Browsing dialog will appear. Details of any existing Broadcast Addresses will be displayed and you can add your Terminal Server requirements to the list. Click Add.

4.	You will be prompted for an IP Browse Address but to enter your Terminal Server address range, click Advanced.

5.	In the Advanced Browse dialog enter the IP Address of your Terminal Server and the range of Port Numbers allocated to the Terminal Server Clients. Click OK, the specified browse details will be added to the list of addresses. Click OK to accept the listed Broadcast Addresses.

6.	Click OK to accept the new TCP/IP settings. To apply the changes immediately click Yes.

7.	You can now Browse for your Terminal Server Clients.


Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing

If your network is running across multiple TCP/IP Subnets you need to configure NetSupport to use the additional subnets when browsing for Clients.

Before configuring NetSupport to browse on a remote IP subnet it is useful to understand how IP addresses are made up and in particular what an IP Broadcast Address is. See Understanding IP Addresses

To Configure the NetSupport Control to browse IP subnets

1.	Select {School}{Configuration} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	From the Configuration options choose Connectivity.

3.	With the TCP/IP transport checked, click Settings.

4.	The Configure TCP/IP Client Browsing dialog will appear.

5.	Click Add and enter the Broadcast Address of the Network you wish to browse if known.

or

To enable NetSupport to calculate the Broadcast Address, click Advanced and enter a Target IP Address followed by the Subnet mask or enter the required Address Range.

6.	Click OK.

Notes:

•	When adding the address of a remote subnet, you must ensure that the broadcast address for the local subnet is also present. If not, the Control will not find any local clients when you perform a browse.

•	Some network Routers will suppress broadcast packets from being transmitted across WAN links. If this is the case then even if the Control is correctly configured you will not be able to browse the remote subnet.


Optimising Show Performance On  A Wireless Network

To achieve the maximum benefit from this feature it is important to ensure that the settings used within the NetSupport School Tutor are in-line with your Wireless Network configuration.

Wireless LAN access points will typically have ‘factory’ configured settings which provide a balance between ‘Range ’ and ‘Performance ’. In general terms, by reducing the range you can enhance performance.

Note:	Our online Knowledge Base provides general advice on reconfiguring your access point. Please visit www.netsupportsoftware.com/support and refer to Technical Document 495.

When NetSupport is optimised for maximum show performance the networking protocol used is called UDP (User Datagram Protocol), sometimes referred to as Multicast. This minimises network traffic and maximises show performance.

It is important to note that on many high end Wireless access points there is a separate setting for UDP data transmission rates. In many cases the default setting may be set very low. For example 1Mbps. Re-configuring your access point to allow UDP (Multicast) network traffic to be transmitted at higher transfer rates can provide significant performance benefits.

When using UDP/Performance mode in NetSupport School it is also important to match your NetSupport School wireless LAN configuration to the transfer rate set for your wireless network. Using the correct NetSupport School configuration will ensure that data is sent at the correct transfer rate to match your network. Sending Data faster than your network transfer rate can result in lost packets / re-tries and have a detrimental affect on performance.

Please consult your supplier / manufacturer for advice and guidance on configuring your device.


Range

The distance the end-user PCs can be used from the access point.


Performance

The data transfer rate for the wireless network.


Glossary Terms

A

ATX

Active X

Attribute

Audio

Auto-Scroll

Available Client

B

Baud Rate

Bridge

Broadcast Packets

Broadcast Show

Browse

C

Cache

CAPI

Chat

Client

Client.NSM

Client Information Box

Client List

Client Properties

Compression

Computer Name

Configurator

Connected Client

Control

Control Mode

D

Delta File Transfer

Dial-back password

Dial-up Networking

Direct Serial Link

Dual Channel Bonding

E

Encryption

Execute

Exhibit

F

File Distribution

File Manager

File Transfer

Firewall

Full Screen Mode

G

Gateway

Group

Group List

Group Properties

H

Help Requests

Hotkeys

HTTP

I

Icon

Inactivity Timeout

Initialise

IP Address

IPX/SPX

Inventory

J

K

Keyboard Layout

Known Clients

L

LAN

Leased Line

List View

Long File Name

M

MAC Address

Machine Name

Macro

Messages

Modem

Multimedia

Multiple Subscriber Number

N

Named Configuration

NetBEUI

NetBIOS

NetBIOS Adapter

NetSupport Administrator

Network Address

O

P

Physical Font

Port Number

Power Management

Print Capture

Profile

Properties

Protocol

Proxy Server

Q

R

RAS

Remote Access Service

Remote Communications

Remote Control

Remote Deploy

Remote Network Connection

Remote Networking

Replay Files

S

Scanning

Scale to Fit

Scheduling

Script

Security Keys

Selected Client

Settings

Share Mode

Showing

Silent Installation

Subnet

T

TAPI

TCP/IP

Testing Module

Tickle Packets

Transports

Tree View

U

Unattended

User Acknowledgement Required

V

Video Driver

Video Skipping

Viewing

VNC

W

WAN

Watch Mode

X

Y

Z


NetSupport Bridge

A module loaded on any Client, either on a standalone or networked workstation that provides dial-in access to that workstation or to any workstation on the same network with a NetSupport Client running on it.


Remote Network Connection

A connection over a NetSupport Dial-up Link as opposed to over the LAN.


Remote Access Service

Remote Access Service (RAS) is supplied with Windows NT and provides a means of connecting a remote workstation to a LAN using dial-up networking.  It supports IPX, NetBEUI and TCP/IP.

Once the connection has been made the remote workstation effectively becomes part of the LAN.


NetBIOS Adapter

As you can have more than one NetBios stack loaded, each stack is allocated an Adapter Number by the operating system. So for example, NetBEUI may be allocated Adapter 1, NetBIOS over TCP Adapter 2.


NetBIOS

A protocol used to enable workstations to communicate in a Networked environment.

NetBIOS, referred to as NetBEUI in the Microsoft environment, is a non-routable protocol suitable for small LANs.

Where routing, for example in a Wide Area Network, is required it is generally preferable to use another protocol such as TCP/IP.

In the Windows environment you can load multiple NetBEUI stacks by attaching them to different virtual adapters.


IPX/SPX

Internetwork Packet Exchange / Sequenced Packet Exchange. A network protocol developed by Novell to enable workstations and servers to communicate.

IPX/SPX is a routable, connection-orientated protocol that uses the MAC Address of the Network Adapter to uniquely identify the workstation and a network number to identify the network. SPX adds reliability to IPX by requesting acknowledgements to transmitted data. Windows NT implements IPX/SPX through NWLink.


Transports

The networking protocol that the Control or Client have been configured to use.

NetSupport supports TCP/IP, IPX, NetBIOS and HTTP.


Tickle Packets

Normally when a Client is connected to a Control, they send each other a tickle packet every 30 seconds.  This provides a check that the other end is still active and has not been turned off or subject to a network failure.

There may be occasions when the use of tickle packets is undesirable, for example over an ISDN line where you want the line to be dropped if there is no activity. You can turn off tickle packets at both the Client and the Control.


Broadcast packets

A packet broadcast to all workstations on a LAN rather than being addressed to specific network addresses.


Named Configuration

NetSupport supports the creation of named configurations for different Control users. By using a named configuration you can tailor the amount of functionality that a Control user will have according to their security level. For example, you might configure one user to have full functionality but another to have Watch only capability.

You create Named Configurations by choosing {Tools}{Configurations} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.


Client

The workstation that is to be taken over. Sometimes called the Host.


Group

A sub-set of NetSupport Clients that have been "Grouped" together for faster and easier access.  Placing Clients in a Group allows you to connect to them in total and undertake actions such as file transfer to multiple Clients simultaneously.

Groups are stored in the Group Folder.


Known Clients

Clients that have previously been connected to and whose Network address is therefore Known. Known Clients are stored in the Clients Folder in the List View.


Port Number

When communicating over TCP/IP, an application needs a Port Number to be able to identify which packets are specifically for that application.

In the case of NetSupport, two default ports are used depending on the type of connection being made. The NetSupport Control uses port 5405 to send IP requests to Clients, the Client receiving incoming requests on the same port. To enable a Client  to call the Control, port 5421 is used.

If connecting to a NetSupport Client/Control over the Internet or anywhere that a router or firewall is involved it is important that the routing device be configured to allow packets on the appropriate NetSupport port.


Tree View

The Tree View Pane in the main Window provides an explorer like structure for creating, displaying and organising NetSupport objects such as Clients and Groups.


NetSupport Administrator

A person or persons with sufficient access rights to set up Control Named Configurations for other Control users.


Hotkeys

Short cut key combinations, set in the Control and Client Configurators.


Keyboard Layout

Normally the Control and the Client will be using the same Keyboard Layout, for example US English. There may be circumstances in which they are using different keyboards, for example English and German. In this case you must configure the Control to use the same Keyboard layout as the Client, otherwise incorrect characters may be displayed.

The key mappings i.e. what is sent from the Control to the Client is stored in the NetSupport file called Control.KBD. You can edit this file to set your own mappings.


Client.NSM

The NetSupport file in which Client names and network addresses are stored. It is located in the NetSupport directory and can be edited or copied to other Control workstations.


Share Mode

When a Client is being controlled in Share mode both the User at the Client and the Control can enter keystrokes and mouse movements.


Control Mode

When a Client is being controlled in Control mode only the User at the Control can enter keystrokes and mouse movements. The user at the Client is locked out.


Watch Mode

When a Client is being controlled in Watch mode only the User at the Client can enter keystrokes and mouse movements. The user at the Control is locked out.


Cache

A means of storing recently used data in memory rather than having to regenerate or retrieve from disk. NetSupport caches screen information to reduce the need to re-send it over the Network. The higher the cache the more likely that the Client screen information will already be available to the Control and therefore the screen update time will appear faster.


Client Properties

Additional information stored at the Control concerning Known Clients such as Name, Display Name, transport and Network Address.

Right clicking on a Client and choosing properties sets the information.

This information is displayed by setting the option from the Control Menu Bar, View Menu to Details.

The fields displayed are set using the View, Columns option from the Control menu Bar.


Showing

Displaying the Controls screen on Client screens. This is the opposite of Viewing a Clients screen at the Control.


Scanning

Cycling through each connected Client displaying its screen at the Control. This is an alternative to Viewing multiple Clients simultaneously where definition can be lost if Scale to Fit is used.


Help Requests

A message from a Client workstation to advise that they require assistance. Clients can specify which Control they send the help request to and the Control can specify when they are available to receive the message. Help Requests appear in the Help Request folder in the Tree View.


Client Information Box

A dialog displayed at the Client workstation by maximising the NetSupport Client icon and choosing Help, About.

The information displayed includes the Clients physical name, its transport and network address and its NetSupport serialisation details.


Long File names

NetSupport supports long file names in File Transfer. File names can be up to 128 characters.


Group Properties

Additional information stored at the Control concerning Groups such as Name, Description and which Clients are members of the Group.

Right clicking on a Group and choosing properties sets the information.

This information is displayed by setting the option from the Control Menu Bar, View Menu to Details.

The fields displayed are set using the View, Columns option from the Control menu Bar.


User Acknowledgement Option

A security option that can be set at NetSupport Clients that requires the Client to explicitly give permission for a Control to remote control it.


Dial Back Password

A security option on a NetSupport Bridge that causes it to Dial-Back the Remote Control attempting to connect through it.


Available Client

A workstation that a NetSupport Client is running on.


Client List

Once a Control has connected to a Client it becomes a Known Client and is stored in the Clients Folder in the Controls Tree View. Its details can then be displayed in the associated List View for the folder.


Group List

A List of Groups displayed in the List View when opening the Group Folder in the Tree View.


Browse

A means of searching the Network to auto-discover all NetSupport Clients and their Network addresses. Those found are displayed in the Browse Folder, or Gateways Folder if a Browse for Gateway Clients has been performed, of the Control Window Tree View.


Remote Networking

Connecting to a LAN from an external site by means of a dial-up link.


Full Screen Mode

You can View a Clients screen in Windowed Mode which allows you to see the NetSupport menus, or Full screen mode. In full screen mode the whole of the Control’s screen is used to display the Clients screen.


Auto-Scroll

When Viewing a Client in a Window the area of the Clients screen may be too large to display in a Window. Auto-scroll provides an alternative to scroll bars whereby the scrollbars are turned off and the mouse position is used to re-locate the screen. Another alternative is to turn on Scale to Fit, which will resize the Clients screen to fit the available View Window.


Control

The workstation that is used to take over another. Sometimes called the Viewer.


Viewing

Controlling a Client workstation on a Control workstation.


Network address

Whatever protocol it is running on a networked workstation has a network address. You can use this for connecting to a Client when all other methods fail.

The network address takes the form of: -

IPX

Network Number-Workstation Address e.g. 00000120-12345678

TCP/IP

123.124.125.255

NetBIOS

NetBIOS uses a Name only and is not routable


Computer Name

A name typically used on Microsoft networks to identify a particular workstation on the network. Also called the Machine Name.


NetSupport Configurator

A utility supplied with NetSupport that simplifies the process of Configuring Clients. It is started from the NetSupport Program manager Group.


LAN

Local Area Network. A group of workstations and other devises dispersed over a relatively limited area and connected by a communications link that enables any devise to interact with any other device on the network.


WAN

Wide Area Network. Network, usually constructed with serial lines, extending over distances.

NetSupport Manager incorporates features that allow a NetSupport Manager installation on one network to be used to remotely manage workstations on another interconnected network.


List View

The List View displays the contents of the currently selected Folder in the Tree View. You can switch the display mode between icon and detailed view. The information within the List View can also be customised to show specific information, choose {View}{Toolbar - Customise}.


Selected Client

When you click on the Client icon in the List View the Client is selected for a ‘one-to-one’ session. Multiple Clients can be selected simultaneously.


Connected Client

A network connection has been made between the Client and Control workstation, that will enable you to remotely control the Client workstation.


Exhibit

Show or display a Client’s screen on any number of Client workstation screens.


File Transfer

To move or copy a file(s) from a Control workstation to a Client.


File Manager

To manage the files on the Control workstation.


File Distribution

To move or copy a file(s) from a Control workstation to multiple Clients, simultaneously.


Encryption

A method or algorithm used to scramble data being transferred to protect it from being intercepted by unauthorised persons.


Compression

Method by which data is compacted for more efficient transmission. Data is compressed before transmission and decompressed afterwards.


Dialup Networking

Connection in which a workstation calls a server and operates as a local workstation on the network.


Chat

An online communication method between a Control and Client during a remote control session. A dynamic dialog window appears on each screen, both the Client and Control can type simultaneously and the messages will appear on both screens.


Messages

Way for a Control to communicate a message to multiple Clients, simultaneously. A dialog window appears on the Client screen, they must click OK for the message to disappear.


Initialise

1.	To prepare for use.

2.	In communications, to set a modem and software parameters at the start of a session.


Security Keys

An additional level of NetSupport security that requires both the Control and the Client to have the same encrypted key before the Client will allow a connection.


Attribute

Property of an object, such as a file or display advice.


Audio

Communicate with Clients or make announcements using preinstalled Audio hardware.


Baud rate

Number of times per second a signal changes in a communications channel. This rate varies in the number of bits it represents.


Machine Name

A name typically used on Microsoft networks to identify a particular workstation on the network. Also called the Computer Name.


Configure

To set the security and functionality levels of a Client and Control workstation.


Delta File Transfer

A method for improving performance when using the File Transfer feature. If the file being transferred already exists in the destination directory, only changed parts of the file are updated.


Direct Serial Link

A connection between two workstations via a Null Modem Cable, operating as they would over a telephone link.


Execute

To launch an application on a Client workstation. The application must be installed or available to the Client workstation.


Firewall

Software to protect a network from another network (normally the Internet) where TCP/IP packets are only sent on certain ports.


Icon

A picture or symbol that represents an object, task, command or choice users can select by pointing and clicking with a mouse.


Inactivity Timeout

If a connected Control has not carried out any mouse, keyboard or file transfer activity for the specified period of time, the Client will assume that the connection is no longer required and disconnect automatically.


IP Address

Internet Protocol Address. An IP address is a number that identifies each sender or receiver of information that is sent in a packet across a network or the internet. Before a workstation can be remote controlled using the TCP/IP transport, it’s IP Address must be known to NetSupport.

See also TCP/IP.


Leased Line

Telephone line leased from a common carrier for private use. A leased line is faster and quieter, but generally more expensive than a switched telephone line.


MAC Address

Media Access Control. On a network, the MAC address is a workstation's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the Media Access Control sublayer of the Data-Link Control (DLC) layer of telecommunication protocols. There is a different MAC sublayer for each physical device type. The Data-Link Layer is the protocol layer in a program that handles the moving of data in and out across a physical link in a network.


Script

All NetSupport functions can be automated into a script, saving time and money when running repetitive tasks.


Macro

See Scripting


Modem

Hardware used to allow workstations to communicate over phone lines. It modulates a digital signal from a workstation to an analogue signal for transferral over phone lines. It then demodulates the signal to digital.


Multimedia

Use preinstalled audio hardware to communicate and available avi/mpg video files to demonstrate to Clients.


NetBEUI

See NetBIOS


Physical Font

If a Client sends its screen information to a Control that does not have the same or similar fonts available, the Client will have to send the Control the full information required to display the data in the same font. Setting the ‘Send Physical Fonts’ option in the Advanced Client Configurator Remote Control Tab forces TrueType text to be sent as glyphs (character shapes), rather than as character codes. This guarantees that they will be displayed correctly at the Control. If Viewing a DOS or a Japanese font, adjust the setting ‘Change DOS Font’ or ‘Change Japanese Font’ in the Control Configuration View Tab.


Print Capture

Redirects printer output from a local printer at the Client workstation to the printer or file at the Control.


Properties

Tabs that contain general contact, transport, address and system information on the Client or Group of Clients.


Protocol

See Transports


Proxy Servers

A method of using a server where workstations run/use software on another workstation by ‘proxy’.


RAS

Remote Access Service. Supplied with Windows NT and provides a means of connecting a remote workstation to a LAN using dial-up networking. It supports IPX, NetBEUI and TCP/IP. Once the connection has been made the remote workstation effectively becomes part of the LAN.


Remote Control

To control a Client workstation from a remote workstation.


Remote Communications

Interaction with a Client by a remote workstation through a telephone connection or another communications line.


Replay Files

A security video file that records all mouse movements and keyboard actions of  a Control while they were connected to the Client. Replay files can be stored locally at the Client or at the Control.


Scale to Fit

See Auto-Scroll


Scheduling

Scripts can be run unattended overnight using the Scripting Agent.


Settings

During any control session where you may be working with more than one Client, you can tailor how each Client interacts with the Control. These settings only affect the Client during that session. For example, on one Client you may want to use compression because it is on a slow link, but on another you may want to turn compression off.


Silent Installation

An installation performed with no input from the user. You must pre-configure the Defaults.Inc file which is used to pre-set the options you would normally be prompted for during installation and the Release.Ini file which enables you to pre-set the Advanced Client Configuration options.


Subnet

Subnetwork.


Unattended

See Silent


Video Driver

Software that captures video signals from the operating system then interprets them into colours and positions on a monitor.


Video Skipping

Sets a maximum number of screen updates to be sent to reduce network usage and improves performance.


Profile

A configured file that enables or disables functionality. By default NetSupport is installed with a single profile called Standard that is configured to allow full functionality.

NetSupport allows you to configure multiple profiles to cater for a variety of Control Users.


TCP/IP

Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A protocol used to enable workstations to communicate in a Networked environment. It is now the standard used across LAN’s, WAN’s, the Internet and it provides fast routable packets.


ATX

A particular specification for a set of hardware components. For example, mouse, case, keyboard, power supply etc.


Power Management

A technique that enables hardware and software to minimise system power consumption.


ActiveX

A Microsoft portable application.


Log

To record the activities and events that take place on a workstation while a Control was connected. The records are stored in a data file.


Login/Logoff

Login

To identify the user, using a name and password, to a workstation after connecting to it over a communications line.

Logoff

To end a session with a workstation accessed over a communications line. Also known as logout.


Null Session Share

A type of Share, required to access a Client configuration stored on a NT workstation from a non NT workstation.


Operating System

NetSupport runs over all Windows operating systems, including DOS, OS/2 and Alpha.


Inventory

Can be run on a Client workstation, informing you of the hardware specifications and the applications installed on the workstation.


CAPI

Common Application Programming Interface. An application programming interface for communicating over ISDN lines.


TAPI

Telephony Application Program Interface. A standard program interface that lets you and your computer "talk" over telephones or video phones to people or phone-connected resources elsewhere in the world.


Remote Deploy

A NetSupport utility enabling NetSupport Manager to be remotely installed and configured on multiple workstations simultaneously.


Dual Channel Bonding

A method for increasing bandwidth across an ISDN line. An ISDN line typically provides two channels, each of which can send/receive data at 64Kbps. By using both channels at once, calling the same location, you can double the speed to 128Kbps. However, by using both channels in this way, you are in effect making two calls.


Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)

A facility whereby you can have more than one telephone number allocated to your ISDN line. In the case of NetSupport, you may want to restrict access to the Bridge to a specfic MSN.


HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol. The protocol used to transmit and receive all data over the World Wide Web. A NetSupport Gateway uses this protocol to enable connections to Clients/Controls across the Internet.


Gateway

A NetSupport component which provides a stable and secure method for connecting Clients and Controls via the Internet using HTTP. Delivers web based remote control without the need for modifications to existing Firewall configurations.


VNC

Virtual Network Computing. Remote display system which allows you to view a desktop environment not only on the machine where it is running, but from anywhere on the Internet and from a wide variety of machine architectures. You can use NetSupport to connect to a Linux or MAC based system which has a previously installed VNC Client.


Broadcast Show

A feature that enables you to optimise performance when Showing the Tutor screen to multiple Student screens.


Testing Module

A NetSupport utility enabling Tutor’s to create customised exams, run them at Student workstations and automatically collate results.


Add a Remote Network - Name

This wizard creates a new Remote Network connection.

This connection will allow you to dial a remote site that has a NetSupport Bridge loaded and connect to Clients. You can create as many Remote Network connections as you need, but you can only connect to one site at a time.

Before you can continue, you must enter the Name for this Remote Network and an optional Description.

Name

Type in a name for the Remote Network.  This is the name that will be displayed in the Remote Networks folder.

Description (Optional)

Enter a more detailed description of the site that this object will connect to.

See also

Remote Communications Overview


Add a new Group Wizard - Name and Description

This wizard creates a Group in the Control program that contains Client records. Any Client can be a member of more than one group and each Group can have multiple Client members.

Name

Enter the name by which the Client group will be identified.  This will appear in your Groups View Window.

Description (optional)

Enter a description for the Client group, which is displayed in the detailed mode and in the Group Properties dialog.


Add a new Group Wizard - Select Clients

From this page, you can add one or more Clients to your new group.  All the Clients in your Known Client List will be displayed for you to choose from.  If you do not select any Clients, an empty group will be created that you can add Clients to later.

Available Clients

Displays all of the Clients that you can add to the group. Only the name and transport are displayed here.

Group Members

The Clients in this list are members of your new Group.  You can add and remove Clients from this list as required.  Only the Client name is displayed here.

Add >>

Select one or more Clients from the Available Clients list, and then click on Add. This will add them to the Group Members list.

<< Remove

Select one or more Clients from the Group Members list, and then click on Remove.  These Clients will now appear in the Available Clients list again.

Add All >>

Press this button to add all of the Clients in the Available Clients list, to the Group Members list.


Add a new Group Wizard - Group Members

If you have selected one or more Clients in your Known Client List, you have the option to add them directly to your new Group.

Yes, add them to this new group

Select this radio button to add all of the currently selected Clients to your new Group.

No, I’ll choose from a list of clients

Allows you to manually select the Clients to add to the Group, in the next wizard page.

No, I’ll add members later

Allows you to create an empty Group, that you can add Clients to at a later time.


Send/Collect Work Description

Provide a description for the task, which will appear in the task list.


Send/Collect Summary

This is a summary of the options set for the current task. Edit and change the task from here.


Send/Collect Dialog

This is the main dialog for creating, maintaining and running Send/Collect jobs.

New

Guides you through creating a new Send/Collect job.

Remove

Removes the selected task from the list.

Properties

Displays the summary Dialog for the selected task, you may edit the task from here.

Reset

Clears the log file for the selected task.

Send Work

Sends the files in the selected task, to the Client workstations.

Collect Work

Retrieves the files in the selected task, from the Client workstations.


Specify Files to Send

Specify which files to send to the Client.

Add

Adds the selected files to the list.

Browse

Enables you to select the files to send, by browsing.

Remove

Removes the selected files from the list.


Specify where to Send Files

Specify the folder, at the Client workstation, to send the file to.

The following properties can also be set:

Delete all files from Folder before Sending work

Before sending new work, you can delete any files that are currently stored in the folder at the Client workstation.

Remove files from Student after collecting

After collecting the completed work, you can remove the files from the Client workstation.

Student Store on Network Drive

When work is retrieved, the Client name is associated with the individual piece of work. If the Clients work areas are on a file server, you must specify a structure to identify which folder is associated with which Client.

Choose either Student or Machine Name.


Specify where to collect files to

Specify which folder, at the Tutor workstation, to store the files in when retrieving work. It will automatically create an individual sub-folder for each Client.

Delete

Check this box if you want to clear the Clients sub-folder at the Control workstation before collecting work.

When work is collected back the Client name is associated with the individual piece of work. You must specify a structure to identify which sub-folder is associated with which Client.

Choose either Student or Machine Name.

Advanced

Further specify which files to collect from the folder at the Client.


Advanced File Collection

Further specify which files to collect from the folder at the Client.


This is a NetSupport Manager Message

This is a NetSupport  Manager error Message. You should not see it when using a NetSupport School Control. If you do please advise your Distributor.


This is a NetSupport School Message

This is a NetSupport School error Message. You should not see it when using a NetSupport Manager Control. If you do please advise your Distributor.


Message Obsolete

This Message is no longer used. If you see it, please advise your Distributor.


Feature not available in NetSupport School

This is a NetSupport Manager Function that is not available within NetSupport School. Please contact your Distributor for details of NetSupport Manager.


Help not available

This Topic is no longer used and no help is available. Should you see this message please contact your Distributor.


Error nnnn RegKey

Meaning

You are attempting an action that requires NetSupport to access or update a Registry Entry. You do not have sufficient rights.

Solution

Make sure that you are logged in as a user with access rights to the Registry Entry.


User Acknowledgement

The Client you are connecting to has User Acknowledgement configured.  Until the User at the Client workstation accepts your attempt to connect, this dialog is displayed.  If no one is at the Client, you can abort the connection attempt by pressing Cancel.


Switch to Full Screen?

You can maximise the View Window to full screen. If the Client is running at a lower resolution than you are, the window will be positioned at the top left corner of your display.

To return to this Computer use the hotkeys

To return to your local workstation when you are viewing in Full Screen mode press the hotkeys (by default these are Ctrl+LeftShift+RightShift). These hotkeys can be changed from the View option in the configuration settings dialog.

Don’t display this message again

If you often use Full Screen mode, you may not want to see this dialog every time.  Check this box, to hide the message in future.


Overwrite File?

This dialog will appear when you are about to overwrite files that already exist on the destination workstation.

Choose to:

Yes

To confirm that you want to overwrite the file on the destination workstation.

No

To confirm that you want the transfer operation to proceed without copying the current file. If you are copying multiple files it will attempt to copy the next file.

Cancel

To abort the file transfer operation.

Overwrite All

Check this box to automatically overwrite all remaining files in this transfer operation.


Print Capture - Capture to ... ?

Specify the file that all printer output is captured to.  This file will contain the printer control codes for the printer driver used at the Client, and can later be printed by copying it directly to the printer (e.g. from a command prompt, copy myfile.prn lpt1).

See also

Capturing a Clients print output


The Showing Dialog

You have stopped showing your screen to the listed Client’s. The Clients mice and keyboards will currently be locked with the last screen sent, displayed.

End

Ends the show and releases the Client’s screens and keyboards.

Resume

Resumes the Show.

Continue

The Client’s screens and keyboards will remain locked while you prepare other work at the Control. They will not be able to see what you are doing. Effectively the show is suspended.

Show Leader

With the Show suspended, the Control can assign Show Leader status to one of the selected Clients. This unlocks the mouse and keyboard of the Client, enabling them to take over the demonstration. The Control continues to oversee the Show and can End the Show as required.


Delete Files?

You are about to delete one or more files off the local or Client workstation. To confirm the deletion press Yes. Press No, to abort the operation.


Reason for Connecting to Client?

This dialog is displayed when you have configured the Control to prompt for additional information when connecting.  You must enter the reason for connecting to the Client before you can continue.  This additional information is shown to the User at the Client workstation if the Client is configured to use this information.  The User then has the option to reject the link if desired, and will know why you intend to connect.


Copy Files

Specify the target directory to copy files to at the Client machines.


Add a new Client - Select from Browse List

Select the Client to be added to your Known Client List, from the browse list provided.

Select the Client from the list

The list provided contains all of the Clients found on all of the available transports, during a Browse.  Select one to be added.

Partial Name

In order to narrow down the list of Clients, enter the first part of a Client name here and press the Refresh button.  This will now perform a browse for Clients, using the partial name supplied.

Refresh

Starts a new Browse on the network and updates the Client list.  This is modified by the Partial Name that is entered in the field above.

See also

Adding a New Client


Add a new Client - Contact Details

This wizard page allows you to supply information about the person responsible for this Client.  This is useful in a support environment across a WAN, where no one person is responsible for the maintenance of Client workstations.

Contact

Enter the name of the person who is responsible for the maintenance of Client workstations.

Phone Number

Enter the contacts phone number, when network communications are unavailable


Add a new Client - Additional Details

This page allows you to supply additional information for the Client record.

Display Name

The name you enter here will be displayed in the Client list instead of the Client name supplied earlier.  This can be more descriptive than the Client name. For example: "Network Web Server" instead of NETWEB.

Description

Enter a description of the Client record.  You can see this information in the Client Properties dialog, and in the Control List View when set to display details.


Add a new Client - Name

This is the first page in the wizard that creates a new Client record.  The Client record will contain all the information necessary to allow the Control to make a connection as well as contact details.

Name

Enter the name of the Client that you want to connect to, which is often the name of the Client workstation.  You can display the Client information box on the target workstation to determine its name.

Location

Select the location of the Client from this drop down list.  This list contains all of the Remote Networks that have been configured, as well as the local network.  Information about the Remote Network is displayed beneath the list box.

Client Type

Choose NSM or VNC from the drop down list. Using the NetSupport Control you can connect to and remote control a Linux or Mac based system that has a previously installed VNC client.

I’ll choose the name from a Browse list

By checking this box, the next page shows you a list of all the Clients currently available on the network.  This is accomplished by performing a Browse. This option is only available if the Client Type is NSM.

See also

Adding a New Client


Add a new Client - Transport

This page specifies where on your network the Client workstation is located.  Select the transport that the Client is running over, and if required, the workstations network address.

IPX

Specify that the Client workstation is running over the IPX protocol.  This protocol is used in LAN/WAN environments.

TCP/IP

Specify that the Client workstation is running over the TCP/IP protocol.  This is the protocol used by the Internet and Wide Area Networks (WAN).

NetBIOS

Specify that the Client workstation is running over the NetBIOS network protocol.  This is a non routing protocol and therefore only available for local networks.  You also need to specify the adapter/stack that NetBIOS should use.

Adapters

This drop down list contains the NetBIOS adapters that are selected in your current configuration.  NetBEUI is the most common adapter used here.  You must select the adapter name that matches the NetBIOS adapter on the Client workstation.  The adapter numbers will vary from workstation to workstation, but the name will remain constant.

Address

You can optionally supply the address of the Client to connect to.  This can be an IPX address in the form 000001-12345678 or a TCP/IP address in the form 192.168.100.20.

See also

Adding a new Client


Client Connect - Add Dialog

Add a Control, for Clients to connect to.

Name

Enter the name of the Control workstation.

Address

Enter the network address of the Control workstation.

Transport

Nominate which transport the Client will use, to connect to the Control.


Add a Remote Network Location

Supply the telephone number and network transport of the NetSupport Bridge site and specify the network transport, you want to connect to.

Phone Number

Enter the telephone number of the NetSupport Bridge that you are connecting to.  You can include prefixes, such as the number to obtain an outside line if it has not already been set in your dialup networking configuration.

Transport

You must specify the transport of the NetSupport Bridge you are dialing in to.

If you specify NetBIOS, you must also specify the NetBIOS adapter number of the Bridge workstation not the NetBIOS adapter of the Control workstation.


Browse Dialog

When you perform a browse, all NetSupport Clients found on the network will be added to the browse list.  Only Clients that are using the transports you have configured in the Control, will be detected.  Once a list of Clients has been generated, you can then begin working with them.

Note:	Clients that are connected to through a NetSupport Gateway will not be found by default. The Gateways option in the Control Window Tree View provides a separate Browse facility for this purpose. However, you can choose to include them in the standard Browse by checking the Include Gateway Clients box.

Enter a partial Client name or leave blank for all Clients

Type in the first part of a Client name here to narrow the search.  If you have many Clients on your network, you may only be interested in those that begin with a certain word or letter.  If you have Clients that begin with ADMIN, typing this in would return Clients such as ADMIN1, ADMIN_OFFICE and ADMINISTRATOR.  To find all available Clients leave this field empty.

Only Clients Requesting Help

Select this check box to browse only for Clients that have requested help.

Include Gateway Clients

Check this box to include Gateway Clients when Browsing.

Click OK to begin the browse. An information box will advise you that the Control is browsing for Clients. Press Cancel to abort your browse for Clients. This will take a few seconds, after which, a list of Available Clients on the Network meeting the criteria will be displayed in the Browse folder. You can then right click on individual Clients to connect to them, display their properties or carry out tasks.


Details for NetBIOS Adapter

This window displays detailed information about the NetBIOS adapter interrogated. The adapter number and type is displayed in the title of this window.

See also

Testing NetBIOS adapters


Print Capture

This list displays all local and network printers configured on your workstation. Select one of these printers to be used when capturing printing from a Client. The location of the printer is shown in parenthesis after the printer name.

For example: "HP LaserJet IID (LPT1:)" is attached to the first printer port on your workstation.

See also

Print Capture


Client List Columns

From this dialog you can configure the columns that are displayed in the List View.

Choose the view that you want to configure by selecting the appropriate tab from those provided.  This enables you to display the columns that you are most interested in.  The tabs available are:

•	Clients

•	Remote Clients

•	Browse

•	Connected

•	Group Members

•	Help Requests

Available Columns

Displays the columns available for the selected List View that are not currently being shown. To add any of these, select it and press Add.

Current Columns

Displays the columns that are currently being displayed in the selected List View.  To remove any of these, select it and press << Remove.

Add >>

To add a column to the list of Current Columns, select an item from the Available Columns list and press this button.  The item will be displayed in the Current Columns list, and removed from the Available Columns list.

<< Remove

Select an item from the Current Columns list and press this button to remove it.  The item is removed from this list and added to the Available Columns list.

Reset

Press Reset to restore the default columns for the selected List View.

To rearrange the current order of the columns, select the column from the Current Columns List and press Reset to move it one place to the left in the selected List View.


File Properties

This dialog displays information about the selected file or files.  If you have selected multiple files, the summary will display total sizes and attributes for those files. You can set the attributes of the file here by using the attribute checkboxes.

MS-DOS Name

If the selected file has a long filename MS-DOS has a different interpretation of the filename.  This is what is commonly known as 8.3 format (short filename).

Location

Displays the location of the selected file, either on the local or current Client workstation. The path of the file is also displayed in long filename format.

Size

The total size in bytes of the selected file or files.  If you have selected multiple files, the total size of all files will be displayed.

Modified

This is the time and date that the selected file was last modified.

Attributes

You can alter the attributes of a selected file or files by checking and un-checking these boxes.

If you have selected multiple files, some of the check boxes will have three states.  If an attribute is set on all of the selected files, the checkbox will have the two normal states otherwise A third State will indicate that this attribute will not be affected.

You can change the following attributes:

•	Read Only

•	Archive

•	Hidden

•	System


Specify Password
Security – Please Specify Password

This option has been protected by the Control to stop unauthorised access. You must enter the correct password to be able to continue.


Group File Transfer - Connect to Clients

See File Distribution


Remote Networks

This dialog is displayed when dialing a remote network, but have not selected one from the Tree View or List View. The list displayed shows all of the remote networks configured and allows you to create and modify their properties.

Choose a network to dial

Select one of the remote networks from this list to dial.

Dial

Press this button to establish a connection to the specified remote network.

Properties

Edit the properties of a remote network. Any changes that take effect immediately.

Close

This will close the dialog and abandon dialing remote networks.

Transport and Startup Settings

This will configure the Transport and Startup settings for this remote network object.


Security - Please Login

Enter a valid username for the Client you are trying to connect to. These are configured at the Client, and may or may not be valid NT user ID's.

The Client will then accord you the privileges associated with the username you enter.

For example: File Transfer may be disabled or read-only.

Remember Password

If this is checked, the Control will attempt to use the same username and password when you connect to other Clients.


Modem Log

This window displays the log file generated by remote network operations.  The file contains all the information about the numbers dialed, the connection statistics and all errors that occurred.  The amount of detail displayed in the log file varies depending on the Logging Settings, set in the Dialin Bridge dialog.

Archive

Archive the current log file. The file will be saved in the same location as the original log file, but will have an incremental decimal file extension, such as MODEM.003. The original log file will then be empty.

Delete

Delete the current log file. You will be prompted to confirm before the file is deleted. Optionally use Archive to make a backup of this file.


Quick Connect

Quick Connect allows you to directly connect to a Known Client by Client Name, Logged In User Name, or by Network Address saving you having to perform a network browse and then selecting the desired Client from the List View.

Clients configured for HTTP connections through a NetSupport Gateway can also be selected.

Name

Enter the name of the NetSupport Client to connect to.  You must enter a name before you can continue.

User Name

Enter the logged in user name of the required Client.

Address

If you know the address of the Client workstation you are connecting to, you can enter it here.  You select the transport that the Client is using from the settings below.  If you are using IPX, the address is in the form 000001-12345678, or 192.168.100.20 for TCP/IP.  If you are using NetBIOS the Client address is the registered NetBIOS network name of that workstation.

HTTP Gateway

If the Client is configured for HTTP connections through a Gateway, in addition to the Name or User Name of the Client you will need to choose the appropriate Gateway name from the list provided.

Transport

Specify the transport that the Client is running on by selecting the appropriate radio button.

IPX

Specify that the Client workstation is running on the IPX protocol. This protocol is used in LAN/WAN environments.

TCP/IP

Specify that the Client workstation is running over the TCP/IP protocol. This is the protocol used by the Internet and Wide Area Networks (WAN).

NetBIOS

Specify that the Client workstation is running over the NetBIOS network protocol. This is a non routing protocol so is only available for local networks.  You also need to specify the adapter/stack that NetBIOS should use.

Adapters

This drop down list contains the NetBIOS adapters that are selected in your current configuration.  NetBEUI is the most common adapter used here.  You must select the adapter name that matches the NetBIOS adapter on the Client workstation. The adapter numbers will vary from workstation to workstation, but the name will remain constant.

Connect

When you have entered all the required information, choose Connect to attempt the connection.


Replay Controls

This window contains the controls for playing a recorded Client session.  The window contains a replay time index that indicates where in the replay file you currently are, and displays information about the file being played.  Use these controls in the same way you would a video recorder.

Stop and Play

The Stop button is shown when you are playing a replay file and the Play button when the file is stopped.  Only one of these buttons is displayed at a time.  The file is played until the end is reached or the Pause Marker is encountered.

Rewind

Restarts the replay file from the beginning.

Skip to Previous marker

Moves the replay index to the previous activity marker or to the beginning of the file. These markers are added at points when lots of activity was recorded at the Client.

Frame Advance

Advance the replay index to the next frame. Press and hold this button to Fast-Forward through the replay file.

Skip to Next marker

Moves the replay index to the next activity marker or to the end of the file if there isn’t one.

Mute

Turn audio on/off within the Replay file.

Other Information

The current time index is displayed to the right of these controls in the hh: mm: ss.ms format.  The name of the Client that the replay was recorded on, the date and time are displayed at the bottom of the window.

Replay Marker

This marker can be positioned anywhere within the time frame of the replay file.  The marker is the small black triangle beneath the time index control. Click and drag this to the position where you want the file to stop playing.  When the marker is encountered the replay stops, and you can then press play to continue past it.


Select Client

More than one Client was found with the specified name on different transports. This dialog allows you to select the protocol to use for the connection.


Security - Set Key

When you connect to a Client that has a Security Key set, you must enter it here in order to connect successfully. If the Security Key on the Client is different, the connection attempt will be rejected.  You can enter an asterisk in the fields below to use the serial number of this Control as the Security Key.

If connections are made through a NetSupport Gateway, the Gateway Key performs the same role as a standard Security Key in that it protects against unauthorised connection attempts. A Control must specify the same Key that has been set at both the Client and Gateway end.

Password

Enter the new Security Key here.  This must match the key set at the Client you are connecting to. Create a different Named Configuration if you connect to different Clients with different Security Keys.

Confirm

Re-enter the Security Key for confirmation.


Set Destination

This File Distribution function enables you to set which drive/directory on the Client workstation you copy files to.

To set the destination

1.	Select the Client in the remote pane that you want to set the file destination on.

2.	Choose {Client}{Set Destination} from the File Distribution drop down menus.

3.	A list of the Clients drives/directories will appear, specify which directory the files should be copied to.


Security - Set Password

In order to prevent unauthorised users from gaining access, enter a password here.

Password

Enter the new password here. The passwords are not case sensitive.

Confirm

Re-enter the password you have nominated, for confirmation.


Synchronise Directories

You can use this function to Synchronise the Files in:

•	Selected directories.

Files that are in one directory but not the other will be copies across.

Files that are newer in one directory than the other will also be copied.

This function is Bi-directional.


Directory Synchronisation Results

Having synchronised the directories of a Control and Client you can view how many files were copied to and directories created on the Client and Control workstations.


About - License

This page displays details about the current NetSupport Manager license.

Licensee

The registered name of the company or persons this license belongs too.

Serial Number

Your unique serial number for the NetSupport Manager license.

Licensed For

The total number of Clients that this license will allow you to run.

If this license file is an evaluation version, the following information will be displayed. This is an evaluation copy and will expire on dd/mm/yy, and NetSupport will not function after this date.

The version of NetSupport is displayed at the bottom of this and all the pages in this dialog box.

See also

Technical Support

Compression

Cache


About - Technical Support

This dialog displays information about the type of system that the Control is running on, the amount of resources available and the version of the various NetSupport components installed.

The information displayed is:

•	Operating system and version

•	Platform build number and any installed service packs

•	The User you are currently logged in as

•	The amount of physical memory installed and the amount available

File Version Information

This list displays all of the NetSupport components installed, a description about them and their version numbers.  Use this list to make sure you have the all the up to date components.

See also

License

Compression

Cache


About - Compression

This dialog is only available when you are viewing a Client workstation. It details all of the statistics about the compression engine.

Bytes Sent

These statistics tell you about compression on data being sent to the Client.

Uncompressed

The total number of bytes that were sent uncompressed; i.e. no compression was attempted.

Compressed

The total number of compress bytes sent after compression.

Expanded

The total number of compress bytes sent before compression.

Bytes Received

These statistics tell you about compression on data being received from the Client.  Details as for bytes sent.

See also

License

Technical Support

Cache


About - Cache

This dialog displays information about the usage of cache for the current connection.  Caching helps to improve performance by storing recently received screen data.  A larger cache improves performance, at the expense of using more memory at both the Client and the Control.

Cache Size (KB)

Displays the current size of the cache allocated to this connection. This is the smaller of the cache sizes set at the Control and the Client.

Items Cached

Incremented by one each time, an item is stored in the cache, but not decremented when an item is deleted to make room for a newer one.

Items Referenced

Incremented by one each time, an item is referenced in the cache.

Bytes Cached (KB)

Incremented (by the size of the item) each time, an item is stored in the cache, but not decremented when an item is deleted to make room for a newer one.

Bytes Referenced (KB)

Incremented by the size of the item each time, one is referenced in the cache.

Hit Rate

This percentage gives some indication of the effectiveness of the current cache.  Bigger numbers are better.

See also

Configuring Cache sizes

Compression

Technical Support

License


The NetSupport Bridge requires a Password

The NetSupport Bridge you are dialing into has been configured to ask for a password.  You must enter either the Bridge password or one of the Dial Back Passwords if they are set.


Delete Remote Network

The Remote Network Object you are deleting has Client records associated with it. You can save these records before the object is deleted by moving them to a different network, either local or another Remote Network

What do you want to do with the Clients?

Select what should be done with the Clients in this Remote Network Object.

Delete them

Check this radio button to simply delete the Client records when the Remote Network Object is deleted.

Assign them to network

Check this radio button and select a location for the Client records.  The list will always contain Local, and will contain the names of all the other Remote Networks that have been configured.  If you select Local the records are moved to the Known Client list.

See also

Creating a Remote Network


Client 'xxx' is about to disconnect due to inactivity

Meaning

This Client has detected that the specified period of inactivity has been encountered.  You must respond if you still want to remain connected to this Client.  If you do not respond to this message, the Client will disconnect.

Suggestions

If the period of inactivity is too short for your purposes, you can change Client Inactivity Timeout.


Import CLF/GLF Files

If you have been using a previous version of NetSupport, you may have created one or more lists of Clients, Groups and Remote Networks.  This import facility allows you to convert these existing files into the new format used by NetSupport version 4 and later.

Note: Any existing Clients or Remote Networks will be replaced by those encountered here. If a Group already exists then any new members are added, but existing members are not removed.

See also

Specifying the Import File Locations


Import CLF/GLF Files - Specify Locations

Specify the location of the import files and optionally the location of a WCONTROL.INI file. If you do not specify a directory for WCONTROL.INI, the import routine will try to locate it in the NetSupport directory.  Client files have the extension CLF, Group files have the extension GLF and the Dial Directory is stored in the file CONTROL.DIR.

If a WCONTROL.INI file was located, the import routine can use it to determine the transport of the Client files.  If you do not you can still import the files but you will need to specify the transport for each file yourself.

Specify the location of the Previous NetSupport version

Enter the directory that the old version of NetSupport was installed in. If you have installed your new version of NetSupport in the same location as the old, these files will have been preserved.  Use the Browse button to locate this directory.

Leave blank if you do not have a WCONTROL.INI

If you have the WCONTROL.INI file from an existing version of NetSupport, enter the location here.

See also

Select the file to Import


Import CLF/GLF Files - Select Files to Import

Specify which files you want to import. The list provided displays all of the Clients, Groups and Remote Networks that can be imported. If a WCONTROL.INI was found in the locations specified, some of these files will already have the correct transport information set. If an import file does not have a transport set, you must specify one before you can import it.

Note: You cannot import a Group file without importing the associated Client file.

Select files to import

Check the items you want to import into your new version of NetSupport.

If the transport for this file is not already set, you will be prompted for transport information. If the transport is already set and you want to change it, press the Set Transport button underneath the list.

The Dial Directory list entry displays the number of Remote Networks configured instead of transport information. You must set the transport for at least one Remote Network before the file can be imported.

Set Transport

Set Transport to alter the transport information for the selected item in the list provided.


Import CLF/GLF Files - Ready to Import

The items displayed in this list are the items that are ready to be imported.

Press Finish if you are happy with the file chosen, or press Back to make changes.


Import - Set Transport

Before a Client or Remote Network file can be imported you must specify the transport that the file will use.

Setting the Transport for Client files

The list of entries that are stored in the selected Client file are displayed in the large window in this dialog.  You must select a transport that will apply to all of these new Clients.

Setting the Transports for Dial Directory entries

The list provided displays all of the Dial Directory entries that were found in the CONTROL.DIR file. You must specify a transport for at least one of these networks before the file can be imported. The transport selected for each Remote Network will be displayed next to the name of the network in the list.

Transport

Select one of the available network transports to be associated with the selected Client file or Dial Directory entry.

Location

This list is only available when setting the transport for Client lists. By default the Clients will be on the local network, but can also be set to belong to a remote network. Remote networks will only appear in this list if you have included a CONTROL.DIR and have selected one or more transports for them.


Passwords Dialog

This is where you set up the individual password and the telephone number to dialback for each if required.

Password

Type a password that the Remote Control User will have to enter before the Bridge allows access.

Confirm

Confirm the password.

Dialback

This entry is optional. If left blank no dialback will take place.

Enter the telephone number, including any prefixes that the Bridge will call when the user with this password connects.

Dialback delay

This entry is optional.

Enter the delay in seconds before the Bridge will attempt to dial-back the calling Control. This is to allow time for the Control to hang-up the line and reset modem to auto-answer.

Comment

Enter a description if required. For example: Engineers Password.


Add/Edit User

Username

The name a Control User will be prompted for when trying to connect to this Client.

Password

The password a Control User will be required to enter, when connecting to this Client with the above Username.

Confirm

Re-type the password to confirm correct entry.


Client Parameters for this Machine

This is used for setting the ClientName and for determining which configuration file it will use when it initialises.

Clientname

Enter a unique name for this Client. The name can be up to 9 characters long. If you set this parameter to an asterisk the MachineName, which is the same as the Computer name under Windows Networking, will be used.

Parameters

This is used for setting the configuration file that the Client will use at start-up. The file can be on the local disk or on a file server. If it is on an NT file server you may also need to add a log-in username and password file. To do this press <Add>.

You can enter multiple configuration files, the Client will use the first one in the list that it can open. For example you can set-up a configuration on a server that the Client will use by default and a configuration file on the local disk that the Client will use if the file server is down.

Note: If you do this, restrict the local configuration file to the minimum required (such as a single emergency password known only to trusted support staff).

The format of the parameters are:-

/U

A valid Login Name and Password to the area of the NT Server where the configuration file is stored. This must precede the actual filename.

/C

The path and name of the configuration file to use.

For example: /C/SERVER1\\CLIENTS\STANDARD.INI


Add/Edit Client parameters

This is used for setting the configuration file that the Client will use when it initialises and any associated User Credentials.

User Credentials are required because the Client will initialise before any networked drives have been mapped. The Client therefore needs a valid network ID and password, before it can open the file.

User Credentials

UserName

Enter a valid Username that is known at both the File Server and at the Client.

Password

Enter the associated Password.

Confirm

Confirm the password.

Configuration File

Select the Configuration File that the Client will use.


Add New Profile or Include File

This is used to create a new Profile which can subsequently be edited to set parameters specific to Control Users, whose Username matches that set in the Profile.

You can set as many Profiles as you need. When a Control connects, the Client will search through each of its profiles until it finds one in which the Username, set in the Users settings, matches the USERNAME and PASSWORD entered by the Control.

Profile Name

Enter a name for the Profile.

Include File

Alternatively select a .INI file to be included as a Profile. This is useful for setting up a central profile and making it available to all Clients.


Edit Access Rights

This is used for setting the specific access rights that a Control User, matching this Profile, will have to Directories and Files on this workstation when using File Transfer. It does not affect their rights when Remote Controlling the workstation.

It is hierarchical in nature. For example: You can exclude all rights to the root directory but then explicitly grant rights to sub-directories.

By default the Control User will have access to all drives, directories and files.

For example the following would allow the Control user to use NetSupport File Transfer only in the E:\Temp directory.

-ARWELV	E:\

+ARWELV	E:\TEMP

Note:	If you want to limit File Transfer in this way, ensure you explicitly remove access to all drives and then only grant it to the specific drives, directories and files that you require.

The Access Rights check boxes accept three settings:

Checked	Grant rights to the specified path.

Un-Checked	Disable rights to the specified path.

Checked and Greyed Out	Inherit rights from the path above.


Announce Dialog

Enables you to select which Clients will receive your audible announcement.

To make an announcement

1.	Select the Clients you wish to receive the announcement.

2.	Click Announce and speak into the microphone.


Select Group

These are the groups available to you.

1.	Select the one you want to work with and choose OK.

Or,

Choose New, to create a new Group.


Call Control

The Call Control function only works for TCP/IP connections and is intended to enable you to establish a connection across a firewall or proxy server.

Note:	To enable a Client to call a Control, NetSupport uses TCP/IP port 5421. For the Client to connect through a Firewall, you will need to configure the Firewall to use this port.

To connect to a Control

1.	Enter the hostname or IP address of the Control you wish to connect to. Or,

Select from a list of the 10 most recently connected Controls.

Note:	A maximum of 10 Controls can be stored, after which the oldest is discarded.

2.	The Control will receive a connecting message and either allow or disallow the connection.

Note:	The Control must be running for a Client to connect.


Client Connect

The Client Connect function only works for TCP/IP connections and is intended to enable you to establish a connection across a firewall or proxy server.

Note:	To enable a Client to call a Control, NetSupport uses TCP/IP port 5421. For the Client to connect through a Firewall, you will need to configure the Firewall to use this port.

To connect to a Control

1.	Choose {Commands}{Call Control} from the Client drop down menu.

2.	The Call Control dialog appears.

3.	Enter the hostname or IP address of the Control you wish to connect to.

Or,

Select from a list of the 10 most recently connected Controls.

Note:	A maximum of 10 Controls can be stored, after which the oldest is discarded.

4.	The Control will receive a connecting message and either allow or disallow the connection.

Note:	The Control must be running for a Client to connect.


Client Help Request Dialog

Write your help request message and send it to a specific Control workstation.

To request help

1.	Enter your name.

2.	Enter your help message.

3.	Click OK, NetSupport will send your help message to the connected Control or the next Control workstation to connect to your workstation.

4.	If available, you can select which Control you want to send your help message to. Choose Show Controls and select which Control workstation you wish to send your message to. Choose Hide Control.

Note: You can also cancel the last help request sent from this workstation by selecting Cancel Previous Request.


Client Help Request - Send to Which Control

Write and send your help message to a specific Control workstation.

To specify which Control to send the help request to

1.	Enter your name.

2.	Enter your help message.

3.	Choose Refresh to update the list of available Controls.

4.	NetSupport will then determine which Controls are currently offline/online.

5.	Choose which Control you want to send your help message to.

6.	Choose OK.

Note: If you do not select a Control workstation to send your help message to, your message will be sent to the next Control that connects to your workstation.


Client Help Request Message Dialog at Control

This message has appeared on your screen because a Client has chosen your Control workstation to send a help request.

The dialog informs you, who has sent the help request and the help request message.

You can also:

1.	View the Clients screen;

2.	Initiate a Chat session with the Client;

3.	Disconnect from the Client;

4.	Clear the Help Request folder in the Control List View when you close this dialog.


Client Connect - Dialog at Control

This dialog has appeared because a Client is attempting to connect to your workstation. The dialog also informs you, of any help request messages that Client has sent.

From this dialog you can perform the following on the connecting Client workstation:

•	View the Clients screen;

•	Initiate a Chat session with the Client;

•	Disconnect from the Client;

•	Clear the Help Request folder in the Control List View when you close this dialog.

Choose Close, to close this dialog and allow the Client to connect to your workstation.


Client Disconnect from a Control

1.	Select which Control(s) you want to disconnect from.

2.	By choosing the Select All button, you will select all currently connected Controls.

3.	Click OK.


Send to/Collect Work from ...

Select the Students you wish to Send work to or Collect work from by checking the check box (include = red cross, include = green tick) beside each Students name.

You might also like to ensure that the operation you are about to perform is correct, as the necessary information is displayed at the bottom of the dialog.


You have tried to create a Send/Collect work object with the same description as an existing one. It must be unique!

Meaning

Previously you have sent or collected a task with the same description.

Suggestions

1.	Change the description name of the newly created task.

Or,

If no-longer used, delete the send/collect work object with the same description.


Configuration - Icon Maintenance

This utility allows you to create a shortcut on your desktop that loads a NetSupport Control, with a specific Named Configuration. This means that you can have several shortcuts that automatically connect to one or more Clients when run.  When creating this shortcut you may wish to set the file to automatically save any changes that are made when you exit.

To create an icon

1.	Click and hold the left mouse button anywhere in the dialog (other than a button)

2.	Drag the mouse to your desktop or a folder.

3.	When you have chosen a location for the shortcut release the mouse button.


Configuration - Create or Edit Icon

This dialog specifies the settings and configuration to use with a new shortcut icon.

Title

Enter the title that will appear on the shortcut icon.

Load Configuration

Select the Named Configuration from the list provided that will be loaded when the Control shortcut is run.  Select '(Default)' to use the current configuration.

Prevent user from switching to another configuration

Checking this option prevents the user from selecting a different Named Configuration.  This is a suggested security procedure for system administrators.

Additional options

This allows additional commands to be passed to the Control program on start-up.  Some common examples follow, but for more information see: Using Command Line Instructions

/Dphone_number	dial into a NetSupport Bridge

/Uxxx	use the specified network transport protocol (IPX, TCP/IP or NBx, where x is the NetBIOS adapter number); this is mainly for use with /D.

/Cclientname	connect to the specified Client at startup (to connect to more than one Client, repeat this option).

/Ggroupname	connect to the Client(s) in the specified Group on startup


Configurations

This dialog configures the Named Configurations for the Control. Each of these configurations can contain different settings, they can also contain different User privileges.

Current Configuration: xxx

Displays all of the Named Configurations available.  The current configuration is the item selected in the list when the dialog is first displayed.  The name of the current configuration is also displayed above the list.

Select

Changes to the selected configuration.  The Control will Disconnect from any Clients or Remote Networks and reinitialise all of the settings.  You will be warned of this before the action is taken.

Close

Closes the session.

New

Creates a new Named Configuration.  A dialog will appear that allows you to choose an existing configuration to copy.  You can then use this dialog to select or edit its settings.

Delete

Deletes a configuration from the list.  If you try to remove the currently selected configuration, you will be notified and the operation will fail.

Reset

Restores the default settings to any Named Configuration.  You will be prompted to confirm this action before the configuration is reset.  Any changes you have made to this configuration will be lost.

Load

Loads a previously saved Control profile from a file to the Control.

Save

Saves a Control profile to a file for later use. You can also set up a Control icon to automatically load and optionally save this file at the beginning and end of the session respectively.

Icons

This utility allows you to create icons on your desktop that load a NetSupport Control with a specific Named Configuration. This means that you can have several shortcuts that automatically connect to one or more Clients when run.

Settings

Configure the Settings for the selected Named Configuration.

Transport and Startup Settings

Configures the Transport and Startup settings for the selected Named Configuration.


Configurations - Create new Configuration

This dialog creates a new Named Configuration by duplicating an existing one.  The new configuration will then be added to the list of configurations so that you can alter its properties.

Name

Enter a name for the new configuration.  The name is not case sensitive and must be unique.  If you specify the name of an existing configuration, you will be notified and be required to enter a new name.

Copy From

The list provided contains all of the existing Named Configurations.  Select one of these to copy its properties, or select (None) to create a new configuration with the default settings.

Once you have supplied the above information, press OK to continue, or Cancel to abort the operation.


Configuration - Configure TCP/IP Client Browsing

When you are running on a network with multiple subnets or addresses, you need to configure the Broadcast Addresses for each network.

When a Browse is performed, the broadcast messages are sent to the addresses defined here. Broadcast addresses are usually the last address in a subnet, such as 192.168.100.255 in a full Class C subnet.

Broadcast Addresses (or Client Addresses)

This list contains all of the addresses that broadcast packets will be sent to.  Use the buttons underneath the list to add, edit and remove entries.

Add

Adds a new Broadcast Address to the list.

Edit

Edits an entry in the Broadcast Address list.

Delete

Removes an entry from the Broadcast Address list.


Configuration - Configure NetBIOS Client Browsing

The list displayed here contains all of the NetBIOS adapters that are present on this workstation.

You can test an individual adapter and display detailed information about it.  To test adapters, first select one from the list and press OK.  This will interrogate the adapter stack and inform you of its usability within NetSupport Manager.

To display complete details about the adapter stack, select it from the list and press Details.

See also

Details for NetBIOS stack


Configuration - Test IPX Networks

This dialog displays the different networks that were reported, those that did and didn’t respond.

Networks reported and responding

A list of hexadecimal network numbers reported by a NetWare or NT server that have responded correctly.  These network numbers can be used successfully.

Use these networks

Allows the Control use these network numbers when part of a Client address.

Networks reported but not responding

A list of hexadecimal network numbers reported by a NetWare or NT server that have responded incorrectly or not at all.  These network numbers should be ignored.

Ignore these networks

Prevents the Control from using the reported network numbers when connecting to Clients.


Client Properties - General Tab

This property sheet displays information about the selected Client record.  Some of these fields will be disabled when you are connected to the Client, such as the address and transport, as they cannot be altered.

Client Name

The Network name that this Client responds to.  Note that this can be different to the Display Name.  You can change the name of the Client if required.

Location

The location of the Client is selected from the drop down list box.  The Client may be local or on a Remote Network. Remote networks display the Transport and telephone number underneath the list provided.

IPX

If this radio button is selected, the Client is running over the IPX network protocol.  This protocol is generally used with Novell NetWare networks with LANs and WANs.

TCP/IP

This radio button is selected if the Client is using the TCP/IP protocol.  This protocol is used in the Internet and Wide Area Networks.

NetBIOS

This radio button is selected when the Client is using NetBIOS.  NetBIOS is a non-routed protocol so is only used on LANs.  The Adapters drop down list box only becomes available when NetBIOS is selected.  When NetBIOS is selected you must also select the adapter/stack that NetBIOS should use.

Adapters

This drop down list box contains the NetBIOS adapters that are selected in your current configuration.  NetBEUI is the most common adapter used here.  You must select the adapter name that matches the NetBIOS adapter on the Client workstation.  The adapter numbers will vary from workstation to workstation, but the name will remain constant.

Address

You can enter the network address of the Client to connect to here.  If you have already connected to the Client or have performed a Browse the address will be entered automatically.  If you remove the address, the next time you try to connect to the Client the Control will attempt to locate the Client across the selected protocols by name.  The address will then be re-entered automatically, which is useful if the hardware on this workstation is changed.

Include this Client in Shows/Scans

When you are connected to the Client you can toggle this check box to either include or exclude the Client from the subsequent Shows and Scans.  You can also toggle this state from the Client List views.


Client Properties - Details Tab

This is where you can store background information about the Client workstation. More importantly you can change the name of the Client workstation that is displayed in the List View in the Control Window.

The following options are available:

Display name

If set this is the name that will be displayed in the List View at the Control instead of the actual Client name. Note that this only applies to the Control workstation. The real name as set at the Client workstation remains the same.

Description

Using this for storing useful information about the Client.

Contact and Phone Number

Store the name of the workstation User and a relevant telephone number for the workstation.

Mac/Ethernet Address

Store the Mac/Ethernet Address of the Client workstation.


Client Properties - Help Requested

This property sheet displays the request from a Client, for help.  These requests can be posted if you are not connected to the Client, and will be displayed as soon as a connection is made.

Requested by

The name of the person requesting the help, not necessarily the Client names.

Help Request

The actual help message that the user at the Client workstation sent.

Clear

When you are connected to the Client, you can clear the request for help when you have assisted the user.

See also

Help Requests (SOS)


Client Properties - System Information Tab

This property sheet displays version and platform information about the Client.

Client Version

Displays the version number of the NetSupport Client that you are connected to.

Client Platform

Displays the operating system that the Client is running on.  This can be any of the supported Client platforms, such as Windows NT or Windows 95/98/2000/ME/XP.

Note: This information is only available while you are connected to the Client.


Group Properties - General Tab

This property sheet contains details about the group you have selected.

Name

The name that identifies this group in the group list.

Description

A description about the selected group

See also

Create a new Group


Group Properties - Members Tab

This property sheet lists all of the Clients currently contained in this Group.  You can also add and remove Clients here.

Available Clients not in this group

Displays all of the Clients that are currently in your Known Client List that are not members of this Group.  These can be added to your Group Members list.

Group Members

Displays the names of all Client members of this Group.  These members can be removed if they are no longer required.

Add

Select one or more Clients from the Available Clients list to add to this Group. The Client names are removed from this list and added to the Group Members list.

Remove

Select one or more Clients from the Group Members list to remove from the Group.  The Client names are removed from this list and added to the Available Clients list.

See also

Create a new Group


Remote Network Properties - General

This dialog allows you to change the properties of the selected Remote Network.  Use the Remote Network Wizard to create a new Remote Network connection.

Name

Supply the name of the Remote Network that will appear in the Remote Networks list.

Description

Enter a more detailed description of the site that this object will connect to.  This field is optional.

Phone Number

Enter the telephone number of the NetSupport Bridge you are connecting to.

Transport

You need to specify the transport of the NetSupport Bridge you are dialling into. When you specify NetBIOS, you must specify the adapter of the Bridge workstation not the adapter of the Control workstation.  When a connection is established with the NetSupport Bridge, the NetBIOS stack on the number specified is used.


Configuring the Client

NetSupport Clients are configured using the NetSupport Configurator. This makes all the required changes to and sets up the initialisation commands.

The Configurator is started from the NetSupport Configurator Icon in the NetSupport Manager Program Group. This will display the initial Client Configuration dialog.

Note:	When performing a custom installation, the Configurator Component must have been selected for this option to be available.

The Client Configurator enables you to set all the possible options for the Client. It also enables you to test the Network to ensure that the Network stack that you are attaching the Client to is installed and operating correctly.

You can run the Configurator in two modes, Basic or Advanced.

Basic

Basic Configuration is used for standard settings such as the Client Name, the transport/s that it will use and simple security such as a password before a Control will be allowed to connect to the Client.

Note:	Basic Client Configurations can also be set as part of the NetSupport Installation process on workstations.

Choose this option if: -

•	You are using the Client Configurator for the first time.

•	You only wish to set simple security and configuration options.

•	You do not need to create multiple profiles for different Control users who might connect to this workstation.

Note: Do not use the Basic option if you have set up multiple profiles using the Advanced Option as this will also change the Master Profile in the Advanced Configuration.

Advanced

The advanced option provides access to NetSupport’s wealth of configuration and security options. It lets you tailor the response of the Client to different Control Users who may access the workstation and provides links to areas such as NT Security.

Note:	When performing a custom installation, the Configurator Component must have been selected for this option to be available.

Choose this option if: -

•	You are experienced user.

•	You need the Client to react differently depending on which Control User is connecting.

•	You wish to enable/disable individual features.

•	You want to link to NT Security.

•	You want to restrict a Control user’s access to specific drives, directories or files.

Note: Any changes you make to the Master Profile in the Advanced option will overwrite any setting that you have made using the Basic option.


User Defined Tools

As well as allowing a Control to launch applications on Client workstations, you can automatically run a task on a Control workstation using a Defined Tool. These tools can also be copied to other Control workstations for use.

To Add a Tool

1.	Choose {Tools}{User Defined – Edit} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click Tools-Edit on the toolbar.

2.	The User Defined Tool dialog will appear.

3.	Click on the Add button.

4.	The Add Tool dialog will appear.

5.	Choose to add a Program or Script tool by selecting the appropriate Tab.

6.	Enter the required information.

7.	Click OK.

8.	The tool will be listed.

Click Edit to change the properties of a listed Tool or Delete to remove the Tool.

To run a Tool

1.	Choose {Tools}{User Defined} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Tools icon on the toolbar.

2.	Select the tool you wish to run.

3.	The Tool will automatically run.

To copy User Defined Tool Settings to other Control workstations

1.	From the Control Configurator, select File Locations .

2.	The Tools file section, click on the Change button.

3.	Specify and alternate location or name for the Tools file.

4.	Make this file available to Control workstation that is going to adopt this Tools file.

5.	From the workstations Control Configurator, {File Locations – Tools file section}, click on the Change button.

6.	Select the new Tools file, click Open.

7.	The new Tools file will be implemented.


User Defined Tool - Add Tool dialog

Menu Text

Enter a name to describe the tool you are defining.

Program Tab

Path

Select the tool by entering in the full path name or utilise the Browse feature.

Arguments

Enter the parameter of your tool. Eg: C:\MY DOCUMENTS\LETTER.DOC

Wait for program to finish

Check this box to disable the Control whilst the selected program is being executed. A dialog will appear offering you the opportunity to stop the application being executed at any time. Please note, if you terminate an application before it has finished, data could be lost.

Script Tab

Script

Select a previously defined Script to run as a Defined Tool.

New

Add a name, optional description and the Script filename for this new Script object.


The Show Dialog

In this dialog you select the Client, or Clients, that you will Show your screen to and set any associated properties.

Select what you would like to Show

NetSupport will identify if the Control is running multiple monitors, giving you the option to choose which one to Show from the drop down list. If you are unsure which is the correct screen, click Identify. Alternatively, select Whole Desktop to show all.

Select Recipients

Select the Client or Clients that you will Show your screen to.

Show Options

Set Show Mode at Client (Windowed, Full Screen or Maximise Window)

This option allows you to Show at the Client either in a small window, full screen or maximised window size. When showing in windowed and maximised window size the Clients Mouse and Keyboard are not locked.

Enable Audio

This turns Audio Support on. If you are Showing to only one Client, both the Control and Client can speak. If you are Showing to many, only the Control can speak (Announce).

Show Hotkeys

To ensure that all actions performed by the Control are visible to the Clients during a show you can enable the use of Hotkeys. Any key combinations that the Control uses, e.g. CTRL+V, will be displayed in a balloon at both the Control and Client screens.

Notes:

•	If using a mixture of key combinations e.g. ALT+V+T, NetSupport will only display two consecutive keystrokes at any one time.

•	This utility is only supported on Windows 2000, XP and above.

Send Physical Fonts

In order to reduce the volume of data being sent when sharing information of this nature, NetSupport passes the font information by reference. The target workstation will refer to it’s own internal font mappings to find an appropriate match to the one that has been sent. In most cases the same fonts will be available but if there are instances where this isn’t the case you can send the full information. Check this box to enable.

Screen Scrape

NetSupport’s favoured, and the most efficient, method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed. However, there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver. In these circumstances you can enable ‘screen scrape’ mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen. Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client’s screen.

Create Replay File at Client

The Show session can be recorded and stored in a Replay File giving Clients the opportunity to playback the session at a later date.


Modify Known List

Use this dialog to define the Client workstations that the Control connects to at Startup.

Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to in the text box and click Browse. All NetSupport Clients found will appear in the Available Students List.

Note: If the expected Clients are not found it may be because NetSupport has not been configured to browse the required Networks. See Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing for more information.

Add the Clients you want to remote control to the Known List by selecting their icon in the Available Student List and clicking Add. If you want to add all the Clients found to the Known List, click Add All. If you want to remove a Client from the Known Client List select their icon in the Known List and click Remove.

Once part of the Known List the following information about each Client is stored in the Client.NSS file:

•	Computer Name

•	Workstation Location

•	Transport Details

•	IP Address

•	Control Window Display Name

•	Workstation Contact Name and Telephone Number

•	Workstation Mac/Ethernet Address

•	NetSupport Client Version

•	Workstation Platform

This information can be accessed by selecting the Client icon in the Known List and clicking Properties.

Once a Client is Known it can be connected to without having to browse the network, simply click Done.


Send Message Dialog

Enter the required message and click Send. The message will be sent to the Client you are viewing.


The Execute Dialog

From here, you can Execute an application at the Client you are Viewing. Enter the name and path of the application, you must include the command line parameters.

The application you are executing must be installed on or available to the Client workstation.


The Execute Application Dialog

When opened, the Execute dialog box has two tabs: the Execute Tab and Saved List Tab.

The Execute Tab

Enter the name and path of the application to execute at the Client

Enter the full path of the application you want to run and click Execute. If the program is in the path environment variable on the Client, you only need enter the application EXE name. If the file you want to run has a valid file association to the application that launches it, you only need to enter the filename.

Note:	If you want to launch a specific file simultaneously with the application, you must separate the two instructions with quotes. For example, "C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Excel.exe" "C:\My Documents\Accounts.xls".

Local Browse

Run a browse on the local workstation to find the path of an application. To successfully launch an application using Local Browse, it must be available on the same path at the Client.

Add to List

By Clicking on the ‘Add to List’ Button before you execute the application, you will save it for future use in the Saved List Tab.

Execute Only if the Client is Logged on

Checking this option allows you to execute an application only if the Client is logged on.

Results

Once you have executed an application at a Client or a Group of Clients, the result of the operation will be displayed in the Results Box. By selecting a Client(s) in the Result Box, you can use the View or Chat buttons:

No Result Required

By selecting this option, you can close the dialog box after executing an application, without having to wait for the results.

View Button

Allows you to View a selected Client(s).

Chat Button

Allows you to open a Chat session to the selected Client.

The Saved List Tab

When executing an application, you have the option to choose pre-saved application paths.

Add Button

Another Dialogue Box will appear allowing you to edit or add program details.

Remove Button

Allows you to remove saved applications.

Edit button

Another Dialogue Box will appear allowing you to edit or add program details.

Show Toolbar tick box

By ticking the Show Toolbar box, a new Toolbar will appear on the Control Window below the Quick View Toolbar.

Execute Only if the Client is Logged on

Checking this option allows you to execute an application only if the Client is logged on.

Results

Once you have executed an application at a Client or a Group of Clients, the result of the operation will be displayed in the Results Box. By selecting a Client(s) in the Result Box, you can use the View or Chat buttons:

No Result Required

By selecting this option, you can close the dialog box after executing an application, without having to wait for the results.

View Button

Allows you to View a selected Client(s).

Chat Button

Allows you to open a Chat session with the selected Client.


The Scan Dialog

This dialog is used for setting the parameters for the Scan session.

Scan the following Clients

This list displays all of the currently connected Clients and their descriptions.  To include or exclude a Client from the Scan, click the check box next to it. Choose to include (green tick), or exclude (red cross), the Client in the Scan.

Scan Interval

Use this slider control to specify the interval before the scan is advanced to the next Client. The Scan period can be set anywhere between 2 seconds to a minute.

Display one Client at a time

Displays one Clients screen in the Scan Window at a time.

Display multiple Clients at a time

Displays up to 16 Client screens in one Scan Window at a time. To set the number of Client screens in the Scan Window, select from the drop down option, 2x2, 3x3, 4x4.

Scan Button

When you have selected the Clients to be included in the Scan, press the Scan button to start Scanning.


The Execute Dialog

From here, you can Execute an application at the Client you are Viewing. Enter the name and path of the application. You must include the command line parameters.

The application you are executing must be installed on or available to the Client workstation.


The Message Dialog

Choose whether you want to send the message to all Available Clients, All Connected Clients or only the Currently Selected Client. Decide whether to show the message at the Clients PCs for a specified time.


Configure TCP/IP Browsing

This dialog is used for configuring which TCP/IP networks the Control will search for when browsing for Clients whether they be on the local network, on a different subnet or within a Terminal Server environment.

By default the Control will perform a UDP browse for Clients on the same subnet as itself. To force it to search for Clients on other subnets, you must add their subnet addresses here. (You must also include the Local Subnet address).

Example

194.150.150.255	(The local subnet address)

194.150.160.255	(Another available subnet address)

You can also specify an individual IP Address or a range of addresses. The latter being particularly useful if the subnet is behind a router that has UDP browse disabled. This would normally prevent the Control from finding the required Clients but by specifying the required IP address range a broadcast packet will be sent to each machine. (Only Class C address ranges can be entered)

Example

194.150.160.33

194.150.160.1 – 33

Broadcast Addresses (or Client Addresses)

This list contains all of the addresses that broadcast packets will be sent to.

Add

Add a new Broadcast Address to the list. If you are unsure of the exact Broadcast Address to enter, a convenient ‘Advanced Browse’ option is provided enabling you to enter the Browse address in a variety of formats.

Edit

Edit an entry in the Broadcast Address list.

Delete

Removes an entry from the Broadcast Address list.


Create Discussion Dialog

Select the Clients to include in the Chat session and the properties that will apply.

Topic

If required, enter a title or description for the subject to be discussed in the Chat session. This will appear in the Title Bar of the Chat Window that is displayed at the Client machines. If left blank, the Control Name will appear.

Members

To exclude Clients from the Chat session, remove the check mark next to the Client name.

Options

Members can decline to join

If checked, a message will appear at the Clients machine inviting them to join the Chat session. They can choose to Join or Decline.

Members can’t leave the chat

If checked, the option for Clients to Leave the Chat session will be removed.

Chat Window is always visible

If checked, the Chat Window remains on the Clients desktop for the duration of the Chat session. Members cannot minimise the Window.

Click OK to commence the Chat session when ready.


The Chat Window.

The following options are available from the Chat Window: -

Chat Menu

If the Control begins a Chat session and the Student does not notice the window appear on their screen, you can also send an audible Beep. Do this by selecting {Chat}{Send Beep} from the Chat drop down menu.

Window Menu

Only the Control’s Chat Window will have a Window drop down menu. This menu enables you to swap between opened screens or Tile them.

Control Text Box

This is where you type your part of the conversation.  Characters are sent in real time, so you do not have to type a line of text and then send it.  The backspace key can be used for editing the text as you go, but you cannot use the direction keys.

Client Text Box

The response from the user at the Student appears here.


The Chat Window

This Window is displayed at each participating members machine and lists the progress of the Chat session.

Unless the option is disabled in the Create Discussion dialog, Clients can choose to Leave the session.

The following options are available from the Chat Window:-

Chat Menu

The following options are available on the Chat Menu.

The content of a Chat session can be stored for future reference. Choose Save to create a file containing the text or Copy to be able to paste the Chat content into another application or file.

Should the Chat members not respond, you can send an audible beep to each workstation by selecting Send Beep.

Window Menu

Only the Control’s Chat Window will have a Window drop down menu. This menu enables you to swap between opened screens or Tile them.

Chat Progress

The main body of the Chat Window is used to record the progress of a Chat session. It holds details of members who have joined or left the discussion, as well as the messages that have been sent by each member.

Message

This is where you type your comments. Type the message and hit Enter or click Send.

Auto Send

Each message is restricted to 128 characters. Check this box to automatically send the message when the limit is reached.

Close

Ends the Chat session.

Members

Members currently included in the Chat session are listed here. The Control can add or remove Clients from the Chat session as required. Unless disabled, Clients have the option to Leave the session of their own accord.

Invite

The Chat Properties dialog is initially used to select the Clients to include/exclude from the Chat session. To add Clients when the Chat session is in progress, click Invite. The Add Members dialog will appear, select the required Clients and click Add. You can send a copy of the Chat progress to new members by checking the Send discussion history box.

Note:	Clients that have been removed or have decided to leave the Chat session can be invited back.

Eject

To remove Clients from the Chat session, select the Client in the Members list and click Eject. Ejected Clients can be invited back into the session if required.


Student Chat Dialog

As well as Chatting to the Tutor, you can include other Students in the Chat session if required.

Chat with Tutor

Click OK to Chat to the Tutor only. The Chat Window will appear at each machine.  If you Leave the Chat session, the Window is also closed at the Tutor machine.

Create Group Chat with other Students

Choose this option to include other connected Students in the Chat session.

Note:	The Tutor is automatically included in a Group Chat session. The Tutor can add Students and end the session if required. If you Leave a Group Chat session that you have initiated, the other participants can continue to Chat.

Topic

Enter a title or description for the Chat session. This will be displayed on the Title Bar of the Chat Window at each participants machine.

Members

This lists the names of other connected Students. To include all Students click Select All. To select individual Students, CTRL+click on each name. Click OK to commence the Chat session.


Client Chat Window

This Window is displayed at each participating members machine and lists the progress of the Chat session.

The following options are available from the Chat Window:-

Chat Menu

The following options are available on the Chat Menu.

The content of a Chat session can be stored for future reference. Choose Save to create a file containing the text or choose Copy to be able to paste the Chat content into another application or file.

You can send an audible beep to the other members of the Chat session by selecting Send Beep.

Chat Progress

The main body of the Chat Window is used to record the progress of a Chat session. It holds details of members who have joined or left the discussion, as well as the messages that have been sent by each member.

Message

This is where you type your comments. Type the message and hit Enter or click Send.

Auto Send

Each message is restricted to 128 characters. Check this box to automatically send the message when the limit is reached.

Leave

Click this when you are ready to Leave the discussion. If other Clients have been included in the Chat session, they will be able to continue chatting with the Control.

Members

Members currently included in the Chat session are listed here. The Control can add or remove Clients from the Chat session as required.


Cannot Show While A Group Leader Is Present

This dialog has appeared because you are trying to perform a Show while Group Leaders are present. To enable you to continue without conflicting with tasks being performed by the Group Leader, select one of the following options:

Cancel this Show

Choose this option if you do not want to continue with your Show.

Suspend Group Leader privileges

To proceed with your Show, choose this option to temporarily remove all Group Leaders. When you end the show, the appropriate Students will automatically regain their Group Leader rights.

Exclude ‘Group Leader’ and all its Students from the Show

You cannot Show to Students who are Group Leaders or are in a Group that has a Group Leader. Choose this option to exclude these and continue Showing to the remaining Students.


Publish A Class

This dialog lists the names of Students who have joined the class, it also enables you to remove Students as required.

In order for Students to be able to find the class when they logon to the network, this dialog must be open at the Tutor machine.

Change

This button enables you to change the name and description of the class. These details, along with the Control name, are displayed at the Client machine when the Student elects to join the class.

Done

Select this when all Students have joined the class and you are ready to commence the session.

New Students can join at any point but to make the class available to them, you will need to display this dialog again. Select Refresh from the Control Window toolbar.

Reject

Only the Tutor can remove a Student from the class. Highlight the required Student and click Reject.

Note: To join a class, Students open the NetSupport Client icon and select {Commands}{Join a Class}


Broadcast Settings Dialog

When you have enabled Broadcast Show, you specify the UDP Port and Broadcast Address on which the destination machines are sited. Data is sent to the specified address meaning that all machines appearing in that segment will receive the information simultaneously.

UDP Port (User Datagram Protocol)

Specify a UDP Port  to use for broadcasting the show. NetSupport's default is 5421.

Note:	If multiple Controls are attempting to use UDP/Broadcast Show simultaneously on the same subnet it is recommended that each uses a unique Port to avoid conflict.

Destination Address

This is the  broadcast address that the Show will be sent to.


Add a New VNC Client
Add a New ‘VNC’ Client

Specify the connection details for the VNC Client machine.

Address

Specify the network address of the VNC Client you wish to connect to.

Screen Number

The number of the virtual terminal being connected to. You do not need to alter this number.

Port Number

To enable the NetSupport Control to communicate with the VNC Client, and for the Client to receive the incoming request, the default registered port is 5900.


Add a New 'VNC' Client - Video Encoding

Select the preferred video encoding for the new Client.

The Net Support Control supports four types of VNC encoding:

•	Raw

•	RRE

•	CoRRE

•	Hextile

Raw is the fastest as far as CPU processing is concerned but creates overheads in terms of network traffic. Raw encoding simply sends raw screen data to the Control.

Hextile creates the most CPU overhead but is more suitable for slower network speeds. Hextile divides the Client screen into small tiles, and decides which of the three other methods is most suitable for that screen area.

The other two, performance-wise, are between Raw and Hextile. RRE and CoRRE analyse the Client screen and turn as much of it as possible into a "code" consisting of rectangles, which means that less has to be sent over the network.  This is especially useful on pages with a lot of simple graphics or text.

The type of encoding chosen should reflect the speed of the Client and Control machines, and the speed of the network.  On pages with simple graphics or text, it is recommended to use RRE or CoRRE encoding.

Use CopyRect

This is a very fast type of encoding to tell the Control if large areas of the Client screen are being moved around.  It is recommended to leave this box checked as it speeds up the video enormously.


Client Properties - VNC

This property sheet displays the connection information for the selected VNC Client record and enables you to edit the details if required.


Add a Gateway - Name

Enter a Name and Description for the new Gateway. These are the details that will appear in the Gateways folder of the Control Window Tree View.

Click Next to continue.


Add a Gateway - Address

Address

Enter the IP address of the workstation where the Gateway component is installed.

Port Number

NetSupport’s default port for Gateway (HTTP) communications is 443.

Note:	In version 9.10, Port 443 was introduced as the default for HTTP communications, 3085 being used previously. Gateway settings will be preserved for existing customers who subsequently upgrade, enabling 3085 to continue to be used, but there may be scenarios when upgraded Controls and Clients will need the HTTP Port manually reconfiguring to ensure compatibility.

If the Control is located behind a firewall, you will need to enable Port 443 within your firewalls configuration to allow outbound communications.


Add a Gateway - Key

The Gateway Key provides additional security between the Gateway and the Controls/Clients trying to communicate through it. The same Key must be present in the Gateway, Control and Client configurations before a link can be established.

Gateway Key

Choose Set and enter the appropriate Gateway Key. This must match the one that is set at the machine where the Gateway component is installed.

Click OK to accept. The Key will appear encrypted.

Click Finish to add the new Gateway to the Gateways folder in the Control Window Tree View. You can check the properties of the Gateway should you need to amend any of the details by right-clicking on the Gateway name in the Tree View and selecting Properties.


Gateway Properties

This property sheet enables you to check and edit Gateway properties.

You can change the Name and Description, the IP address of the machine where the Gateway is installed, the address of your Proxy Server if this is being used to route communications and the Gateway Key.


Enable Broadcast Show

When showing the Control screen to clients, the screen information is sent to each client machine in turn. Enabling Broadcast Show results in the screen information being sent to all machines simultaneously. In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when showing to larger numbers of machines this will provide significant performance benefits.

Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport, using this feature will generate additional broadcast packets on your network. It is recommended that you consult your Network administrator before using this feature.

Enable Broadcast Show

By selecting the checkbox you will enable the Broadcast Show feature. You can also change this later via the Configuration option available under the School menu.

Settings

When you have enabled Broadcast Show, you specify the UDP Port and Broadcast Address on which the destination machines are sited. Data is sent to the specified address meaning that all machines appearing in that segment will receive the information simultaneously.

UDP Port (User Datagram Protocol)

Specify a UDP Port to use for broadcasting the show. NetSupport's default is 5421.

Destination Address

This is the broadcast address that the Show will be sent to.


Show Video

This is used to select the Clients to show to and the video file to be shown. You can show to a selected Client or multiple Client workstations.

To show to multiple Clients, click ‘These Clients’. You can exclude Clients by clicking next to the Client name.

Video File

In the Video File field enter the location and name of the required video, you can select Open to browse for the file.

Show

Click Show to begin the Video file.


Select Background

As well as tailoring the position of Client icons in the Control List View to reflect the layout of the classroom you can choose alternative bitmaps to decorate the background and enhance the layout of the icons.

It is recommended that you select one of NetSupport’s default .BMP files but you can use a file that you have created.

Image Location

Browse

Select the location of the image you wish to use. The default BMP files are stored in the NetSupport School program folder.

Image Preview

A preview of the selected image is provided.

Picture Display

Select the position of the image.

Centre Clients to Image

If you select Tile you can also choose to centre the Client icons on the image.

Background Colour

If required, select a background colour.


Select Tutor Profile

Multiple Tutor Profiles can be set up for different Control users, each with a pre-defined set of options. This dialog shows the list of Tutor Profiles available on startup. Profiles can be added to this list via the Administration option in the Tutor Configuration after startup.

Profile Name

Select a Tutor Profile from the available list. Click OK to load the selected Tutor Profile.

If you Cancel this dialog the default NetSupport School option is selected.


User Defined Tools

As well as allowing a Tutor to launch applications at Student workstations, you can automatically run a task on a Tutor workstation using a Defined Tool.

To Add a Tool

1.	Choose {School}{Tools – Edit} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The User Defined Tool dialog will appear.

3.	Click on the Add button.

4.	The Add Tool dialog will appear.

5.	Enter the required information.

6.	Click OK. The new tool will be listed on the Tools menu.

7.	Click Close.

To run a Tool

1.	Choose {School}{Tools} from the Control Window drop down menus.

2.	Select the tool you wish to run. The Tool will automatically run.

To Edit a Tool

1.	Choose {School}{Tools – Edit} from the Control Window drop down menus.

2.	The User Defined Tool dialog will appear.

3.	Select the tool you wish to edit or delete.

4.	Click on the Edit button.

5.	The Edit dialog will appear.

6.	Edit the appropriate information, click OK.

To Delete a Tool

1.	Choose {School}{Tools – Delete} from the Control Window drop down menus.

2.	The User Defined Tool dialog will appear.

3.	Select the tool you wish to edit or delete.

4.	Click on the Delete button.

5.	A confirmation dialog will appear, click Yes. The Tool will be removed.


Add Tool

Menu Text

Enter a name to describe the tool you are defining. This will be listed in the Tools menu once created.

Program Tab

Path

Select the tool by entering the full path name or utilise the Browse feature.

Arguments

Enter the parameter of your tool. For example, a specific file that should be loaded when the tool runs.

Wait for program to finish

Check this box to disable the Control whilst the selected program is being executed. A dialog will appear offering you the opportunity to stop the application being executed at any time. Please note, if you terminate an application before it has finished, data could be lost.


Record Local Activity

Use this dialog to enable the recording of Replay Files at the local machine.

1.	Include Audio

In addition to the screen, mouse and keyboard activity, if the workstation is configured for Audio, you can record any narration that takes place. Check this box to enable.

2.	Record Physical Fonts

In order to reduce the volume of data being sent when sharing information of this nature, NetSupport passes the font information by reference. The target workstation will refer to it’s own internal font mappings to find an appropriate match to the one that has been sent. In most cases the same fonts will be available but if there are instances where this isn’t the case you can send the full information. Check this box to enable.

3.	In Directory

Specify where you want the Replay Files stored. In order to identify each file, filenames will be prefixed with ‘Local’ and the date and time of the recording.

4.	Click OK to start recording. The Recording icon will appear in the task bar.

5.	To stop recording, double click the Recording icon.


Application History

Displays a list of the Applications used by Clients in the current session. When the Control disconnects the list is cleared.

Show Application History for:

The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients.

Refresh

While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display.

Save

To keep a permanent record of the displayed items, you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting.

Print

Prints details of the currently displayed items.

Close

Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected.


Web History

Displays details of the Sites visited by Clients in the current session. When the Control disconnects the list is cleared.

Show Web History for:

The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients.

Refresh

While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display.

Save

To keep a permanent record of the displayed items, you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting.

Print

Prints details of the currently displayed items.

Close

Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected.


Select Question

This dialog enables you to administer the questions and responses that are stored within the currently loaded Survey List. You can edit the content of the existing list or add new questions and responses. Custom responses can be entered and, if required, these can be made available to other Surveys by adding them to the default list of responses.

Add a new Survey to the List

1.	Enter the question in the box provided.

2.	Enter the required responses, maximum of 6, separating each one with a comma.

or

Choose a set of pre-defined responses from the drop down list.

3.	Click Add. The question along with the responses will be added to the list.

4.	To use the new question in a Survey, highlight it in the list and Click OK. It is now ready to send to Students.

Select an existing Survey

Existing Surveys can be re-used or edited before being sent to Students.

1.	Highlight the required Survey in the list.

2.	If no changes are required click OK. The Survey is ready to send to Students.

or

Overtype the parts of the question and/or responses that need changing. Click Add to store the amended Survey. Highlight the Survey in the list and click OK.

Note:	If you change the question it will be added to the list in addition to the original. If you only change the responses, the original will be overwritten.

Manage Responses

When you use customised responses in a Survey they will be attached to that question only. If you want to make the responses available to other Surveys they need to be added to the default drop down list.  Click Manage, the Manage Responses dialog will appear, enter the required responses and click Add.


Advanced Browse Dialog

Use this dialog to enter a variety of different Browse entries depending on the range of NetSupport Clients you wish to find.

Subnet

This option provides an efficient method, in terms of the network traffic it generates, for finding Clients. By entering a Target IP Address and the Subnet Mask that you wish to Browse, NetSupport will send a broadcast packet to the specified network.  When you subsequently perform the Browse action, all Clients found on the target subnet will be listed.

Address Range

This differs from the above option in that it provides a reliable method for finding a specific range of Clients. It may generate additional network traffic in that individual packets are sent to each workstation in the range but at least you are targeting the required Clients.

Terminal Services

Use this option to find Clients in a Terminal Server environment. Enter the IP Address of the Terminal Server and the Port Range to Browse.


Class Wizard

The Class Wizard enables you to enter the general properties of a lesson and guides you through the creation of a lesson plan if one has not already been created. When loading the Tutor Program the Wizard will appear automatically but can be switched off if required.

Class Details

You have the option to input the Teacher Name, Lesson Title and Room Number. If these details are completed they will form part of the Student Register should you require one.

Load an existing Lesson Plan

By clicking Browse you can load any Lesson Plans you have previously saved. Alternatively you can create a new Lesson Plan.

What time does this Lesson finish?

Enter the time you want the class to finish, a timer will appear while the lesson is in progress. If you do not want the lesson to be timed enable the Open Lesson option.

Create a Student Register

Before the lesson starts you can prompt the Students to login with their names. These will be displayed at the Tutor instead of the machine names.

Automatically Reconnect to Students

Ensures that Student machines automatically rejoin a live remote control session should they inadvertently disconnect.

Optimise Show

If one of the tasks within the lesson is to show the Tutor screen to the Students you can optimise the show performance. This is useful if showing to many machines but does increase Network overheads. If only showing to a few PC’s you many prefer to optimise the show for reliability.

If multiple Tutor’s are attempting to use this option simultaneously on the same subnet it is recommended that each broadcasts on a different Port to avoid conflict. The UDP/Broadcast Show Port is set in the Tutor Connectivity Settings option.

Note: If your Network administrator has protected the configuration these options will not be available.

Don’t show this dialog again

By checking this box the Class Wizard will not appear at startup.

Note: To re-activate the Class Wizard to appear at startup, set the Display Class Wizard option in the startup section of the configuration.

Click Go to start the lesson. If you have asked for Students to register their names, the Register Student dialog will appear. Once the Students have responded the first task in your Lesson Plan will start.


Lesson Plan Window

The Lesson Plan Window allows you to create the structure of your lesson.

The following options are available from the Lesson Plan Window: -

The Title Bar

Displays the name of the currently loaded Lesson Plan.

File Menu

Allows you to create, open and save Lesson Plans.

Edit Menu

Enables you to add tasks, delete tasks and move items within the currently loaded Lesson Plan.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many to the most commonly used tasks. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus.

Planner Pane

Displays the selected tasks.

Available Items

Lists the tasks that can be included in the Lesson Plan. To add a task to the lesson drag it from the list and drop it into the Planner Pane. You will be prompted to complete the required properties for each task.

Total Lesson Time

Displays the cumulative time that the selected tasks will take to run.

Author/Description

If required you can enter the author name and description of the lesson.

OK

Click to start the lesson immediately. The lesson will only run if you have saved it.

Cancel

Closes the Window without running the lesson. You will be prompted to save the lesson.


Add a Gateway - Use Proxy Server

NetSupport can be configured to route communications through a Proxy Server if required. Enter the server address and an appropriate Port, 8080 recommended.


The Control Window

See also

Working with Classroom Layouts

Connecting to Students

Bitmaps

The Control Window is the primary interface for:

•	Configuring the Control;

•	Connecting to Clients;

•	Maintaining Client information;

•	Selecting which Clients to work with;

•	Selecting tasks to carry out;

The Title Bar

This indicates that you are in the Control Window and displays the name of the NetSupport School Control workstation.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities. These menus can be used to select Clients to work with, as well as maintaining and organising Clients into work groups.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus.  Positioning the cursor over an icon, will display a brief description of its function. For convenience, features that are of a similar nature, Show, Show Video, Show Replay Files for example, are grouped within the same toolbar icon. However, you can add these as individual icons if preferred.

To customise the Toolbar choose {View}{Toolbar - Customise} or right click on the Toolbar and choose Customise.

The Quick View Bar

The Quick View bar is used to switch between currently connected Clients. Clicking on the button containing the required Client’s name, enables you to immediately View that Client’s Window.

To enable/disable the Quick View bar choose {View}{Toolbar – Quick View}.

The Quick Execute Bar

The Quick Execute bar enables you to execute a previously saved application to a Client, without having to direct your way through the drop down menu. By clicking on the button containing the required application, you immediately execute it on the selected Client or Group.

To enable/disable the Quick Execute bar choose {View}{Toolbar – Execute Bar}.

The Lesson Bar

The Lesson bar allows you to create a lesson and provides tools to manage the lesson once in progress. A Progress bar will advise the Tutor on the current activity and time remaining.

To enable/disable the Lesson bar choose {View}{Toolbar – Lesson Plan}.

The Group Bar

Until you have defined groups of Clients only the "ALL" group will appear on this toolbar. Once defined, the group name along with the number of members will appear and the Group tool icons will become fully active, allowing you to add, delete and change Group properties.

With the required Student Group selected, Properties such as the displayed name and icon image can be changed by choosing {Group}{Customise} or {Group}{Properties} from the Control Window drop down menu.

To enable/disable the Group bar choose {View}{Toolbar – Group Bar}.

The List View

The List View displays the currently connected Clients or Groups.  You can switch the display mode between large and small icons, lists and detailed view, from the Control Window {View} drop down menu.

When you mouse over a Client icon a thumbnail of the Student machine is displayed.

Client Properties, such as the displayed name and icon image, can be changed by selecting {Client}{Customise} or {Client}{Properties} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Note: Student names can also be customised using the Student Register function.

The List View can be viewed in the following Modes:

Normal View

Monitor Mode

Web View

Application View

Survey View

Whiteboard View

Click on the individual icons on the left hand side of the Control Window, or choose {View}{Normal/ Monitor/ Web/ Application/ Survey View/ Whiteboard View} from the Control Window drop down menu to change mode. The default View Mode is Normal View.

The Status Bar

The Control Status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control Window. It shows the Status of the Control, the number of currently connected Clients and the number of items in the Folder.


Control Window - School Menu

This is used for accessing functions that affect the overall operation and Configuration of the Control, such as Help Requests and Control Transport.

Refresh

Refreshes the list of Connected Clients.  This is useful for adding Clients who arrive late for the session and whose workstations were not available when the session began.

Modify Known List

Displays the Modify Known List dialog. From here you can browse for new Clients and add them to the Known List.

Student Register

Ask Students to Register their details at the start of a lesson.

Blank Screen

Blanks all connected Student screens.

Suspend Group Leaders

Temporarily removes Group Leader rights, ensuring that Students are focused on what the Tutor is doing. For example, the Tutor may want to use the Show function safe in the knowledge that a Group Leader isn’t trying to do a similar task at the same time.

Help Requests

Displays the Help request Window and any outstanding help requests that have been raised.

Send/Collect Work

Choose to Send or Collect a file to Student workstations using a browse feature or a wizard.

Testing Console

Choose to run a previously created exam and select the Students to participate in the exam.

Configuration

Displays the Configuration dialog from which you can set items such as the Control Transport and what Clients to connect to at Startup.

Replay

Enables the Control to watch a previously recorded Replay File.

Record

Record activity at the Control, storing the information in a Replay file that can be shown to Students at a later date.

Block All Internet

Enables you to block all access to the Internet. This can be applied to all connected Students or on an individual basis.

Tools

Enables you to create shortcuts to commonly run tasks and launch them from within the Control.

Exit

End the current session and disconnects any connected Clients.


Control Window - Client Menu

Options in this menu apply to the selected Client or Clients.

Included

If this is ticked then the Client will automatically be included in Shows and Scans.

Lock Keyboard/Mouse

If a single Client is selected locks the keyboard and mouse of that Client. If no Client is selected locks the keyboard and mouse of all connected Clients.

Unlock Keyboard/Mouse

Unlocks the Keyboard and Mouse.

Power Management

Power On/Power Off Client workstations.

Show

Displays the Show dialog. From here you can select Clients to Show the Control screen to.

Show Video

Displays the Show Video dialog. From here you can select the required Video File and Clients you would like to Show the Video to.

Show Replay

Displays the Show Replay dialog. From here you can select the required Replay File and Clients you would like to Show the file to.

Show Application

Displays the Show Application dialog. From here you can select an Application currently running at the Control machine and Show it to selected Clients.

End Show

Ends a current Show.

Exhibit this Client

Displays the Exhibit dialog. From here you can select which Clients to show the selected Clients screen to.

Announce

Displays the Audio Announce dialog. From here you can select which Clients to make and audible Audio announcement to.

View

Brings up the View Window for the selected Client. This displays the Clients screen at the Control.

File Transfer

Displays the File Transfer window. From here you can Transfer Files to and from the selected Client as well as perform other File manipulation tasks.

Chat

Opens a Chat box to the highlighted Client.

Execute at Client

Displays the Execute Application dialog. From here you can launch applications at the selected Client(s).

Message

Displays the Message dialog.

Reboot

Reboot the selected Client(s).

Login

Login the selected Client(s).

Logout

Logout the selected Client(s).

Co-Browse

Displays the Co-Browser for the Control and the selected Client(s). From here you can guide Clients through various web pages.

Add to Group

Display the Add to Group dialog. From here you can organise Clients into groups for easier management.

Add to Scan

When Scanning multiple Clients at one time, add a Client to those being scanned.

Group Leader

Assign Group Leader status to a member of a Group. Enables the selected Client to perform many of the tasks that the main Control can.

Customize

Changes the appearance of the displayed Client icons.

Properties

Displays the Client Properties dialog. From here you can set items such as the Name to be displayed in the List View and associated information for that Client.


Control Window - Group Menu

Provides access to the Group Options. Organising Clients into Groups is a good way of managing them and running tasks on multiple Clients simultaneously.

New

Starts the Group Wizard. This guides you through the process of creating a group.

Delete

Deletes the selected Group. This does not affect the individual Clients, they will still be available.

Select

Displays the list of the available groups, from which you can select the one to work with.

Scan

Displays the Scan dialog. From here you can select which Clients to cycle through, displaying their View Window.

Execute

Displays the Execute dialog. From here you can launch applications at the Group or choose from a list of pre-saved applications.

Message

Displays the Message dialog.

Customize

Changes the appearance of the displayed Group icons.

Properties

Displays the Group Properties dialog. From here you can set items such as the Name to be displayed in the List View and associated information for that Group.


Control Window - View Menu

Provides access to the View Customisation and Configuration options.

Toolbar

Provides access to the Control Window customisation functions.

Status Bar

Toggles the Status Bar on and off.

Large Icons

Changes List View to large icons.

Small Icons

Changes List View to small icons.

List

Changes List View to Text Mode.

Details

Changes List View to Text Mode with Details.

Current Settings

Displays the Configuration Settings dialog for View, File Transfer, Audio, Options and Group Leaders.

Normal View

Changes the List View to Normal View with the option to Add, Remove or Browse for Students. This is the default List View.

Monitor View

Changes the List View to Monitor Mode. A thumbnail view of each Student screen will be displayed enabling the Tutor to monitor activity at multiple Student machines simultaneously.

Web View

Changes the List View to Web View enabling the Tutor to set up the Web Control Module.

Application View

Changes the List View to Application View enabling the Tutor to set up the Application Control Module.

Survey View

Changes the List View to Survey View enabling the Tutor to set up the Student Survey feature.

Whiteboard View

Opens an interactive Whiteboard in the List View, enabling the Tutor to use a range of tools to annotate the screen and display to selected Students.


Control Window - Window Menu

Tiles open Client or File transfer Windows. You can then view multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously.  The individual windows will be sized to fit on the screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Window

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


Control Window - Help Menu

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version, Licensee, Technical Support and Compression information.


The View Window

The View Window is the primary interface for interacting with individual Clients. Each Client has its own View Window. The Client View Windows are used for displaying the screens of the Clients at the Control. You can have multiple Client View Windows open and displayed simultaneously.

The View Window is divided in to four sections:

The Title Bar

This displays the name of the Client that is displayed in the Client Screen Area.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus. Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function.

The Client Screen Area

This is used for displaying the screen of the Client.


View Window - Client Menu

The drop down Client menu in the View Window is used to select the mode in which the Client will be Remote Controlled. It can also be used for suspending Viewing the Client screen and closing the View session.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Share

The Clients screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Both the users at the Control and the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements.

Watch

The Client’s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Only the User at the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements.

Control

The Client's screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Only the User at the Control will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements.  The user at the Client will be locked out.

Stop Viewing

Suspends the display of the Client screen at the Control.

Message

Displays a message on the Clients screen.

Reboot

Reboots the workstation of the selected Client.

Logout

Logout the selected Client.

Execute at Client

Displays a dialog box to enable you to execute an application at the Client.

Send Ctrl + Alt + Delete

Send this keystroke combination to the Client.

Clipboard

Cut and paste between applications on the Client and the Control workstations.

Blank Screen

Blank the Clients screen while you are Viewing it.

Close

Closes the View Window for this Client.


View Window - View Menu

The drop down View Menu is used to customise how the Window will be displayed.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Toolbar

Sets the display options for the Toolbar in the View Window.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar at the bottom of the View Window on or off.

Scale to fit

Sets the display mode for how the Client screen is displayed. Turning scale to fit on enables you to display the whole of the Client screen in the available View area.

Full Screen

Uses the whole of the available screen area on the Control to display the Clients screen.

Maximise View Area

Hides the View Menu Bar, Status Bar and Toolbar to uses the maximum possible area to display the Clients screen without switching to full screen mode.

Settings for Client

Changes the View, Keyboard/Mouse and Audio settings for this Client View Window.


View Window - Tools Menu

The View Window Tools Menu enables you to start a File Transfer session with the Viewed Client, open a Chat session, use the Annotate tool or Capture the Client Screen.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

File Transfer

If you choose File Transfer a File Transfer Window to this Client will be opened. You can simultaneously View the Client and Transfer Files to it.

Chat

If you choose Chat, a Chat Window to the Client will be opened. You can simultaneously View the Client.

Annotate

If you choose Annotate, the Annotate Toolbar will appear. When you are in Share or Control mode, you can use the different tools to Annotate the Client screen you are viewing.

Capture Screen

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.


View Window - Window Menu

Tile opens all Windows, all View Windows, File Transfer Windows, or closes all opened Windows. You can then View multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously.  The individual windows will be sized to fit on the Screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Close All Windows	Closes all opened View and File Transfer Windows

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


View Window - Help Menu

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version, Licensee, Technical Support and Compression information.


The File Transfer Window

When you choose an individual File Transfer operation the File Transfer Window is displayed. At its simplest you transfer files by dragging them from one location to another.

The File Transfer Window is divided in to five areas: -

The Title Bar

This shows which Client this particular File Transfer Window is working with.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus. Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function. Please also refer to the toolbar menu for details on how you can customise it to reflect the functions that you use most.

The Local Pane

The Local Pane displays a Tree View of the Directories of the Control on the Left-hand side, and a List View of the contents of those directories on the Right-hand side.

The Remote Pane

The Remote Pane displays a Tree View of the Directories of the Client on the Left-hand side and a List View of the contents of those directories on the Right-hand side.

The Status Bar

The Control Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control Window. It shows the current Status of the Control, the number of currently connected Clients and the number of items in the Folder. During a Dial-up connection it will also show communications details.

You can Hide or Display the Status Bar from the View Menu options on the Control drop down menu bar.

See Also

Transferring Files


File Transfer - File Menu

Provides access to the file transfer and manipulation functions. The options are also available by right-clicking in any of the columns in the List View.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Copy

Copies the selected files to the chosen destination.

Delete

Deletes the selected files

Rename

Renames the selected file.

Open

If an association exists, loads the currently selected file.

Open With

If there is no association with Windows, the Open With dialog will appear.

Edit

Enables you to edit the content of a selected file. Ideal for editing batch files/TXT files in notepad.

Execute

Displays the Execute application dialog, from which you can launch applications at the selected Client(s).

Properties

Sets the file attributes for the selected file.

Close

Closes the File transfer Window.


File Transfer - Directory Menu

Provides access to directory level functions in File Transfer such as creating directories on either the Control or the Client Workstation. The options are also available by right-clicking in any of the columns in the List View.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Create

Creates a new directory beneath the currently selected directory.

Rename

Change the name of a directory at either the Control or Client end.

Delete

Deletes the currently selected directory.

Goto

Enables you to move directly to a named directory without the need to navigate through the Tree View.

Properties

Sets the Attributes for the selected directory.


File Transfer - View Menu

The drop down View Menu is used to customise how the Window and contents will be displayed. The options are also available by right-clicking in any of the columns in the List View.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Toolbar

Hides or displays the Toolbar.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar.

Details

Displays or hides file details in the File List View.

List

The List View  will display the filenames only.

Arrange Icons

Sets the sort options for the File List Views.

Select

Selects all Files and/or Directories in the current List View.

Print

Enables you to print the content of a selected directory or file list.

Settings

Configures the overall settings for File Transfer.


File Transfer - Window Menu

Tile opens all Windows, all View Windows, File Transfer Windows, or closes all opened Windows. You can then View multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously.  The individual windows will be sized to fit on the Screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Close All Windows	Closes all opened View and File Transfer Windows

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


File Transfer - Help Menu

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version, Licensee, Technical Support and Compression information.


The File Distribution Window

The File Distribution Window is used for distributing files to multiple Clients simultaneously.

The File Distribution Window is divided into five sections:

The Title Bar

This shows which group of client this particular File Distribution Window is working with.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus. Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function. Please also refer to the toolbar menu for details on how you can customise it to reflect the functions that you use most.

The Local Pane

The Local Pane displays a Tree View of the available Directories on the Control PC on the Left-hand side and a List View of the contents of those directories on the left-hand side.

The Remote Pane

The Remote Pane shows the Clients to whom the Files will be distributed.

The Status Bar

The Control Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control Window. It shows the current Status of the Control, the number of currently connected Clients and the number of items in the Folder. During a Dial-up connection it will also show communications details.

You can Hide or Display the Status Bar from the View Menu options on the Control drop down menu bar.

See also

Distributing Files


File Distribution - File Menu

Provides access to the File Transfer and manipulation functions.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Copy

Copies the selected files to the chosen destination.

Delete

Deletes the selected files.

Rename

Renames the selected file.

Open

If an association exists, loads the currently selected file.

Open With

If there is no association with Windows, the Open With dialog will appear.

Edit

Enables you to edit the content of a selected file. Ideal for editing batch files/TXT files in notepad.

Properties

Shows the file attributes.

Close

Closes the File Transfer Window.


File Distribution - Client Menu

Enables you to select destination directories and lock directories at Clients.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Set Destination

Enables you to choose a destination directory on the selected Client to where the files will be sent.

Lock Directories

Prevent the Client directories from being automatically updated when you change the local directory.

Reset Directories

Resets the destination directory at the Client to reflect the original destination at the Control.


File Distribution - Directory Menu

Provides access to directory level functions in File Transfer such as creating directories on either the Control or the Client workstation.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Create

Creates a new directory beneath the currently selected directory.

Rename

Change the name of a directory at either the Control or Client end.

Delete

Deletes the currently selected directory.

Goto

Enables you to move directly to a named directory without the need to navigate through the Tree View.

Properties

Sets the Attributes for the selected directory.


File Distribution - Tools Menu

Provides access to the File Editing capabilities of NetSupport File transfer.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

View File

You can view Files of up to 30KB without the need to start an application such as Notepad.

Edit File

You can edit Files of up to 30KB without the need to start an application such as Notepad.


File Distribution - View Menu

The drop down View Menu is used to customise how the Window will be displayed.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Toolbar

Hides or displays the Toolbar.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar.

Show Details

Displays or hides File details in the File List View.

Arrange Icons

Sets the sort options for the File List Views.

Select

Selects all Files and/or Directories in the current List View.

Settings

Configures the overall settings for File Transfer.


File Distribution - Window Menu

Tile opens all Windows, all View Windows, File Transfer Windows, or closes all opened Windows. You can then View multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously.  The individual windows will be sized to fit on the Screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Close All Windows	Closes all opened View and File Transfer Windows

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


File Distribution - Help Menu

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version, Licensee, Technical Support and Compression information.


The Scan Window

See also

Scanning Clients.

The Scan Window will cycle through the selected Clients, showing their screens on the Control, until you end the Scan. If you want to start Scanning from a particular Client, highlight their icon before you choose Scan from the toolbar.

Ideal for monitoring a number of workstations and just keeping an eye on what's happening!

The Scan Window is divided into the following sections:

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities.

The Toolbar

The toolbar buttons for a single Client Scan have the following functions: -

Previous, Auto and Next buttons

You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan Window toolbar, or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients. The previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned. The next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle.

Scaling to Fit

It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control. In this case choosing the Scale to Fit option from the View Window Menu or Toolbar, will re-size its screen to fit the Window in which it is displayed.

Full Screen

When Scanning in full screen mode, you can use the Scan Floating toolbar to control the operation.

Capture

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.

The Status Bar

The Control Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control Window. It shows the current Status of the Control, the number of currently connected Clients and the number of items in the Folder. During a Dial-up connection it will also show communications details.

You can Hide or Display the Status Bar from the View Menu options on the Control drop down menu bar.

The toolbar buttons for a multiple Client Scan have the following functions: -

Previous, Auto and Next buttons

You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan Window toolbar, or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients. The previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned. The next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle.

Scaling to Fit

It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control. In this case choosing the Scale to Fit button, will re-size its screen to fit the Window in which it is displayed.

Maximise

To enlarge a Client View Window. This button will be greyed out until you select a Client View Window. To maximise the Client View Window, click the Maximise button or click the box in the top right hand corner of the Client View Window.

Lock

To lock a selected Clients keyboard and mouse.

Chat

To initiate a chat session between a Client and the Control.

Share

To View a Client in Share Mode.

Capture

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.

The Status Bar

The Control Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control Window. It shows the current Status of the Control, the number of currently connected Clients and the number of items in the Folder. During a Dial-up connection it will also show communications details.

You can Hide or Display the Status Bar from the View Menu options on the Control drop down menu bar.


Scan - Scan Menu

Used for moving backwards and forwards between Clients or for setting automatic mode.

The available menus are:

Next

Moves to the next Client in the Scan List and displays its screen.

Previous

Moves to the previous Client in the Scan List and displays its screen.

Auto

Sets Scan to auto-cycle, which displays each Clients screen in turn.

Close

Ends the Scan session.


Scan - View Menu

The drop down View Menu is used to customise how the Window will displayed.

The individual sub menus and available functions for a single Scan are:

Toolbar

Sets the display options for the Toolbar in the View Window.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar at the bottom of the View Window on or off.

Scale to fit

Sets the display mode for how the Client screen is displayed. Turning scale to fit on enables you to display the whole of the Client screen in the available View area.

Capture Screen

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.

The individual sub menus and available functions for a multiple Scan are:

Toolbar

Sets the display options for the Toolbar in the View Window.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar at the bottom of the View Window on or off.

Size

Allows you to increase or decrease the number of Client screens displayed on the Multiple Scan window


Scan - Window Menu

Tile opens all Windows, all View Windows, File Transfer Windows, or closes all opened Windows. You can then View multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously.  The individual windows will be sized to fit on the Screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Close All Windows	Closes all opened View and File Transfer Windows

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


The Help Request Window

Displays help requests that have been raised by Clients. You can choose to open a chat box to the Client or immediately switch to the View window.

The help request message will be stored until you select it and choose {Client}{Clear Help}.

Name

The name of the Client workstation.

Requested By

The name entered by the user at the Client workstation when raising the Help Request.

Help Message

The message sent by the Client.

Description

The description saved in the Client properties dialog at the Control workstation.


Client Main Window

When a Client double clicks on the NetSupport icon on their task bar or presses the hotkeys ALT+LeftShift+RightShift, the Client Main Window appears.

From here a Client can:

•	Initiate a Chat session with a Control;

•	Request Help from a Control;

•	Cancel a previous sent Help Request.


Control Window - Layout Menu

This menu option will appear on the Main Menu when the List View is in Normal View only.

Retrieves or stores saved layouts that set the position of the Client icons in the List View. You can also set a background for the List View.

Save Layout

Allows you to save an existing named Layout, if you have made any changes during your tutor session.

Save Layout As

Allows you to save a new List View Layout or an existing layout under a different name.

Load Layout

Allows you to select and open a previously saved Layout.

Set Background

Allows you to choose alternative bitmaps to decorate the background and enhance the Layout of the icons.

Clear Background

Allows you to clear the previously changed background and reverts back to the standard plain white background.


Control Window - Web Menu

This menu option will appear on the Main Menu when the List View is in Web View only.

Create new URL List

Allows you to name save and create a new URL List

Load existing URL List

Allows you to select and open a previously saved URL list.

Unrestricted Access

If you have had your Approved/Restricted List enabled, select this option to revert back to unrestricted access. You can apply to all connected Students or on an individual basis.

Allow Approved URL’s only

By selecting this option, all connected Students will only be able to view the URL’s stated on the Tutors Approved List.

Block Restricted URL’s

By selecting this option, all connected Students will not be able to view the URL’s stated on the Tutors Restricted List.

History

Displays a list of the sites visited by Students while a Tutor is connected. When the Tutor disconnects the list is cleared but you can print or save the information if a permanent record is required.


Control Window - Applications Menu

Create New Application List

Allows you to name, save and create a new Application List.

Load Existing Application List

Allows you to select and open a previously saved Application List.

Unrestricted Access

If you have had your Approved/Restricted List enabled, select this option to revert back to unrestricted access. You can apply to all connected Students or on an individual basis.

Allow Approved Applications Only

By selecting this option, all connected Students will only be able to use the Applications stated in the Tutors Approved List

Block Restricted Applications

By selecting this option, all connected Students will not be able to use the Applications stated on the Tutors Restricted List.

History

Displays a list of the applications used by Students while a Tutor is connected. When the Tutor disconnects the list is cleared but you can print or save the information if a permanent record is required.


Control Window - Survey Menu

The following options are available when Survey View is selected.

Create New Survey List

Surveys that have been sent to Students are stored in a file enabling you to use them again if required. NetSupport provides a default file, NetSupport School Pro.sul, but you can create new lists should you want to categorise questions.

Load Existing Survey List

Retrieve a stored Survey List with a view to using an existing Survey or adding new questions to the list.

Add Survey To List

Stores a typed question and its response options within the currently loaded Survey List.

Send

Once you have typed your desired question for your Student Survey, select this option to Send the question to all selected Students.

Cancel Survey

This option allows you to cancel the Student Survey at any moment after the question has been sent.

Print Results

Provides a printed record of the Student responses.


Scan - Client Menu

Only available when performing a Multi-Scan, these options enable the Control to interact with a selected Client.

Lock Mouse and Keyboard

Lock a selected Clients keyboard and mouse.

Share

View a selected Client in Share Mode. The Scan Window automatically maximises to display the selected Client window only.

Capture Screen

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.

Maximise

To enlarge a Client View Window. This button will be greyed out until you select a Client View Window. To maximise the Client View Window, click the Maximise button or click the box in the top right hand corner of the Client View Window.


The Replay Window

The Replay Window appears at the Control when a Replay File is opened. The Replay Controls Panel is also displayed providing the Control with the necessary tools to playback the recorded information.

The window consists of the following areas:

The Title Bar

This displays the name of the replay File that is being reviewed.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools.  Double clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus.  Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function.

The Replay Screen Area

This area displays the content of the Replay File.


Replay Window - Menu Bar

Provides access to the drop down menus.

The available menus are:

File

Used to close the replay Window.

View

Configures the Look and feel of the Replay Window.

Window

Enables you to switch between open NetSupport Windows.

Help


Replay Window - File Menu

The File drop down menu contains the option to Close the current Replay Session.


Replay Window - View Menu

The drop down View Menu is used to customise how the Window will displayed.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Toolbar

Sets the display options for the Toolbar in the View Window.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar at the bottom of the View Window on or off.

Scale to Fit

Sets the display mode for how the Client screen is displayed. Turning scale to fit on enables you to display the whole of the Client screen in the available View area.

Full Screen

Uses the whole of the available screen area on the Control to display the Clients screen.


Replay Window - Control Panel

A VCR like Control panel to enable you to fast forward, stop, start etc.

The Replay Window contains the controls for playing a recorded Client session.  The window contains a replay time index that indicates where in the replay file you currently are, and displays information about the file being played.  Use these controls in the same way you would for a video recorder.

The individual sub menus and available functions are:

Stop and Play

The Stop button is shown when you are playing a replay file and the Play button when the file is stopped.  Only one of these buttons is displayed at a time.  The file is played until the end is reached or the Pause Marker is encountered.

Rewind

Start playing the file from the beginning if it is already playing otherwise moves the replay index to the beginning of the file.

Skip to Previous marker

Moves the replay index to the previous activity marker or to the beginning of the file if there isn’t one.  These markers are added at points when lots of activity was recorded at the Client.

Frame Advance

Advance the replay index to the next frame.  Press and hold this button to Fast-Forward though the replay file.

Skip to Next marker

Moves the replay index to the next activity marker or to the end of the file if there isn’t one.

Mute

Turn audio on/off within the Replay file.

Other Information

The current time index is displayed to the right of these controls in the hh:mm:ss.ms format.  The name of the Client that the replay was recorded on, the date and time are displayed at the bottom of the window.

Replay Marker

This marker can be positioned anywhere within the time frame of the replay file.  The marker is the small black triangle beneath the time index control.  Click and drag this to the position where you want the file to stop playing.  When the marker is encountered the replay stops, and you can then press play to continue past it.

Help

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Licensee, Version, Technical Support and Compression information.


Control Window - Monitor Menu

This option will appear on the main Control Window drop down menu when Monitor Mode has been selected in the List View.

Update

Changes the Student thumbnail refresh rate.

Size

Customise the size of the displayed thumbnails.

Auto fit Students

Automatically adjust the size of the thumbnails to fit the window.

Show Active Application

An icon will appear in the top left of each thumbnail indicating which application is currently active at the Student machine. If you have created approved and restricted application lists, a green (approved) or red (restricted) border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of applications.

Show Active Web Site

Displays an icon in the bottom right of each thumbnail indicating which site the Student is currently visiting. If you have created approved and restricted web lists, a green (approved) or red (restricted) border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of the Internet.

Show Help Requests

Highlights when a Student has outstanding help requests. A flashing Question Mark icon appears in the top right of the relevant thumbnail.

Zoomed Mode

Toggles the zoom facility on and off.


Control Window - Planner Menu

This gives you access to the Lesson Plan functions, allowing you to create or load a Lesson and control a Lesson while in progress.

Pause Lesson

Allows you to pause a lesson.

Skip to Next Item

Selecting this option will allow you to skip to the next activity in your Lesson Plan.

Abort lesson

Allows you to abort the current lesson.

Load Lesson Plan

Allows you to select and load a previously saved Lesson Plan.

Manage Plan

Enables you to create a new Lesson Plan.

Set Class Time

Set the end time or duration of a Lesson. Ideal if you simply want a timed session without the need to run a pre-defined Lesson Plan. The timer will appear on the Lesson Bar and can be switched off by selecting {Planner}{Set Class Time}{Remove} from the Control Window drop down menu. The timer shows hours/minutes until there is 5 minutes remaining when it will switch to minutes/seconds.


Control Window Whiteboard Menu

This option will appear on the main Control Window drop down menu when Whiteboard Mode has been selected in the List View.

A full screen Interactive Whiteboard is provided for the Tutor enabling a range of screen annotation tools to be used.

Options

Save Whiteboard	Saves the Annotated screen to a file.

Save Selection	When the ‘select region’ tool is active, you can highlight an area of the screen and save it to a file.

Load Image	Loads a saved image.

Clear Screen	Clears the annotations.

Undo	Undo the most recent Annotation.

Tool

Choose from a range of tools with which to annotate the screen. For example, freehand draw, draw arrow, select region.

Colour

Sets the pen colour.

Width

Sets the width of the line.

Fill

Sets the colour and fill style.

Font

Sets text font.

Turn Whiteboard On

Allows you to show the whiteboard to all connected Students within the currently selected group. Select the option again to turn off.

Activate Student

When Students are viewing the Whiteboard they cannot initially annotate the screen themselves. However, the Tutor can nominate a Student to be the ‘Whiteboard Leader’. This activates the annotation options at the selected machine. The Tutor can switch control to any of the other participants as required by selecting their icon in the Student List.


The Co-Browse Window

The Co-Browse Window allows you to open web pages and guide Students through these pages.

The Co-Browse Window is divided in to the following sections:

The Title Bar

This displays the name of the website you are currently browsing.

The Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools.

The Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools. Clicking on an individual item takes you straight to that task or function, eliminating the need to work through the drop down menus. Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function.

Address Bar

Enter a website address to open a web page.

Browser Window

This displays the current web page. You can create additional tabs to make it easier to navigate between open web pages.


Co-Browse - File Menu

Provides access to the Tutor Controls.

Open Location

Selects the Address bar to navigate to a new website.

New Tab

Creates a new tab, any existing tabs will be left open.

Close Tab

Closes the selected tab.

Pause Students

Pauses the Students Co-Browser display while the Tutor navigates the Co-Browser.

Synchronise Students

Re-sends instructions to Students to open windows/links to synchronise with the Tutor.

Lock Students

Gives the Tutor full control, Students can only view what the Tutor is showing them.

Free Students

Students are ‘unlocked’ and free to navigate to new websites, any tabs or pages selected by the Tutor will be left open.

Restrict Students

Students are ‘unlocked’ but are only able to access tabs or web pages that have been left open by the Tutor. The Students will not be able to access other websites or open new links on existing pages.

Page Setup

Allows you to choose the page setup for printing.

Exit

Closes the Co-Browser Window.


Co-Browse - View Menu

Provides access to the View customisation options.

Toolbar

Sets the display options for the Toolbar in the Co-Browse Window.

Status Bar

Hides or displays the Status Bar.

Stop

Stops you being redirected to a web page.

Refresh

Refreshes the current web page.

Go Back

Takes you to the previous web page.

Go Forward

Allows you to go to pages you have previously viewed.

Go Home

Takes you to the home page.

Text Size

Allows you to change the size of the text.


Co-Browse - Bookmarks Menu

You can bookmark your most frequently viewed web pages, any pages that you bookmark will be listed at the end of this menu.

Bookmark This Page

Bookmarks the current web page.

Set As Home Page

The current web page will be set as the home page, this page will appear every time you start the Co-Browser.


Co-Browse - Window Menu

Tile opens all Windows, all View Windows or File Transfer Windows. You can then View multiple Clients or File Transfer sessions simultaneously. The individual windows will be sized to fit on the Screen of the Control. You can also use this option to move between individual Windows or close all open Windows.

Tile

All Windows	Displays and tiles both Client View and File Transfer Windows

View Windows	Displays and tiles only the Client View Windows

File Transfer	Displays and tiles only the active File Transfer Windows

Choosing a named Window brings that Window to the fore. For example, choosing TEST1 – Viewing would make the View Window for Test1 the Active window and display it on top of all others.


Co-Browse - Help Menu

Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version, Licensee, Technical Support and Compression information.


Co-Browse - Restrictions Menu

This menu option allows you to apply restrictions from the Web Control Module to Students when they are using the Co-Browser.

Add to Approved Sites

Adds the website to your Approved Sites list in the Web Control Module.

Add to Restricted Sites

Adds the website to your Restricted Sites list in the Web Control Module.

Allow Approved Sites Only

Students will only be able to view websites that are listed on the Approved Sites list in the Web Control Module.

Block Restricted Sites

Students will not be able to view any websites that are listed on the Restricted Sites list in the Web Control Module.

See also

Web Control Module


Using NetSupport School

This section will guide you through starting NetSupport School. It also covers basic functionality such as Showing the Tutor’s screen to Students, Viewing the Student’s Screen and Sending Messages.

The main point to remember when using NetSupport School is that the workstation that is doing the showing or remote controlling, is called the Control or Tutor and that the workstation/s being shown to or remote controlled are called the Clients or Students.

When the Control program initialises it automatically searches for and connects to Clients that meet the criteria set in {School} {Configuration - Startup}.

Note: This guide assumes you have already installed Clients on the workstations to be controlled. If you have not done this, do so now.  See Installation for details.

See also

Starting NetSupport School


Starting NetSupport School

After installation the Client program is automatically loaded on the Student workstations as Windows starts up.

To start the NetSupport School Control program, double click on the NetSupport Tutor icon in your NetSupport Program Group, or choose, {Start}{Programs}{NetSupport School}{NetSupport School Tutor}.

When NetSupport School loads for the first time, the Control Configuration dialog will appear. This enables the Control to specify the Clients to connect to at start-up. The dialog will not appear in future sessions.

When starting NetSupport School for the first time, it is advisable to Browse the Network for available Clients. To do this, click on ‘Browse and Connect to Students starting with’ and enter a prefix for the Computer Names. Click Ok.

A useful option within NetSupport School is the Lesson Plan feature enabling a Tutor to pre-plan the scope of a lesson. A convenient Class Wizard is provided which guides you through the process and this will appear at startup. However this can be disabled if required.

As the Tutor program loads NetSupport will then Browse the Network for the specified Students. While it is searching the Browsing message will be displayed. All successful or failed connections will be reported in a connection dialog, when all the connections are complete click Ok.

All connected Clients will have their icons displayed in the Control Window.

See also

Connecting to Students

The Control Window


Finding and Connecting to Students

The Control Configuration dialog, {School}{Configuration} from the Control Window drop down menu, is used to specify how and which Clients (students) are connected to at start-up. You can:

•	Browse the Network and Connect to Clients with a specific name.

•	Connect to a Known List of Clients.

•	Create a ‘class’ and enable Clients to connect to it.

Note:	If the expected Clients are not found it may be because NetSupport has not been configured to browse the required Networks. See Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing for more information.

See

To browse and connect to Clients

To connect to the Known list of Clients

Enable Clients to connect to a class


Viewing a Student screen

Having connected to a Client, you can control it. This is called Viewing. The Client’s screen will be displayed in a Window on the Control workstation.  NetSupport will allow you to View multiple Client screens, each in its own Window, simultaneously.

Note:	If required, a message can be displayed at the Client workstation confirming it is being Viewed. See Student Security Options

The Quick View Bar allows you to View a connected Client quickly and easily. When you connect to a Client a button with the Clients name will appear on the Quick View Bar on the Control Window. By clicking on a button you will View the Clients screen, by clicking on the button while Viewing, the View Window will be closed.

To View a Client

1.	Double click the required Client icon in the List View.

Or,

With the required Client icon selected, choose {Client}{View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the View Client icon on the Control toolbar.

Or,

Right click on the Client icon and choose View.

Or,

Click  the required Client name on the Quick View Toolbar.

2.	The View Window for that Client will appear at the Control.

Note: For acceptable performance while Viewing, ensure that the Client’s Active Desktop is turned off.

To return to the Control Window

1.	Choose {Client}{Close} from the View Window drop down menu.

Other View Window options:

Scale to Fit

It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control. In this case choosing the Scale to Fit option from the View Window menu or Toolbar, will re-size its screen to fit the Window in which it is displayed.

Switching to Full Screen

Alternatively, you might choose to use the whole of the Control’s screen to display the Client’s screen. This is known as Full Screen Viewing. While Viewing a Client in Full Screen a floating toolbar will also be displayed. If you close this down, remember to use the hotkeys, usually <CTRL+RSHIFT+LSHIFT>, to get back to the Control Window or press <PAUSE+ALT> to display the drop down menus.

File Transfer

Chatting to Students

Sending a Message to Students

Remotely Executing Applications at Students

Remote Clipboard

Using Audio

Rebooting or Logging out Students

Blanking the Client Screens

Screen Capture

Annotating Screens

Sending Ctrl Alt Del

See also

To stop Viewing a Client to increase performance

View Modes

Viewing multiple Students simultaneously

The View Window

Sending Ctrl+Alt+Delete

Scanning Students


View Modes

You can View Clients in three modes:

Share	The Client’s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Both the Control and the user at the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements.

Watch	The Client’s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Only the user at the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements. The user at the Control will be locked out.

Control	The Client's screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client.  Only the user at the Control will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements.  The user at the Client will be locked out.

To change the View mode

1.	While Viewing the Client, click the View Mode icon on the View Window toolbar and select Share, Watch or Control.

Or,

Select {Client}{Share/Watch/Control} from the View Window drop down menu.

See also

Viewing a Student screen

Viewing multiple Students simultaneously

To stop Viewing a Client to increase performance


Viewing multiple Students simultaneously

NetSupport enables you to View multiple Clients simultaneously, each in its own Window. You can even scale their individual View Windows to fit on the Control’s screen.

To View multiple Client screens

1.	From the Control {Window} drop down menu or any Client {View} drop down menu, choose {Window}{Tile} and then select which NetSupport Windows you want to display.

2.	Your chosen Windows will be tiled on the Control’s screen. If you want to see the entire Client’s screen then choose the Scale to Fit option in the toolbar of each Client’s View Window.

Note: Scale to Fit is set by default. To View the screen in normal resolution, turn off Scale to Fit.

See also

Viewing a Student screen

View Modes

The View Window

Scanning multiple Client screens


Scanning Students

The Scan function enables you to cycle through each connected Client in turn, displaying its screen on the Control. It is an alternative to Viewing multiple Clients in scaled windows, which may cause their screens to be unreadable.

Multiple Client screens can also be scanned in one Scan Window.

To Scan one Client screen at a time

1.	Choose {Group}{Scan} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Select the Scan button from the Control Toolbar.

2.	The Scan dialog will appear.

3.	Specify which Clients to Scan by removing or including the check mark next to the Client name.

Note : If you want to start scanning from a particular Client, select their icon in the Scan dialog.

4.	Select the Scan interval.

5.	Select Display one Client at a time.

6.	Click Scan.

7.	The Scan Window will appear and immediately show you the first Client in the sequence. It will cycle through the selected Clients, showing their screens on the Control, until you end the Scan.

To End the Scan

1.	Choose {Scan}{Close} from the Scan Window drop down menu.

See also

Scanning multiple Client screens


The Scan Toolbar

The Scan Window will cycle through the selected Clients, showing their screens on the Control, until you end the Scan. If you want to start Scanning from a particular Client, select their icon before you choose Scan from the toolbar.

Multiple Client screens can also be scanned in one Scan Window.

The toolbar buttons for a single Client Scan Window have the following functions: -

Previous, Auto and Next buttons

You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan Window toolbar, or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients. The previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned. The next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle.

Scaling to Fit

It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control. In this case choosing the Scale to Fit button, will re-size its screen to fit the Window in which it is displayed.

Full Screen

When Scanning in full screen mode, you can use the Scan Floating toolbar to Control the operation.

Capture

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.

The toolbar buttons for a multiple Client Scan Window have the following functions: -

Previous, Auto and Next buttons

You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan Window toolbar, or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients. The previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned. The next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle.

Scaling to Fit

It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control. In this case choosing the Scale to Fit button, will re-size its screen to fit the Window in which it is displayed.

Maximise

To enlarge a Client View Window. This button will be greyed out until you select a Client View Window. To maximise the Client View Window, click the Maximise button or click the box in the top right hand corner of the Client View Window.

Lock

To lock a selected Clients keyboard and mouse.

Chat

To initiate a chat session between a Client and the Control.

Share

To View a Client in Share Mode.

Capture

A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken. You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file.


Showing to Students

The Show feature enables the Control user to emphasise key learning points by displaying the information on their screen to a selected Client or group of Clients. You can also show a stored Replay File, a Video or an Application that is currently running at the Control.

During a Show, the Control can nominate a selected Client to take over the demonstration, making them the Show Leader.

To Show a Control screen

1.	Choose {Client}{Show} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Right-click on a selected Client icon and choose Show.

or

Click the ‘Show Menu’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show.

2.	The Show dialog will appear. This dialog is used to set which Clients to Show to. You must select the Client, or Clients, that you will Show your screen to. If you are connected to only one Client, or selected a specific Client, they will appear as an individual option. If you only wish to Show to this Client, click on Show.

Note:	When showing the Control screen to clients, the screen information is sent to each client machine in turn. In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when showing to larger numbers of machines this can affect performance. In these circumstances, NetSupport’s Broadcast Show facility can be enabled. This results in the screen information being sent to all machines simultaneously thus improving the speed of transfer.

Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport, using this feature will generate additional broadcast packets on your network. It is recommended that you consult your Network administrator before using this feature.

See also

To End the Show

To enable the Control to Continue working in the background while Showing

To Resume a Show while Suspended

Show Leaders

Showing one Students screen to others

Annotating screens during Show

Show Videos

Show Applications

Using Audio

Using Replay Files


Exhibit - Showing one Students screen to others

With NetSupport School, it is possible to Show the Control’s screen to a number of connected Clients. It is also possible to show one Clients screen to other connected Clients, this is called Exhibit. For example, Client 1 has produced some work, which you wish to show to rest of the class.

To Show a Clients screen

1.	Select the Client whose screen you want to show to the other Clients.

2.	Choose {Client}{Exhibit this Client} from the drop down menu.

or,

Click the ‘Show Menu’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Exhibit.

or,

Right click on the Client icon and choose Exhibit this Client.

3.	The Exhibit dialog will be displayed.

4.	Select the Clients you wish to include.

5.	Set the Show Mode to be used at the Client screens, Full Screen, Windowed or Maximise Window.

6.	Click Exhibit to commence the Show.

7.	The selected Client’s screen will be then be displayed on the screens of the Control and the other Clients. Only the Control and the Exhibiting Client will be able to change the screen, with the keyboard or mouse.

Switching between Full Screen and Windowed Mode At The Control

While the Show is in progress, the Exhibited screen appears ‘Full Screen’ at the Control. If preferred, you can switch to ‘Windowed’ mode.

A toolbar appears, from which the Control can perform a number of tasks.

To Switch Between Full Screen and Windowed Mode

1.	Select Full Screen from the Toolbar.

or,

Choose {View}{Full Screen} from the drop down menu.

Notes:

•	While in Full Screen Mode, a floating toolbar appears.

•	To return to Windowed Mode, click the Full Screen button on the floating toolbar or use the hotkeys <CTRL>+<LSHIFT>+<RSHIFT>.

Suspend or Stop the Exhibit

The Control can choose to end the Show or temporarily suspend it. While suspended, the Control and/or Client can prepare a new demonstration in the background. The previously exhibited screen remains on the other Client screens until the Show is resumed.

To Suspend The Exhibit

1.	From the Window toolbar or floating toolbar, choose Suspend.

2.	While suspended, the Control and Exhibiting Client can work in the background. The other Client screens remain frozen.

3.	To resume the Show, choose Resume.

To Stop The Exhibit

1.	From the Window toolbar or floating toolbar, choose Stop.

See also

Annotating Screens


Annotating Screens

The Show, Exhibit and View features provide a useful Annotate tool that can be used to highlight areas of a Tutor or Student’s screen in order to emphasise a key learning point.

To annotate a Show screen

While the Control screen is being shown, the tutor may want to draw the student’s attention to a particular area. The Annotate tools can be used to highlight the relevant part of the screen.

1.	While Showing, right click on the NetSupport Showing icon or the NetSupport School Task Bar Button, and select Annotate Screen.

or,

Double click on the Annotate icon.

2.	The Annotate toolbar will appear.

3.	Select the tool, colour etc and use the mouse to draw over the relevant part of the Control screen.

Note:	If you do not want the Student’s to see the screen being annotated in real-time, click Suspend. This freezes the Show enabling the Tutor to continue working in the background. Click Suspend again to restart the Show, this refreshes the display at the Student screens.

To annotate a screen while Viewing

While Viewing, the Control can use the Annotate tools to highlight a particular area of the Client screen. In Share and Watch Mode, the Client can also use the Annotate toolbar options. The Control can still use the other View Window options while Annotating, Chat, File Transfer etc.

1.	View the required Client.

2.	Select {Tools}{Annotate} from the View Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Annotate icon on the View Window Toolbar.

3.	The Annotate Toolbar will appear.

To annotate a screen while Exhibiting

The screen of a Client that is being Exhibited can be Annotated in order to draw the attention of the other Students to a particular learning point. Depending on the Mode being used, both the Control and/or the Exhibited Client can use the Annotate options.

1.	Exhibit the required Client screen.

2.	Select {Tools}{Annotate} from the Exhibit Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Annotate icon on the Exhibit Window Toolbar.

3.	The Annotate Toolbar will appear.

Note:	If you do not want the Student’s to see the screen being annotated in real-time, click Suspend. This freezes the Show enabling the Tutor or Exhibited Client to continue working in the background. Click Resume to restart the Show, this refreshes the display at the Student screens.

Annotate Toolbar

Options

Save Screen	Saves the Annotated screen to a file.

Save Selection	When the ‘select region’ tool is active, you can highlight an area of the screen and save it to a file.

Clear Screen	Clears the annotations.

Undo	Undo the most recent Annotation.

Exit	Ends Annotate but stays in Show, Exhibit or View mode.

Tool	Choose from a range of tools with which to annotate the screen. For example, freehand draw, draw arrow, select region.

Colour 	Sets the pen colour.

Width	Sets the width of the line.

Fill 	Sets the colour and fill style.

Font	Sets text font.

Suspend	Suspends the Show allowing you to go back to the Control View Window. (Not available when Viewing or Exhibiting)

End	Ends the Show, and takes you back to Control View Window. (Not available when Viewing or Exhibiting)


Using Audio

NetSupport allows you to use audible communications to connected Clients, via microphones, headphones and speakers while Viewing and Showing. NetSupport will only operate Audio if the workstations have Audio Hardware and Software installed.

See

Using the Announce Feature

Using Audio while Viewing

Using Audio while Showing

Adjusting Microphone and Speaker Volume

NetSupport Video Player


Using the Announce feature

This feature sends the audio announcement to all the selected Clients headphones or speakers. They will be able to hear the Tutor but will not be able to speak back.

To make an announcement

1.	Choose {Client}{Announce} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

Or,

Click the Announce icon on the toolbar.

Or,

Click the Communicate icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Announce.

2.	The Announce dialog box will appear, include (green tick), or exclude (red cross), Clients from the announcement, then click on the Announce button.

3.	A dialog box will then appear indicating that you can now announce. Click on OK when you have finished speaking.

See

Using Audio Support while Viewing and Showing to a Client

Adjusting Microphone and Speaker Volume


Using Audio Support while Viewing and Showing to a Client

NetSupport allows you to use audible communications to connected Clients, via microphones, headphones and speakers while Viewing and Showing. NetSupport will only operate Audio if the workstations have Audio Hardware and Software installed.

To use Audio Support while Viewing

1.	Click on the Audio Button on the Toolbar in the View Window.

2.	The Audio options will be displayed. From here you can: -

•	Turn Audio on or off;

•	Enable only the Control or the Client to talk;

•	Set the microphone sensitivity;

•	Select the Audio quality.

The Mute Toolbar button toggles the speaker and microphone on and off.

To use Audio Support while Showing

1.	In the Show Configuration dialog box select the Enable Audio Support check box.

2.	If you are Showing to only one Client, both the Control and Client can speak. If you are Showing to many, only the Control has Announce functionality.

The Audio Settings set in the Control Configurator Audio option will apply during these sessions.

See

Adjusting Microphone and Speaker Volume


Adjusting Microphone and Speaker Volume

You can adjust the audio settings within NetSupport to match the capabilities of your multimedia workstations or to fine tune performance. However, you should note that the higher the quality of sound you select, the greater the volume of data that needs to be sent. This can affect screen update performance on slower workstations.

To Access the Volume Controls

1.	Right click on the speaker icon in the task bar.

To change other options such as sound quality, do one of the following: -

Global Method (Changes default setting for all Clients):

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings – Audio} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Individual Client Method:

1.	While Viewing the Client.

2.	Choose {View}{Settings for Client – Audio} from the View Window drop down menu.

3.	The Audio Setting dialog will be displayed. This allows you to set the following properties:

Volume Settings adjustments

Threshold	Microphone sensitivity

Microphone	Volume of microphone

Speaker 	Volume of speakers

Wave	Volume of Operating Systems Sound Effects

Enable Options

On	Turn Audio on

Off	Turn Audio off

Talk	Set the Control Audio to Talk function only

Listen	Set the Control Audio to Listen function only


Chatting to Students

NetSupport allows you to Chat to any number of connected Students simultaneously, via a scrolling text window.

To Chat to Clients

1.	Select the Clients or Group of Clients you want to Chat to in the List View. If you do not select a Student icon, all connected Clients will be included.

2.	Choose {Client}{Chat} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the Communicate icon on the Control toolbar and choose Chat.

Or,

Right click on an individual Client and choose Chat.

3.	The Chat Properties Dialog will appear. Confirm which Students to include in the Chat session and select any additional properties that should apply. Click OK to start the Chat session.

4.	The Chat Window will appear on the Control and Client workstations.

Notes:

•	Students can also initiate Chat sessions by opening the Client Main Window and choosing {Commands}{Chat}.

•	By default, the Student can only Chat to the Control. However, the Control can enable the option for Students to Chat to each other by selecting {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu and checking Student to Student Chat.

•	If the Student does not respond to the Chat Window, you can send an audible beep to each workstation by selecting {Chat}{Send Beep} from the Chat Window drop down menu.

Chat to a Client whilst Viewing

1.	Choose {Tools}{Chat} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	The Chat Window will appear on the Control and Client workstation.

To end Chat

1.	Choose {Close} from the Chat Window.

See also

Using Audio

Sending a Message to Students


Sending a Message to Students

With NetSupport, you can send a message to an individual Client, a Group of Clients or all Clients on the network.

To send a message

1.	Select the Client(s) you want to send a message to, in the List View.

2.	Right click and choose {Message}.

Or,

Choose {Client}{Message} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the Communicate icon on the Control toolbar and select Message.

Or,

If displayed, click the Message icon on the toolbar.

3.	The Message dialog box will appear. Choose whether to send the message to all Available Clients, All Connected Clients or only the Currently Selected Client. Enter the message and decide whether to show the message at the Clients PCs for a specified time.

4.	Click Send. The Message will be displayed in a dialog at the Client screens and will remain until the User closes the dialog or the specified time limit expires.

Send a message whilst Viewing

1.	Choose {Client}{Message} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	The Send Message dialog box will appear.

3.	Enter your message.

4.	Click Send.

5.	The message will be displayed on the Student screen currently being viewed by the Tutor and will remain until the Student clicks OK.

See also

Chatting to Students

Using Audio


Raising a Help Request

NetSupport allows a Student to Request Help from a Control. They do this either by selecting the request Help Command from the Student menu (assuming that it has not been configured for quiet mode, which hides the Student icon) or by pressing the Hotkeys set in the Student Configurator.

To raise a Help Request

1.	Press the Hotkeys, usually ALT+LSHIFT+RSHIFT.

2.	This opens a dialog box into which they type their name and the message.

3.	Click OK.

4.	The Help Request will then be sent to the connected Control.

See also

Dealing with Help Requests

Chatting to Students


Dealing with Help Requests

If a Student raises a Help Request an alert will be raised at the Tutor provided it currently has that Student connected. Any outstanding Help Requests will be visible to the Tutor with a Help Request icon displayed next to the Student icon. This will show until that Help Request has been cleared.

To display current Help Requests

1.	Choose {School}{Help Requests} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

2.	The Help Request Window will open and list the Requests. If there are any Help Requests pending since the last time the Control connected to the Client, the Help Request Window will be open as the Control initialises.

3.	By clicking on the View Client or Chat toolbar buttons, you can reply to the Clients Help Request.

See also

Chatting to Students

Sending a Message to Students


Transferring Files

NetSupport includes sophisticated File Transfer functionality that enables you to transfer files to and from a Control and Client workstation.

Note: File Transfer functionality can be configured by choosing {View}{Current Settings – File Transfer} from the Control Window drop down menu.

See

To copy files and Directories from a Client to a Control

To copy files and Directories from a Control to a Client

To transfer files between Clients

The File Transfer Window


Distributing Files

As well as enabling you to Transfer Files to and from individual Clients, NetSupport also allows you to Distribute Files to multiple Clients simultaneously.

You can Distribute Files to:

•	All connected Clients;

•	Selected Clients;

•	A pre-defined Group of Clients.

See

The File Distribution Window

To Distribute Files to an Ad Hoc Group of Clients

To Distribute Files to a defined Group of Clients


Sending and Collecting Work

The Send/Collect work feature enables you to send a document or a number of documents to individual or multiple Client workstations. You can then collect Students’ responses on your workstation.

See

To Send work files

To Collect work files

To change the Properties of an Operation


Remotely Executing applications at Students

This feature allows you to launch (execute) an application on an individual Client workstation or a Group of Client workstation’s without the need to remote control them. For example after Showing Students how to use a Word Processor you might kick start the application on their workstations. For future use, applications can be displayed on the Quick Execute toolbar.

Note: The application itself must be installed on or available to the Client workstations.

To Execute an application on a Client workstation

1.	Select the required Client.

2.	Choose {Client}{Execute at Client} from the Control Window drop down menu.

3.	The Execute Application dialog will appear.

4.	Select the Execute Tab.

5.	Enter the name and path of the application to execute at the Client.

Or,

Click on Local Browse button and select an executable application on the Control workstation.

Notes:

•	Check that Client applications are stored in the same location as the Control to ensure successful execution.

•	If you want to launch a specific file with the application, you must separate the two instructions with quotes. For example, "C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Excel.exe" "C:\My Documents\Accounts.xls".

6.	Click on the Add to List button, to save it for future use in the Saved List Tab.

7.	Confirm the description and path.

8.	Click OK.

9.	Click Execute.

The application will now be launched at all selected Clients and the result of the operation displayed in the Results Box.

Note:	Before clicking Execute you have the option to tick the "No Result Required" box. This option will give you the ability to close the dialog without having to wait for the results.

Execute an application on a Client workstation whilst Viewing

1.	Choose {Client}{Execute at Client} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	The Execute at Client dialog will appear.

3.	Enter the name an path of the application to execute at the Client.

4.	Click Execute.

The application will now be launched at all selected Clients and the result of the operation displayed in the Results Box.

See also

To Execute an application on a Group of Clients

To Save the details of your executed application for future use

To edit a saved Executable application

To remove a saved Executable application


Lock/Unlock Students Mouse and Keyboard

When you perform a Show, the Clients mouse and keyboard are automatically locked. There may, however, be other occasions when you want to lock a Clients keyboard and mouse. You can only Lock/Unlock Clients that are connected.

The keyboard and mouse can be configured to lock separately if required.

To Lock Clients

1.	Select the Client(s) or Groups of Clients you wish to Lock.

2.	From the Control Window drop down menu, choose {Client}{Lock Keyboard/Mouse}.

Or,

From the Toolbar, choose Lock.

Or,

Right-click on selected Client icons and choose Lock.

3.	By default a graphic will appear on the Client workstation, informing them that you have locked their mouse and keyboard.

Note:	Alternatively, you have the option to blank the Clients screen or freeze the screen contents and display a flashing message "This machine has been locked by the control user".

To Unlock Clients

1.	From the Control Window drop down menu, choose {Client}{Unlock Keyboard/Mouse}.

Or,

From the Toolbar, choose Unlock.

Or,

Right Click on selected Client icons and select Unlock.

See also

To blank a Clients screen when locked

To display a graphic when locking a Client workstation

To freeze a Clients screen when locked


Working with Groups

NetSupport provides you with sophisticated grouping functions to enable you to manage and organise different groups of Clients. You can use the following functions on groups as a whole:

•	Show

•	File Distribution

•	Scan

•	Execute

•	Message

•	Lock/Unlock

•	Multimedia support

•	Send/Collect Work

•	Chat

To create a Group

1.	Choose {Group}{New} from the Control drop down menu.

Or,

Click the new Group icon on the Group bar.

Or,

Right-click on selected Client icons and choose Add to Group and select New.

2.	A Group Wizard dialog box appears that asks you to provide a name and brief description of the group. It will then assist you in creating your group.

Your newly created Group will appear as a tab on the Group Bar for quick access.

To change the members of a Group

1.	Choose {Group}{Properties} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Select the Properties icon from the Group bar.

Or,

Click on the Properties icon in the Control Window.

2.	Choose the Members Tab and simply select the Client to be removed or added.

3.	Click OK, when you are happy with the members of the Group.

Or,

Right-click on selected Client icons and choose Remove from Group.

See also

Assigning a Group Leader


Working with Classroom Layouts

Once you have selected a classroom or group, you can rearrange the individual Client icons in the Control List View to reflect the layout of the classroom. A background image can also be added to further customise the Control View.

Layouts can be saved and included in customised Tutor Profiles.

To arrange icons

1.	Select the Client icon and drag it to the desired position.

2.	Choose {Layout}{Save Layout As} from the Control Window drop down menu.

3.	The Save Layout dialog will be displayed.

4.	Specify a file name.

5.	Click Save.

To Load a previously saved Layout

1.	Choose {Layout}{Load Layout} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Choose the preferred layout and click Open.

See also

Setting backgrounds


NetSupport Video Player

NetSupport provides exceptional multimedia support with full Audio, Video and remote control capabilities. This section deals specifically with the use of the Video Player. Please see Audio Support and Showing for more details.

While the Video Player can be used to run a video file on the local workstation, NetSupport’s remote control capabilities combined with full Audio Support enable you to use this tool to enhance training sessions and demonstrations across multiple PCs simultaneously.

All standard video files, for example avi and mpg, are supported. The Video Player runs locally on each Client workstation and the video file can be accessed locally or from a network drive. If video files are stored locally the impact on the network is minimised as only the data to control the player, eg start, stop, pause and synchronisation packets, are sent. If each Client machine retrieves the video file from a network drive you will place additional demands on the network.

For optimum performance, store the video files locally on each workstation, you may wish to use File Distribution to do this.

Other influencing factors will be:

•	The number of Client workstations accessing the file;

•	The speed of the network eg: 10/100 MB;

•	The size of the video file;

•	Client workstation memory/performance specification;

•	Other traffic on the network.

Notes:

•	If a Client workstation is required to retrieve files from a Server, for smooth operation, ensure that the Client workstation has sufficient access rights to the relevant drive and files.

•	The video adapter of the workstation and how the screen resolution is configured will affect the quality of the display.

See

To play a Video file on a workstation

Video Player Control Panel


Video Player Control Panel

The Video Player Control Panel operates in a similar manner to all audio and visual aids. Although the commands on the toolbar perform the same actions as would be expected please find a detailed explanation below.

File Menu - The File drop down menu contains the following options:

Open

Allows you to select and load the appropriate video file.

Close

Closes the open video file.

Exit

Shuts down the Video Player.

View Menu - The View drop down menu contains the following options:

Text Labels

Hides and displays text labels on the Video Player toolbar.

Toolbar

Hides and displays the Video Player toolbar.

Status Bar

Hides and displays the Status Bar of the Video Player.

Zoom

Resizes the video screen

Play Menu - The Play drop down menu contains the following options:

Play

Starts the loaded video file.

Stop

Returns to the beginning of the loaded video file.

Pause

Blanks the Clients video screen and pauses the video file at the Control workstation.

Start

Returns to the beginning of the video file.

End

Fast-forwards to the end of the video file.

Mute Clients

If students are not using headphones while they are watching a video, the sound coming from each workstation can be distracting. This option turns audio off at the Client workstations but leaves it on at the Tutor machine.

Help Menu – Provides access to the on-line Help and general Version information.

See also

To play a Video file on a workstation

Playing Videos via Explorer


Scanning multiple Client screens

Multiple Client screens can be scanned simultaneously in one Scan Window.

To Scan multiple screens simultaneously

1.	Choose {Group}{Scan} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Select the Scan button from the Control Toolbar.

2.	The Scan dialog will appear.

3.	Specify which Clients to Scan by removing or including the check mark next to the Client name.

4.	Select Display multiple Clients at a time.

5.	Select number of Client screens to be displayed in the Scan Window.

6.	If scanning more than four Client screens, select a Scan interval.

7.	Click Scan.

8.	The Scan Window will appear.

Note:	If Scanning more Client screens than the number of screens displayed in the Scan Window, by using the Next, Auto and Previous buttons you are able to switch between multiple Scan Windows.

To End the Scan

1.	Choose {Scan}{Close} from the Scan Window drop down menu.

See also

Viewing multiple Students simultaneously


Remote Clipboard

During a View Session you can copy the content of the clipboard between Control and Client PCs.

The Clipboard icon, available on the View Window Toolbar, provides the following options:

Send Clipboard

Used when copying from the Control to a Client and using the {edit}{cut/copy} menu option.

Retrieve Clipboard

Used when copying from the Client to the Control and using the {edit}{cut/copy} menu option..

Auto

When enabled, provides the quickest method for copying data. Use the short cut keys (Ctrl-C & Ctrl-V) to automatically copy to and from the clipboard at both the Control and Client machines.

Sending the content of the clipboard from a Control to a Client workstation

1.	View the required Client.

2.	Open appropriate applications on the Client and Control workstations.

3.	Select and copy the required data from the application at the Control.

If Auto is enabled using Ctrl-C copies the data directly to the clipboard.

or

If you have used {Edit}{Cut/Copy}, return to the Clients view window and click the Clipboard icon on the View Window toolbar and choose Send Clipboard.

4.	To paste the data at the Client application, choose {Edit} from the Client application drop down menu, select Paste.

or

Use the short cut keys (Ctrl-V) to paste the data.

Sending the content of the clipboard from a Client to a Control workstation

1.	View the required Client.

2.	Open appropriate applications on the Client and Control workstations.

3.	Copy the required data from the application at the Client as above but if using menu options rather than the shortcut keys, choose Clipboard – Retrieve Clipboard from the toolbar.

4.	Return to the Control application and paste the data using the appropriate menu options or the short cut keys (Ctrl-V).

See also

Viewing a Student screen


Sending Ctrl+Alt+Delete

You can send Ctrl+Alt+Delete to a workstation that you are Viewing.

To send Ctrl+Alt+Del to a Client you are Viewing

1.	Press the Ctrl+Alt+Esc keys simultaneously.

Or,

1.	Choose {Client}{Send Ctrl+Alt+Delete} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	Click Yes, to confirm Send Ctrl+Alt+Delete.

See also

Rebooting or Logging out Students


The Known List of Clients

The Known List of Clients is a list of available Clients that have been found on the Network. These details are stored in the Client.NSS file. The list can be updated in the Modify Known List dialog.

To add Available Clients to the Known List

1.	Choose {School}{Modify Known List} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Modify Known List dialog will appear.

3.	Enter a prefix for the Clients Computer Name in the text box beside the Browse button.

4.	Click Browse.

5.	The Browsing message will appear.

6.	All Clients matching the prefix will appear in the Available Students list.

7.	Select the Client icon and click Add.

8.	The Client is now part of the Known List.

9.	Click Done.

10.	The Control will re-connect to the Known Clients and display their icons in the Control Window.

To remove Clients from the Known List

1.	Choose {School}{Modify Known List} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Modify Known List dialog will appear.

3.	Select the Client icon from the Known List.

4.	Click Remove.

5.	The Client is now Available but is not part of the Known list.

6.	Click Done.

7.	The Client icon will be removed from the Control Window.

Note: In order to connect to a removed Client, you must Browse for them and add them to the Known List.


Rebooting or Logging out Students

Having connected to a Client or Group of Clients you are able to remotely Logout or Reboot the Client workstations at the end of a session. This is a simple way to prepare multiple workstations for the next group of Students.

To Reboot or Logout a Client

1.	Select a Client or Group of Clients.

2.	Choose {Client}{Reboot or Logout} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Manage icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Reboot or Logout.

or

If displayed, click the Reboot or Logout icon on the toolbar.

3.	A message will appear, confirming the Client(s) included in the Reboot/Logout.

4.	Click Yes to continue.

To Reboot or Logout a Client whilst Viewing

1.	Choose {Client}{Reboot or Logout} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	A message will appear, confirming the Client included in the Reboot/Logout.

3.	Click Yes to continue.

See also

Sending Ctrl+Alt+Delete

Power Management


Power Management

Power consumption equates largely with heat generation, which is a primary enemy in achieving increased performance. Newer processors are larger and faster, and keeping them cool can be a major concern. With millions of workstations in use, and sometimes hundreds located in the same company, the desire to conserve energy has grown from a non-issue to a real issue in the last five years.

Power Management is a technique that enables hardware and software to minimise system power consumption. It works by shutting down portions of the hardware during periods of low or no use, meaning that the workstation is ready to work when you are and conserve energy when you are not.

NetSupport Power Management can be used on Windows 95/98/2000/ME/XP and NT 4.0. see below for special considerations on Windows NT 4.0.

See

Client Power On

Client Power Off

Rebooting or Logging out Students


To Browse and connect to Clients

1.	Select {School}{Configuration} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select Startup.

3.	Click in the "Browse and Connect to Students starting with" box.

4.	Enter the first few characters of the Client names that you want to connect to. For example, entering Class1 would connect to all workstations whose Client name started with Class1. eg Class1_Wk1, Class1_Wk2 etc.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click Yes to re-initialise the Control Configurator.

7.	The Control will connect to all Clients found and display their icons in the Control Window. These Clients have now been added to the Known Client list.

Notes

•	If a workstation was not available at the time the Control initialised, you can subsequently connect to it by double clicking the "Refresh List" icon in the List View. This will re-search the network and connect any additional Clients meeting the criteria.

•	It is essential that you have a logical naming convention for the Client workstations. If you need to change the names of any Client workstations see Configuring the Client .

•	If required, a message can be displayed at the Client workstation when a connection is made. See Student Configuration Tab .

See also

The Known List

To connect to the Known list of Clients

Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing

Viewing a Student screen


To connect to the Known list of Clients

1.	Select {School}{Configuration} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select Startup.

3.	Click in the "Connect to known list of Students" box.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click Yes to re-initialise the Control Configurator.

6.	The Control will connect to all Clients found and display their icons in the Control Window. These Clients have now been added to the Known Client list.

See also

To Browse and connect to Clients

Configuring the Student  workstation

Configuring the Tutor  workstation

Viewing a Student screen


To display the Login name of Students

When registering Student details, rather than prompt them for their actual name you can default to their Login name.

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Check ‘Retrieve Student Login Name when gathering a Student Register’.

3.	Click Ok.

See also

Register Student Details

To save Students Login Name


To Save Students Login Name

Enable this option to permanently store the Students Login name.

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Check Remember Student User/ Login names.

3.	Click OK.

See also

To display the Login name of Students

Register Student details


To End the Show

To End the Show

1.	Click on the NetSupport button or double click the Show Icon on the taskbar.

2.	This will display the Showing dialog.

3.	Click End.

Or,

1.	Right click on the NetSupport icon on the taskbar.

2.	Click End Show.

To End a Show while Suspended

1.	Choose {Client}{End Show} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Clients will now see their own display.

See also

Showing to Students

To enable the Control to Continue working in the background while Showing

To Resume a Show while Suspended


To enable the Control to Continue working in the background while Showing

1.	Click on the NetSupport button on the taskbar.

2.	The Showing dialog will be displayed.

3.	Click Continue.

4.	The Control Window will be displayed and the Title Bar will indicate that the Show is Suspended. You can now continue to use the Control workstation without the Clients seeing what you are doing. The Client screens will still display the previous Show.

See also

Showing to Students

To End the Show

To Resume a Show while Suspended


To Resume a Show while Suspended

1.	Click Resume on the Control Window Toolbar.

Or,

1.	Choose {Client}{Resume} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Clients will now see the application currently displayed at the Control.

3.	The Showing dialog will be displayed on the Control screen from which you can choose to End, Resume or Continue the Show.

See also

Showing to Students

To End the Show

To enable the Control to Continue working in the background while Showing


To copy files and Directories from a Control to a Client

1.	Select the required Client in the List View.

2.	Click the File Transfer icon on the toolbar and choose File Transfer.

or,

Choose {Client}{File Transfer} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or,

Right-click on the selected Client icons and choose File Transfer.

or,

If you are Viewing the Client, select the File Transfer icon on the View Window Toolbar.

3.	The File Transfer Window to that Client will open.

4.	From the Client Tree View, select the destination drive or directory into which the items will be copied.

5.	From the Control List select the item(s) to be copied to the Client

6.	Click on the toolbar Copy File button

7.	A confirmation dialog will be displayed, click Yes.

Note:	The required item(s) can also be ‘dragged’ from the Control View and ‘dropped’ into the appropriate directory in the Client View.

See also

To copy files and Directories from a Client to a Control

To transfer files between Clients


To copy files and Directories from a Client to a Control

1.	Select the required Client in the List View.

2.	Click the File Transfer icon on the toolbar and choose File Transfer.

or,

Choose {Client}{File Transfer} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or,

Right-click on the selected Client icons and choose File Transfer.

or,

If you are Viewing the Client, select the File Transfer icon on the View Window Toolbar.

3.	The File Transfer Window to that Client will open.

4.	From the Control Tree View, select the destination drive or directory into which the items will be copied.

5.	From the Client List View, select the item(s) to be copied to the Control.

6.	Click on the toolbar Copy File button.

7.	A confirmation dialog will be displayed, click Yes.

Note:	The required item(s) can also be ‘dragged’ from the Client View and ‘dropped’ into the appropriate directory in the Control View.

See also

To copy files and Directories from a Control to a Client

To transfer files between Clients


To transfer files between Clients

With NetSupport’s File Transfer it is also possible to copy files and directories between two Clients. To do this, connect to each Client and display the File Transfer Window for each.

Arrange the File Transfer Windows so you can see both and simply drag file/directories from one Client to the other.

You can see more of a Clients files and directories by moving the horizontal sizing bar or clicking on the maximise button located above the Clients directory tree.

See also

To copy files and Directories from a Client to a Control

To copy files and Directories from a Control to a Client


To Distribute Files to a defined Group of Clients

1.	Select the appropriate Tab from the Group Bar in the Control Window.

2.	Click the File Transfer icon drop down arrow on the toolbar, selecting File Distribution from the list of features.

or,

If displayed, select the File Distribution icon on the Toolbar.

3.	The File Distribution Window will appear.

4.	From the Local Pane Tree View, select the item(s) to be copied to the Clients.

5.	The location on the Client workstations where the files/directories are copied to is called the Destination Directory. Unless otherwise specified, the Client Destination Directory will be the same as the item(s) location on the Control workstation. If the Client does not have the same Directory available, the item(s) will be copied to the C Drive by default and the folders automatically created.

or,

To set a specific Destination Directory on the Client workstation, right click on the Client icon in the Remote Pane and choose Set Destination. Specify a destination, click OK.

6.	Click Copy.

See also

To Distribute Files to an Ad Hoc Group of Clients


To Distribute Files to an Ad Hoc Group of Clients

1.	Click the File Transfer icon drop down arrow on the toolbar, selecting File Distribution from the list of features.

or,

If displayed, select the File Distribution icon on the Toolbar.

2.	The File Distribution Window will appear.

3.	In the Remote Pane indicate which Clients you wish to copy files to by checking the tick box beside the Client name.

4.	From the Local Pane Tree View, select the item(s) to be copied to the Clients.

5.	The location on the Client workstations where the files/directories are copied to is called the Destination Directory. Unless otherwise specified, the Client Destination Directory will be the same as the item(s) location on the Control workstation. If the Client does not have the same Directory available, the item(s) will be copied to the C Drive by default and the folders automatically created.

Or,

To set a specific Destination Directory on the Client workstation, right click on the Client icon in the Remote Pane and choose Set Destination. Specify a destination, click OK.

6.	Click Copy.

See also

To Distribute Files to a defined Group of Clients


Send work files

Two methods are available for sending pre-prepared work files to Student workstations:

•	Quick Send is useful for one-off operations where you want to send work to all  connected Students or a defined group of Students.

•	Advanced Send enables you to store the properties of an operation that will be performed regularly and provides greater flexibility as to which Students the work is sent to.

To Send Work Using Quick Send

1.	Decide which Students to send work to, All or a defined Group. You cannot select individual Students using Quick Send.

2.	Choose {School}{Send/Collect Work – Quick Send} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Send/Collect icon on the Control toolbar and choose Send Work.

3.	The Quick Send dialog will appear.

4.	List the file(s) to send to the Students. Files should include a full path and optionally a wildcard specification. You can include multiple specifications by separating them with ‘;’

Or,

Click on the Browse button to locate the file(s).

5.	Specify the folder at the Student workstation to copy the files to. A new folder will be created if necessary.

6.	Click Send.

7.	The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been sent successfully.

To Send Work Using Advanced Send

1.	Decide which Students to send work to, All or a defined Group. You will have the opportunity to exclude Students if required.

2.	Choose {School}{Send/Collect Work - Advanced} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

Or,

Click the Send/Collect icon on the Control toolbar and select Send/Collect.

3.	The Send/Collect Work wizard will open.

4.	Select an operation from the list and click Send Work. The Select Students dialog will appear.

Or,

Add a new operation by clicking New and completing the wizard.

See also

To Collect work files

To change the Properties of an Operation


Collect work files

Two methods are available for retrieving completed work files from Student workstations:

The Quick Collect option remembers the last file(s) sent via Quick Send and provides a quick and easy method for retrieving the work back at the end of a session.

Advanced Collect lets you select the file(s) to retrieve from a list of pre-defined Send/Collect operations and provides greater flexibility as to which Students the work is collected from.

To Collect Work Using Quick Collect

1.	Choose {School}{Send/Collect Work – Quick Collect} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Send/Collect icon on the Control toolbar and select Collect Work.

or

If displayed, click the Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar.

2.	The Quick Collect dialog will appear.

3.	Specify the name of the file(s) to collect. eg *.* or Test1.TXT;Test2.TXT

4.	Specify the folder that the file(s) are stored in, eg: C:\TEMP, and whether you want to remove the file from the Student workstation after it has been collected.

5.	Specify the folder on the Control workstation to collect the file(s) in, eg: C:\ TEMP

6.	Click Collect.

7.	The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been collected successfully.

To Collect Work Using Advanced Collect

1.	Choose {School}{Send/Collect Work - Advanced} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

or,

Click the Send/Collect icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Send/Collect.

2.	The Send/Collect Work wizard will open.

3.	Select the required operation from the list and click Collect Work.

4.	The Select Students dialog will appear. Select the Students that you want to retrieve the file(s) from.

5.	Click OK.

6.	The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been collected successfully.

See also

To Send work files

To change the Properties of an Operation


To change the Properties of an Operation

Manage the properties (the description, file location etc.) of a send/collect work operation in one dialog.

To change the Properties of an Operation

1.	Choose {School}{Send/Collect Work - Advanced} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

or,

Click the Send/Collect icon on the Control toolbar and choose Send/Collect.

2.	The Send/Collect Work wizard will open.

3.	Select an operation from the list and click Properties.

4.	The Properties dialog will appear.

5.	Adjust as necessary.

See also

To Send work files

To Collect work files


To Execute an application on a Group of Clients

1.	Select the required Group Tab.

2.	Choose {Group}{Execute} from the Control Window drop down menu bar.

3.	The Execute Application dialog will appear.

4.	Enter the name and path of the application to execute at the Client.

Or,

Click on Local Browse button and select an executable application on the Control workstation.

Note: Check that Client applications are stored in the same location as the Control to ensure successful execution.

5.	Click on the Add to List button, to save it for future use in the Saved List Tab.

6.	Confirm the description and path.

7.	Click OK.

Note: If you only want to execute applications to Clients that are logged on select the option  "Execute Only if the Client is Logged on".

8.	Click Execute.

The application will now be launched at all selected Clients in the Group and the result of the operation displayed in the Results Box.

Note:	Before clicking Execute you have the option to tick the "No Result Required" box. This option will give you the ability to close the dialog without have to wait for the results.

See also

Remotely Executing applications at Students

To Save the details of your executed application for future use

To edit a saved Executable application

To remove a saved Executable application


To Save the details of your executed application for future use

1.	Open the Execute Application dialog box.

2.	Select the Execute Tab.

3.	Enter the name and path of the executable application.

Or,

Click on Local Browse button and select an executable application on the Control workstation.

Note: Check that Client applications are stored in the same location as the Control to ensure successful execution.

4.	Click Add to List button.

5.	The Add/Edit Program details dialog will appear.

6.	Confirm the description and path of the executable application.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Select the Saved List Tab.

9.	Check the Show Toolbar box to execute from the Control Window toolbar.

10.	Click Close.

A short cut button for easy launching of an application will appear on the Quick Execute toolbar.

See also

Remotely Executing applications at Students

To Execute an application on a Group of Clients

To edit a saved Executable application

To remove a saved Executable application


To edit a saved Executable application

To edit a saved Executable application

1.	Open the Execute Application dialog.

2.	Select the Saved List Tab.

3.	Select the Application to edit.

4.	Click Edit.

5.	The Add/Edit Program details dialog will appear.

6.	When finished, click OK.

7.	Click Close

See also

Remotely Executing applications at Students

To Execute an application on a Group of Clients

To Save the details of your executed application for future use

To remove a saved Executable application


To remove a saved Executable application

1.	Open the Execute Application dialog.

2.	Select the Saved List Tab.

3.	Select the Application to remove.

4.	Click Remove.

5.	A confirmation dialog is displayed, click Yes.

6.	Click Close.

See also

Remotely Executing applications at Students

To Execute an application on a Group of Clients

To Save the details of your executed application for future use

To remove a saved Executable application


To blank a Clients screen when locked

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Check Blank screen when Locking mouse and keyboard.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Select the Client(s) or Groups of Clients you wish to Lock.

5.	From the Control Window drop down menu, choose {Client}{Lock Keyboard/Mouse}.

Or,

From the Toolbar, press the Lock icon.

Note:  If you View a locked Client, this blank Client screen setting will no longer apply. To blank a Client screen when Viewing, choose {Client}{Blank screen} from the View Window drop down menu.

See also

Lock/Unlock Students Mouse and Keyboard

To display a graphic when locking a Client workstation


To play a Video file on a workstation

1.	Choose {Client}{Show Video} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Right-click on a Client icon in the List View and choose Show Video.

Or,

Click the ‘Show Menu’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Video.

2.	The Show Video dialog will appear. This is used to select the Clients to show to and the video file to be shown. You can show to a selected Client or multiple Client workstations. To show to multiple Clients, click ‘These Clients’. You can exclude Clients by clicking next to the Client name. In the Video File field enter the location and name of the required video, you can select Open to browse for the file.

3.	Click Show.

4.	A check will be made to ensure that the video file is available at the Client workstations. If not, you can choose to abort the Show or to continue showing to the Clients that do have access to the file.

Note:	You can use NetSupport’s File Distribution feature to remotely copy missing files to Client workstations.

5.	When the video file is launched, the Video Player Control Panel appears. Standard operations are available, Play, Stop, Pause etc.

Note:	While the video is running, the Client workstations are locked.

See also

NetSupport Video Player

Playing Videos via Explorer

Video Player Control Panel


Client Power On

To Power on a NetSupport Client the workstation must have a Wake-on-LAN network adapter and a BIOS that will support it (consult your network adapter documentation for more information), the Client must also be Known to the Control. The Control sends a Wake-on-LAN packet to the Client network adapter which instructs the workstation to Power On.

To Power On a NetSupport Client

1.	Select the icon(s) of the Clients you wish to Power On.

2.	Choose {Client}{Power Management – Power On} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the Manage icon on the Control toolbar and choose Power On.

3.	The Client workstations will now Power On.

Note:	If the Client workstations are ‘Known’, the machines can be Powered On at the start of a session by choosing {Start}{Programs}{NetSupport School}{NetSupport School Power On Machines}.

See also

Client Power Off

Power Management

Rebooting or Logging out Students


Client Power Off

NetSupport uses the Advanced Power Management (APM) features of the Windows operating system (where supported), to provide Client power down capabilities. APM relies on the Client workstation having an ATX motherboard and ATX power supply.

A Control can remotely Power Off a Client workstation using the NetSupport Power Management function.

To Power Off a NetSupport Client

1.	Ensure all open applications at the Client workstations are closed.

2.	Select the icon(s) of the Clients you wish to Power Off.

3.	Choose {Client}{Power Management – Power Off} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Manage icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Power Off.

or

If displayed, click the Power Off icon on the toolbar.

4.	The Client workstations will now Power Off.

Special Considerations on Windows NT 4.0.

The Windows NT 4.0 operating system does not by default provide APM support and it will be necessary to update the Windows NT 4.0 Hardware Abstraction layer (HAL.DLL) to provide this functionality. Microsoft provide an updated HAL which adds APM support for many systems, for details of how to obtain this please refer to the support area of the NetSupport web site or contact your computer manufacturer to establish if APM can be provided for your system on Windows NT 4.0.

See also

Client Power On

Power Management

Rebooting or Logging out Students


Setting a  background

As well as tailoring the position of Client icons in the Control List View to reflect the layout of the classroom you can choose alternative bitmaps to decorate the background and enhance the layout of the icons.

It is recommended that you select one of NetSupport’s default .BMP files but you can use a file that you have created.

To set a bitmap background

1.	Choose {Layout – Set Background) from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Select Background dialog will appear.

3.	Select the location of the image you wish to use. The default BMP files are stored in the NetSupport School program folder. A preview of the selected image is provided.

4.	Choose Picture Display to select the position of the image. If you select Tile you can also choose to centre the Client icons on the image.

5.	If required, select a Background Colour.

6.	Click OK to add the background to the Control Window.

7.	If you are adding the background to an existing Layout, choose {Layout – Save Layout} to update. To create a new Layout, select {Layout – Save Layout As}.

If you wish to clear the currently set background, choose {Layout – Clear Background}.

See also

Working with Classroom Layouts


Blanking the Clients screen while Viewing

For security reasons, you may require the Client screen to be blank while you are remotely controlling it.

1.	Choose {Client}{Blank screen} from the View Window drop down menu.

2.	The Clients screen will be blanked.

3.	To restore the screen, choose {Client}{Blank screen} from the View Window drop down  menu.

See also

Viewing a Student screen

View Modes

To stop Viewing a Client to increase performance


To stop Viewing a Client to increase performance

To stop Viewing a Client temporarily to increase performance in other areas, such as file transfer or Audio.

1.	Choose {Client}{Stop Viewing} from the Client drop down menu, in the View Window.

2.	To restore the View Window, click on Share, Watch or Control.

See also

Viewing a Student screen

Viewing multiple Students simultaneously

View Modes


Assigning a Group Leader

When working with defined Groups of Clients, the Control can assign ‘Group Leader’ status to a selected member of the Group. The designated Leader can then take control of the Group,  performing many of the tasks that the main Control can. The main Control retains overall responsibility while a Group Leader is in place, and can remove the status at any time.

You can choose the functions to be performed by the Group Leader by selecting {View}{Current Settings – Group Leaders Tab} from the Control Window drop down menu.

To Assign A Group Leader

1.	Select the required Group from the Group Bar.

2.	Select the required Client icon.

3.	Choose {Client}{Group Leader} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or,

Right click on the required Client and select Group Leader.

The Client icon in the Control Window will be highlighted to indicate that they are a Group Leader. The Client will receive a message indicating that they have been given Group Leader Status. They can choose to run the Group Leader Control immediately or at a later stage by clicking on the Group Leader Icon that will be created in their system tray.

Notes:

•	Although a Client may be in more than one group, they can only lead one group at a time.

•	Each defined Group can have a Group Leader even if one of the Group Members is already leading another Group.

•	The main Control can continue to monitor all Clients, including Group Leaders.

See also

Choose Group Leader Functions

Remove Group Leader Status

Suspend Group Leaders


Remove Group Leader Status

The main Control can remove Group Leader status from Clients at any time.

To Remove Group Leaders

1.	From the Control Window, select the Group containing the required Client.

2.	Right click on the Client icon and select Group Leader

or,

Choose {Client}{Group Leader} from the Control Window drop down menu.

The Client will receive a message informing them that Group Leader rights have been removed.


Show Leader

While the Control screen is being shown to the class, it may be appropriate for a Student to take over the demonstration. For this purpose, the Control can assign Show Leader status to a selected  Student.  The mouse and keyboard of the Show Leader’s PC are unlocked and they can continue the presentation on the Control’s behalf.

The Control can still interact simultaneously with the Show Leader and can suspend or end the session as required.

To create a Show Leader

1.	Start Showing to Students as normal.

2.	When you are ready to create a Show Leader, click on the NetSupport School button on the taskbar.

3.	This will display the Showing dialog and the Show will be suspended. Client screens will still display the Control screen.

4.	Click Show Leader.

5.	The Show Leader dialog will be displayed.

Note:	If the ‘Show icon on taskbar’ option has previously been selected, you can create a Show Leader by right clicking on the icon and choosing Show Leader.

6.	Click ‘This Client’ and select the Client to make Show Leader.

Note: The Show Leader will have full access to your desktop.

7.	Click OK.

8.	The message ‘You are leading the Show’ will appear at the selected Clients machine.

9.	Click Resume to restart the Show.

10.	The Show Leader and Control can now interact together in leading the Show.

See also

Showing to Students

To End the Show


Suspend Group Leaders

During a Control session where Group Leaders are in place, the Tutor may want to perform a task  without conflicting with something the Group Leaders are doing. Rather than remove and reinstate each Group Leader individually, you can globally suspend and reinstate Group Leader access as required.

To Suspend Group Leaders

1.	Choose {School}{Suspend Group Leaders} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	All Group Leaders will be suspended.

To Reinstate Group Leaders

1.	Choose {School}{Suspend Group Leaders} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	All Group Leaders will be reinstated.


Blank All Client Screens

An individual Client screen can be blanked while you are Viewing it. This option enables you to blank all Client screens simultaneously.

To Blank All Client Screens

1.	Choose {School}{Blank Screen} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Lock symbol will appear on each Client icon.

3.	To restore the screens, repeat the above process.

See also

Blanking the Clients screen while Viewing


Student Join Class

The traditional method for establishing a connection with Students is for the Tutor to browse the local network to find the required machines. However, there may be occasions when the required Students are not available or the Students themselves wish to connect to a particular remote control session.

This feature enables the Tutor to create a ‘class’ that the Students themselves can connect to.

Note:	Feature only supported over TCP/IP connections.

Creating a class for Students to join

1.	To change the default methods of connection choose {School}{Configuration – Startup} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select ‘Publish Class and allow Students to Join’.

3.	Enter a name and description for the class. (This is the name that will appear at the Student machine when they try to connect)

4.	Click OK.

5.	To apply the changes immediately, click Yes.

6.	The Class Wizard will appear. If required enter the properties of a lesson.

7.	Click Go.

8.	The ‘Join Class’ dialog will appear. This lists the Student names as they connect to the class.

9.	Click Done when all Students have connected. You can now conduct a remote control session with the connected Students.

Note:	If new Students want to join the class, select Refresh from the Control toolbar to display the ‘Join Class’ dialog. The Student machines will only find the class if this dialog is active.

To join a class

Student machines which have the NetSupport Client program installed can browse the network to find ‘classes’.

1.	At the Student machine, select the NetSupport Client icon from the taskbar.

2.	Choose {Commands}{Join a Class} from the Client drop down menu.

3.	The Join Class dialog will appear and immediately search the network for classes.

4.	Highlight the required Class and click Join.

5.	When the connection has been made close the dialog.

The name of the connected Student will appear at the Control.

See Also

Connecting to Students


Application Control Module

The Application Control Module is used to monitor and control the applications used by connected Students. A record of applications used in a session can be stored and, if required, the Tutor can restrict or approve the use of applications.

1.	Choose {View}{Application View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Application Control icon on the left hand side of the Control Window.

In ‘Applications’ Mode you can view details of Approved or Restricted Applications and use the available icons to:

•	Create a new Application List

•	Open an existing Application List

•	Revert back to unrestricted access if restrictions have been in place.

•	Activate the "Approved Applications" list. The Student will only be able to run applications that are in the approved list. All other applications are blocked.

•	Activate the "Restricted Applications" list. The Student will not be able to run applications that are in the restricted list but will be able to run all other applications.

The Application Control Module can be used to perform the following functions:

Identify applications currently running on the Student workstation

Close current/ running applications on a Student workstation

Change the current application running on a Student workstation

Launch an application on all connected Students

Setting up Approved or Restricted Applications

View Application History

Web Control Module


Web Control Module

The Web Control Module is used to monitor and control the websites visited by connected Students. A record of sites visited in a session can be stored and, if required, the Tutor can restrict or approve the use of specific URLs. In addition the Tutor can temporarily suspend all Internet access.

1.	Choose {View}{Web View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Web Control icon on the left hand side of the Control Window.

In ‘Web’ Mode you can view details of Approved or Restricted URLs and use the available icons to:

•	Create a New URL List.

•	Open an existing URL List.

•	Revert back to unrestricted access if restrictions have been in place.

•	Activate the "Approved Site List". The Student will only be able to view url’s that are in the approved list. All other url’s are blocked. When the Student accesses the Internet they are forced to choose an Approved Site rather than being able to surf at will.

•	Activate the "Restricted Site" List. The Student will not be able to view url’s that are in the restricted list but will be able to view all other url’s.

Note: To temporarily block all Internet usage, select {School}{Block all Internet} from the Control Window drop down menu or if displayed select the Block all Internet icon on the Control toolbar. An indicator will appear next to the Student icons to confirm Internet usage is suspended. This feature only works with IE based browsers.

The Web Control Module can be used to perform the following functions:

Identify URL's currently running on the Student workstation

Close the current/running URL on a Student workstation

Change the current URL running on a Student workstation

Launch a URL on all connected Students

Setting up an Approved or Restricted Web Site List

Application Control Module


Student Surveys

The Student Survey tool enables the Tutor to get instant feedback from Students during or at the end of a session. The Tutor sends connected Students a question together with a selection of pre-defined responses. Student responses are gathered at the Tutor with the results shown as an overall percentage and by individual Student.

Students can also be temporarily ‘grouped’ by response enabling you to see in an instant who selected the same answer. This could be useful if you felt a quick follow-up question or message to particular Students was required.

The basic procedure for sending a survey to Students is:

1.	Choose {View}{Survey View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Select the Student Survey icon from the left hand side of the Control Window.

2.	Select the Students to include in the survey. This can be all Students in the list view, selected Students or a defined group of Students.

3.	Enter a question in the box provided.

4.	Select the responses/answers to the question. These can either be chosen from the drop down list of defaults or you can enter your own options, using a comma to separate each one. Up to 6 choices can be entered.

5.	Send the survey to Students by choosing {Survey}{Send} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Send Survey icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane.

A dialog will open at the Student machines displaying the question and responses. Students choose the appropriate response and submit the answer.

6.	As Students submit their answers the Survey Results pane will display the percentage response for each option. The Client icon will also flag how the individual Student answered. By choosing {View}{Details} from the Control Window drop menu you can sort the Students by result. Alternatively, you can sort the Students into temporary groups by response. Choose {Survey}{Auto Group Students} from the Control Window drop down menu.

7.	When the survey is complete, remove it from the screen by choosing {Survey}{Cancel Survey} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Cancel Current Survey icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane.

Note:	The Survey will be cleared from all machines whether the Student has responded or not.

Print Survey Results

Before clearing the survey you can print a permanent record of the results.

1.	Choose {Survey}{Print Results} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Print Results icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane.

See Also:

Survey Lists


Playing Videos via Explorer

NetSupport also provides an option to run videos from outside the Tutor program. Simply navigate to the required video file in Explorer and launch it from the folder where it is stored.

1.	Navigate to the folder containing the video file.

2.	Right-click on the required video and select ‘Show with NetSupport School’ from the drop down list.

3.	The Tutor program will load, connect to the Known Clients and display the Show Video dialog.

4.	Confirm which Clients to include, the Video File will already be selected, and click Show.

See also

NetSupport Video Player

To play a Video file on a workstation


Screen Capture

Screen Capture enables the Tutor to take a snapshot of the current Student screen whilst Viewing or Scanning and allows the Tutor to save the current screen contents to a file. The Machine Name, Student Name, Date, Time and Product Name will also be recorded on the Screen Capture when saved.

Capture a Students screen whilst Viewing

1.	When Viewing a Student choose {Tools}{Capture Screen} to capture the current screen contents.

Or

Click on the "Capture" icon on the Toolbar.

2.	A "Save As" Dialog will appear.

3.	Type in a File Name.

4.	Choose one of the three different file formats, .BMP, .JPG, .PNG.

5.	Click Save.

Capture a Students screen whilst Scanning

1.	When Scanning Student screens choose {Client}{Capture Screen} to capture the current screen contents.

Or

Click on the "Capture" icon on the Toolbar.

Notes:

•	When Scanning Multiple Students, a Student screen must be active (highlighted) for the Screen Capture feature to become available.

•	When capturing in the Scan session (one Student at a time), Auto Scan is temporarily suspended until the Screen Capture operation is complete. Once complete, Auto Scan is re-enabled automatically and the Scan of the next Student continues.

2.	A "Save As" Dialog will appear.

3.	Type in a File Name.

4.	Choose one of the three different file formats, .BMP, .JPG, .PNG.

5.	Click Save.


To display a graphic when locking a Client workstation

A graphic can be displayed on a Students screen when the Tutor uses the Lock function. When a Client’s keyboard and mouse have been locked, a default image nss_lock_image_jpg appears on their screen.

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select "Display image when locking mouse and keyboard".

3.	Click OK.

4.	Select the Client(s) or Groups of Clients you wish to Lock.

5.	From the Control Window drop down menu, choose {Client}{Lock Keyboard/Mouse}.

Or,

From the Toolbar, press the Lock icon.

Note:

•	If you View a locked Client, the display graphic on a Client screen will no longer apply.

•	If an Image File cannot be located on the Client machine, a flashing message "This machine has been locked by the control user" will be displayed on the Client screen.

The image can be replaced if necessary by replacing the file or by using the Client Configurator to select an alternative file.

1.	In the Client Configurator choose {Advanced} Image Option.

2.	The Image File will display the default file.

3.	Click Browse to select an alternative file, then Open.

4.	The Image File will display the new file.

5.	Click OK.

Note:	If you would like to display an Image File that is not available on Client workstations, use the NetSupport Deploy function to Deploy a Configurator setting to all connected Client workstations.

See also

Lock/Unlock Students Mouse and Keyboard

To blank a Clients screen when locked


Tutor Profiles

NetSupport allows you to set up multiple Tutor Profiles for different Control Users, each with a pre-defined set of options. On starting the Tutor program, if multiple profiles have been created a dialog is displayed that allows the user to select which profile to use.

The main benefit of creating a profile is to be able to store ready-made lists of Approved / Restricted Applications and Web Sites rather than have the user create these at the start of each lesson.

Having created your Approved/Restricted Lists, as detailed in the Web Control and Application Control sections, the files can then be added to a Tutor Profile.

Note:	As well as Web Site and Application lists, other areas of the program that can be profiled are Layouts, Client Lists, Group Lists and the location for storing test results.

To Create a Tutor Profile

1.	Create the files, containing details of approved/restricted web sites, applications etc that are to be included in the profile.

2.	Choose {School}{Configuration}{Administration – Profile} from the Control Window drop down menu. The list of existing Tutor Profiles will appear, NetSupport School Pro is the default.

3.	To create a new profile, select Add. The Create New Configuration dialog will appear.

4.	Enter a name for the profile. Functionality for the profile can be ‘copied from’ an existing Tutor configuration, the default NetSupport School Pro or a user defined profile. Click OK. The name will be added to the profile list.

5.	To change the content of the profile, click Edit. The File Locations dialog will appear.

6.	In each category, select the file to be used in the profile. Click OK.

Each time the Tutor program is started, the user will be presented with a list of locally stored Profiles to choose from. Should you wish to share Profiles across a network the /R command line instruction can be used to launch the Tutor program with a centrally available Profile.

For example, from the NetSupport School program folder run the command; pcinssui /rN:\SampleProfile.cfg. If the profile, in this example SampleProfile.cfg, does not currently exist a default will be loaded enabling you to add your own values. Once you exit the Tutor program the Profile will be stored in the specified location.

See also

Create list of approved/restricted websites

Create list of approved/restricted applications

Create classroom layouts

Tutor Administration - Profiles


Using Replay Files

When a Tutor remote controls a Student workstation they can record the screen, keyboard and mouse activity taking place. In addition, if the PCs are configured for audio, any narration that takes place can also be recorded.

The information is stored in a file that can be replayed at the Tutor machine and, if required, shown to other Students.

The Replay facility can be configured to record at all or individual Student machines. Local activity at the Tutor machine can also be recorded.

Once enabled, activity is recorded as soon as a View session is opened. Recording stops when the View session is closed, at which point the stored Replay File becomes available for playback.

A Show session can also be recorded enabling Clients to playback the demonstration at their convenience.

Note:	Replay Files store screen images and can therefore become very large. Good housekeeping plays a vital role in maintaining files of this nature. It is recommended that old files are deleted on a regular basis.

See also:

Record Replay Files For All Students

Record Replay Files for Individual Students

Record Replay Files at the Tutor Machine

Watching Replay Files

Showing Replay Files to Students


Watching Replay Files

Stored Replay Files can be watched by Tutors and, if required, shown to Students..

At a local level, the NetSupport Client program also provides a Replay option enabling Clients to launch files.

At the Control

1.	Choose {School}{Replay} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the Replay icon on the toolbar.

2.	Navigate to the Directory where the required Student or Tutor Replay File is stored. Select the file and click Open.

3.	The Replay Window will open and start playing the file.

4.	Choose {File}{Close} from the drop down menu to close the window.

At the Client

1.	Right-click on the NetSupport Client icon in the system tray and choose Replay.

or

Double-click on the Client Icon and choose {Commands}{Replay} from the drop down menu.

2.	Navigate to the Directory where the Replay Files are stored.

3.	Select the file to replay.

4.	Click Open. The Replay Window will appear. Use the Replay Controls to Start/Stop the file.

See also

Showing Replay Files to Students

Using Replay Files

Replay Window - Control Panel


Showing Replay Files to Students

Using NetSupport’s Show feature, a Tutor can show a stored Replay File to any number of connected Students.

1.	Click the ‘Show Menu’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Replay.

or

Choose {Client}{Show Replay} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Show Replay dialog will appear.

3.	Browse for and select the required Replay File.

4.	From the Client list, select the Students to show the Replay File to.

5.	Set additional Show Options if required.

6.	Click Show.

7.	The Replay Window will open at the Tutor machine and start playing the Replay File to the selected Students.

8.	Click End on the Replay Window toolbar to end the show.

See also

Using Replay Files

Watching Replay Files


Record Replay Files at the Tutor

Activity at the local machine can be recorded and shown to Students.

1.	Choose {School}{Record} from the Control Window drop down menu. The Record Local Activity dialog will appear.

2.	Include Audio.

In addition to the screen, mouse and keyboard activity, if the workstation is configured for Audio, you can record any narration that takes place. Check this box to enable.

3.	Record Physical Fonts.

In order to reduce the volume of data being sent when sharing information of this nature, NetSupport passes the font information by reference. The target workstation will refer to it’s own internal font mappings to find an appropriate match to the one that has been sent. In most cases the same fonts will be available but if there are instances where this isn’t the case you can send the full information. Check this box to enable.

4.	In Directory

Specify where you want the Replay Files stored. In order to identify each file, filenames will be prefixed with ‘Local’ and the date and time of the recording.

5.	Click OK to start recording. The Recording icon will appear in the task bar.

6.	To stop recording, double click the Recording icon.

See also:

Watching Replay Files

Showing Replay Files to Students

Record Replay Files For All Students

Record Replay Files for Individual Students


Record Replay Files For All Students

This procedure enables the Tutor to create a Replay File at any Student workstation that it remote controls.

1.	Choose {View}{Current Settings-Replay Files} from the Control Window drop down menu. The Replay Files dialog will appear.

2.	Enable the Record Replay Files check box. A Replay File will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at any Student machine.

3.	Include Audio

In addition to the screen, mouse and keyboard activity, if the workstation is configured for Audio, you can record any narration that takes place. Check this box to enable.

4.	Prefix Files With Client Name

In order to identify each Replay File, filenames are prefixed with the Client Name and the date/time of the recording. Alternatively, by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001.rpf etc.

5.	In Directory

Specify where the Replay Files are to be stored.

6.	Click OK.

See also

Record Replay Files for Individual Students

Watching Replay Files

Showing Replay Files to Students

Record Replay Files at the Tutor Machine


Record Replay Files for Individual Students

This procedure enables Replay Files to be created at selected Student workstations.

1.	View the required Student machine.

2.	Choose {View}{Settings for Client-Replay Files} from the View Window drop down menu. The Replay Files dialog will appear.

3.	Enable the Record Replay Files check box. A Replay File will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at this Student machine.

4.	Include Audio

In addition to the screen, mouse and keyboard activity, if the workstation is configured for Audio, you can record any narration that takes place. Check this box to enable.

5.	Prefix Files With Client Name

In order to identify each Replay File, filenames are prefixed with the Client Name and the date/time of the recording. Alternatively, by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001.rpf etc.

6.	In Directory

Specify where the Replay Files are to be stored. A separate folder can be specified for each Student.

7.	Click OK. Recording will start immediately, close the View session to stop recording.

8.	Repeat steps 1-7 for any other Student machines.

See also

Record Replay Files For All Students

Record Replay Files at the Tutor Machine

Watching Replay Files

Showing Replay Files to Students


What is NetSupport School?

NetSupport School is a powerful training tool based on the award winning NetSupport Manager Remote Control package.

It benefits Tutors who use a computer network to train Students in the use of Computer Applications and other packages. It allows them to display the screen of their workstation on the screens of their Student's workstations without the need for expensive video splitters and additional cabling.

NetSupport School Product Description:


NetSupport School - Product Description

See also

Product Features

Installing NetSupport School

NetSupport School is a powerful training tool based on the award winning NetSupport Manager Remote Control package.

It benefits Tutors who use a computer network to train Students in the use of Computer Applications and other packages. It allows them to display the screen of their workstation on the screens of their Student's workstations without the need for expensive video splitters and additional cabling.

What is more, unlike a video splitter NetSupport School is a two-way product. Once the Tutor has completed showing their screen they can choose to view the screens of individual Students as they complete exercises on their own workstations.

In many ways, NetSupport School can be thought of as the modern day equivalent of a Language Laboratory allowing a Tutor to interact on a group or a one to one basis with Students.

Two components make up the NetSupport product. These are: -

•	The Tutor Program. (Also called the Control program)

•	The Student Program. (Also called the Client program)

NetSupport School 8.50 delivers the following new and improved features to compliment the extensive range of existing functionality: -

New	Automatic Student Login.

New	Co-Browser. Provides Tutor and Students with a shared Web Browser.

New	Exam Grading Schema available in the Testing Module.

New	Question Scoring. Assign your own scores to questions in the Testing Module.

New	Major enhancements to Show feature. Multi-monitor support added, Show Application and record Show session for later playback by Students.

New	Portable Tutor. Now easier to run NetSupport School Tutor from a portable device.

New	Student Survey feature now includes the ability to Auto-group Students by response.

New	Customise appearance of Student and Group icons. Assign a particular icon image to each user by login name or to the machine.

New	Student information page displayed when mousing over Client icons.

Enhanced	Additional question types available in the Testing Module.

•	Supports IPX, NetBIOS, TCP/IP.

•	Supports all Windows platforms.

•	Remote Deployment Utility.

•	Show function for Training.

•	Remote control for Support.

•	Scan between a number of connected Clients and View each screen in turn.

•	SOS function.

•	Scalable View Windows.

•	Display multiple Student screens simultaneously.

•	Show to a Window or Full Screen.

•	File Transfer.

•	File Distribution.

•	Chat to Students, one to one or in groups.

•	Remotely launch applications on Student workstations.

•	Lock all Students screen and keyboards.

•	Define and work with Groups of Students.

•	Power Management.

•	Password protection for the Tutor configuration.

•	Facility to display customisable messages on the Student screen.

•	Multimedia Support.

•	Store Classroom Layouts.

•	Tutor Profiles.

•	Screen Capture Option.

•	Show Video.

•	Annotate Screen.

•	Automated "Hand out/Collect Work".

•	Group Leaders.

•	Show Leaders.

•	Scan Multiple Student screens simultaneously.

•	Enable Students to connect to a chosen class.

•	Customised Test Designer (Picture/ Audio/ Text/ Video).

•	Student Survey Facility.

•	Blank Student Screens.

•	Record & Replay.

•	Show Hotkeys.

•	Lesson Plans.

•	Lesson Timer.

•	Lesson Wizard.

•	Student Register.

•	Interactive Whiteboard.

All of the above coupled with an interface designed to make you feel at home straight away means NetSupport School is the most powerful and most usable application of its kind on the market. If however you need even more functionality then an upgrade to NetSupport Manager is just a telephone call away.


NetSupport School - Features

See also

Product Description

Installing NetSupport School

NetSupport School contains a wealth of features to assist you to Train, Support and Monitor Students.

Definitions

The ‘Tutor’ is the workstation that shows to or views/takes over the Student.

The ‘Student’ is the workstation that is being shown to, viewed or taken over.

Lesson Planner

NetSupports Lesson Plan feature enables Tutor’s to pre-plan the scope of a lesson, building in appropriate timings and prompts as required.

Class Wizard

The Class Wizard, which loads on startup, provides the Tutor with a simple to use interface in order to combine the elements required during a lesson.

Show

Display the Tutor's screen on all, some or one of the Student's screens. Display in full screen mode or in to a Window to enable the Student to carry on working.

Whilst the Tutor is showing their screen full screen the Student’s keyboards and Mouse are locked out ensuring their full attention.

For greater interaction, the Tutor can nominate a Student to take over the Show.

The feature also incorporates the showing of Videos, Replay Files and individual Applications.

This makes it the ideal training tool in a networked classroom or training room.

Exhibit

Display an individual Student's screen on selected or all Students screens.

Chat

Allows a two way on screen chat session between a Tutor and a Student so assistance can be provided without disturbing the rest of the class. The Tutor can also allow a group chat session between Students.

Interactive Whiteboard

NetSupports full screen interactive whiteboard provides the Tutor with a range of drawing tools enabling them to present learning points in graphic form. The content of the whiteboard can be shown to Students at any point during a lesson.

Message

Send a message to an individual or groups of Students. " Ten Minutes to end of Exam".

Remote Control (Viewing)

Watch, Share or Control a Student's screen. Scale View Windows to fit and View multiple Student screens simultaneously. This is ideal for conducting one to one Training without affecting the other Students and without the Tutor needing to leave their desk.

Scan

Monitor up to 16 Student's screens on the Tutor workstation, at one time. This enables the Tutor to keep a discrete watch over what the Students are running on their workstations. Particularly important with modern Internet access! The Tutor does not even need to be in the same room.

Monitor Mode

The Tutor can display a Thumbnail View of all connected Student machines. Auto Zoom feature allows you to mouse over a specific Student Thumbnail for a better view.

Replay Files

Record activity at Student or Tutor machines, storing the information in a file which can be played back at a later date.

Help Requests

Students can raise a request for Help at the Tutor’s screen without disturbing the rest of the class. The Tutor is instantly alerted to the Students need for assistance via a pop up box on their screen and a Help Request icon next to the Student icon.

File Transfer

Transfer and manipulate files between a Tutor and a Student workstations, using advanced ‘Drag and Drop’ technology. Includes support for Long File names.

File Distribution

Drag and drop files from the Tutor workstation to multiple Student workstations simultaneously. Ideal for classwork preparation.

Execute/Launch a program

Programs can be launched on the Student workstations from the Tutor workstation. On individual Student workstations or multiple workstations simultaneously. For example, the Tutor can launch the same application on all Student workstations in preparation for the next activity / exercise. You can even store and launch frequently executed applications from the quick Execute Toolbar.

Lock Students Keyboard and mouse

The Tutor can quickly lock all students keyboards and mouse to ensure that the Student workstations are not used whilst a demonstration/lecture is being given.

Group Function

Groups of Student workstations can be defined and used to maintain and work with sub-sets of Students. For example, you can execute a program, send a message, and initiate a scan on all Students that are a member of the group. The Tutor can nominate a Student to be Group Leader, providing a range of instructional  tools for them to use.

Multimedia Support

NetSupport provides full audio and video support.

Store Classroom Layout

The Control can organise Student icons into multiple layouts on the Control View Window. For example, once you have selected the members of a group you can rearrange the individual Client icons in the Control View Window, to reflect the layout of the classroom.

Send/Collect work

Prepare files for students to work on in advance and automatically distribute them as the lesson begins. Even better, once they have worked on the files you can automatically retrieve them for later review and marking.

Automatic Student Login

To enable the class to begin straight away, the Tutor can automatically login in all Student machines before the class starts.

Student Register

To keep in touch with each class you can prompt the Students to register their details. You can then display their name instead of a less meaningful computer name. Ideal for use with the classroom layout feature. Student registration details can be viewed in a Registration Report that can be saved for each class.

Student Connect to Class

Enables Students to connect to the required remote control session. Tutors create a list of ‘class’ names and when the Student connects to the network they can search for the class they would like to join.

Annotate the Screen

While remote controlling Student machines, emphasise key learning points on their screens using NetSupport’s range of annotation tools.

Power Management

Remotely shut down Client workstations in order to conserve energy.

Easy to Install and Configure

Install on Client workstations without the need to visit the individual machines using NetSupports Remote Deployment Utility.

Silent Installations across the network.

Central maintenance of Student profiles.

Create ‘ready-made’ Tutor profiles.

Portable Tutor

Enables you to run the Tutor from a portable device such as a USB Pen Drive, Memory Stick or Flash Drive. Ideal if you need to move from machine to machine as it eliminates the need to install the Tutor on all PCs.

Testing Module

Use NetSupport’s Test Designer to create customised tests that can be remotely delivered to Student machines and marked in real-time.

Application and Internet Monitoring

Use the Application and Web monitoring modules to control the use of applications and websites. Restrict the Students use of certain applications and sites by creating an approved list. Real-time reporting provides the Tutor with details of currently open applications and sites.

Co-Browser

A simple and straightforward interface that enables the Tutor to navigate Students through various web pages, with the added security of locking/unlocking Students depending on the needs of the lesson.

Student Survey Facility

Obtain instant feedback by displaying a question on the Students screens. Receive real-time analysis of the Students responses.

Screen Capture

Keep a visual record of Student activity by taking a ‘snapshot’ of a Students screen.

Show Video

A quick and easy method for playing a video on Student screens.


NetSupport Headquarters

NetSupport Limited is a worldwide leader in Remote Control Software.

Corporate Headquarters

Address: 	NetSupport House

Towngate East

Market Deeping

Peterborough

PE6 8NE

United Kingdom

Telephone:	+44 (0) 1778 382270

Fax:	+44 (0) 1778 382290

Website: 	www.netsupportsoftware.com

Office Hours:	Monday to Friday 8.30A.M to 5:30PM


NetSupport Contact Details

If you have any comments regarding the design, installation, configuration, or operation of NetSupport please inform us.

Technical Support

NetSupport software is produced in the United Kingdom and sold throughout the world in English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Arabic. At NetSupport we work hard to provide you with intuitive software and superior online and print documentation. However, if you require further technical support please contact your reseller direct.

UK & International

www.netsupportsoftware.com

Technical Support: support@netsupportsoftware.com

Sales (UK & Eire): sales@netsupportsoftware.co.uk

Sales (International): sales@netsupportsoftware.com

North America

www.netsupport-inc.com

Technical Support: support@netsupport-inc.com

Sales: sales@netsupport-inc.com

Germany, Austria and Switzerland

www.pci-software.de

Technical Support: support@pci-software.de

Sales: sales@pci-software.de

Japan

www.pcip.co.jp

Technical Support: support@pcip.co.jp

Sales: sales@pcip.co.jp


Online Knowledge Base

We have an extensive online Knowledge Base at www.netsupportsoftware.com/support/ available.


Documentation Feedback

We strive to produce the highest quality documentation. If  you have comments or suggestions about our online Help or printed guides, please contact us.


Conventions and Terminology Used

Conventions Used

•	Step-by-step instructions, which should be performed in sequence, are shown as numbered paragraphs, beneath a clearly stated, ‘To do heading.

•	As there is often more than one way of carrying out a task you will find ‘Or’ options also included.

•	Additional tips or explanatory notes regarding these instructions appear as bulleted paragraphs under the heading ‘Note’.

•	Individual items in menu commands are enclosed in braces and should be followed in sequence, for example: {Clients}{Broadcast}.

Terminology Used

Control	 	The Tutor workstation that is used to take over another.

Client	The Student workstation that is to be taken over.

Available Client	When a Client has been installed on workstation, it becomes available for connection to a Control. A Client must be available before a Control can connect to it.

Known Client	Having browsed for available Clients, NetSupport stores a list of Clients in the Client.NSS file. These are known Clients.

Connected Client	All available Client’s or Groups of Clients can be chosen for simultaneous connection. A Control can only remote control a Client they are connected.

Selected Client	When a connected Client is selected, a "one to one" session is established. A Control can then View, Show or Send a Message etc. to that Client only. A Control can also Watch, Control or Share the selected Clients screen, keyboard and mouse. A Control can switch between multiple Clients, making each of them, in turn, the selected Clients.


What's New

The following new and enhanced features come as standard in NetSupport School 8.50.

Automatic Student Login.

Co-Browser. Provides Tutor and Students with a shared Web Browser.

Exam Grading Schema available in the Testing Module.

Question Scoring. Assign your own scores to questions in the Testing Module.

Major enhancements to Show feature. Multi-monitor support added, Show Application and record Show session for later playback by Students.

Portable Tutor. Now easier to run NetSupport School Tutor from a Portable device.

Additional question types available in the Testing Module.

Student Survey feature now includes the ability to Auto-group Students by response.

Customise appearance of Student and Group icons. Assign a particular icon image to each user by login name or to the machine.

Student information page displayed when mousing over Client icons.


Configuring the Student workstation

NetSupport School Clients are configured using the NetSupport School Configurator from the NetSupport School Program Group.

The Client Configurator has five options: -

Connectivity

Set the Network transport that the Client will use for communicating with the Control program. It must be the same as that set at the Control.

Security

Set passwords to protect the configuration and prevent unauthorised access to the Client workstation.

Audio

Set the Audio settings for the Client. Both the Client and the Control workstations must have Audio hardware installed in order to use NetSupport’s Audio features.

User Interface

Customise the interface between the Client and Control.

Advanced

Set a personalised Student name and the behaviour of certain remote control features.


Student Connectivity Settings

The NetSupport Client supports multiple protocols. This means that you can set it up to respond to NetSupport Control’s whether they are running over TCP/IP, IPX or NetBIOS.

TCP/IP

Use TCP/IP

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over TCP/IP.

Press [TEST] to check that the protocol is correctly installed on this workstation.

Send Keep Alive Packets

Some TCP stacks send Keep Alive Packets. In some circumstances, it may be desirable to disable this. For example on an ISDN line where a TCP/IP client is loaded a symptom may occur where the ISDN line is brought up unintentionally.

Port

The TCP/IP protocol requires that a port number be allocated for applications to communicate through. The default registered port for NetSupport is 5405.

Notes

•	If you are using Routers, you must ensure that they are configured to pass through data using this port.

•	Changing port could interfere with other TCP/IP applications.

IPX

Use IPX

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over IPX/SPX.

Press [TEST] to check that the protocol is correctly installed on this workstation.

NetBIOS

Use NetBIOS

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over NetBIOS/NetBEUI. If you are using NetBIOS you must also select a NetBIOS Adapter Number.

Press [TEST] to check that the protocol is correctly installed on this workstation.

Set NetBIOS Adapter Number

As you can have more than one NetBIOS stack loaded, Windows and OS/2 use the concept of Adapter numbers. Each stack is allocated an Adapter number by the operating system. So for example, NetBEUI may be allocated Adapter 1, NetBIOS over TCP, Adapter 2 and so on.

By default the Client uses Adapter number 0. Depending on how your Network is configured this may not be the correct Adapter number for your workstation. To overcome this you must select the required stack from the drop down list.

Notes

•	NetSupport allows you to select multiple NetBIOS Adapters. Make sure only the ones you want are highlighted and therefore selected. If changing the selected adapter make sure that you first de-deselect the existing or default adapter number.

•	Under Windows 95, changing your Network settings may also change the NetBIOS adapter number. You may need to re-set the NetBIOS adapter number NetSupport uses after such a change.


Student User Interface Settings

This property sheet is used for customising the interface between the Client and Control.

Student Icon

Quiet Mode

If this box is checked there will be no indication at the Client workstation, that the Client program is loaded. This is useful for preventing Students from manually unloading or otherwise misusing the Client program.

Request Help

Disable Request help

Prevents the Client User from being able to use the request Help Function.

Hotkeys

These are the keys that the User at the Client will need to press to obtain access to the Request help Function. The default is ALT+LeftSHIFT+RightSHIFT. Note that some keyboards do not recognise a three key combination so if you experience problems try changing to a two key combination.

Menu items

Disable Join Class

Prevents the Client from being able to use the Join Class Function.

Disable Chat

Prevents the Client from being able to use the Chat Function.

Disable Replay

Prevents the Client from being able to open Replay Files.


Student Audio Settings

Set the Audio settings for the Client. Both the Client and Control workstations must have Audio hardware installed in order to use NetSupport’s audio features.

Volume

Threshold – microphone sensitivity

Microphone – volume of microphone

Speaker – volume of speakers

Wave – volume of operating systems sound effects


Configuring the Tutor workstation

NetSupport School Controls are configured using the {Configuration} option from the {School} Control Window drop down menu.

The Control Configurator has four options: -

General

This is used for setting the name and description that the Control will be known as on the Network and a password for starting the Control, if required.

Connectivity

This is used for setting the Network transport that the Control will use for communicating with the Client program. It must be the same as that set at the Client.

Startup

This is used to set the Client machines to connect to at Startup and in what mode.

Administration

Enables you to set an additional password if the Configuration options are to be protected and to create pre-defined Tutor profiles.

Adjusting Client settings for a Control session

During any Control session where you may be working with more than one Client, you can customise how each Client interacts with the Control. Changes can be made on an individual Client basis, while they are being viewed, or globally.

See - Adjusting Configuration Settings


Tutor Connectivity Settings

This is primarily used for setting the Network transport that the Control will use for communicating with the Clients. It must be the same as that set at the Clients.

Transports

Use TCP/IP

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over TCP/IP.

TCP/IP Settings

Connect by Hostname (DHCP/WINS Networks)

Normally the Control connects to a Client by IP Address, rather than by name.  In an environment that uses DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), this may be undesirable as the address may change when the Client workstation is restarted.  Checking this option forces the Control to connect by hostname.

Port

The TCP/IP protocol requires that a port number be allocated for applications to communicate through. The default registered port for NetSupport is 5405.

Note:	If you are using Routers, you must ensure that they are configured to pass through data using this port.

Test

Press this button to check the configuration and version of the TCP/IP stack installed. The version of Winsock is returned along with its current state.

Browsing

Subnets used when browsing for students

When you are running on a network with multiple subnets or addresses, you need to configure the Broadcast Addresses for each effective network. When a Browse is performed, the broadcast messages are sent to these addresses.

Broadcast Show

When showing the Control screen to clients, the screen information is sent to each client machine in turn. Enabling Broadcast Show results in the screen information being sent to all machines simultaneously. In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when showing to larger numbers of machines this will provide significant performance benefits.

Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport, using this feature will generate additional broadcast packets on your network. It is recommended that you consult your Network administrator before using this feature.

Settings

If Broadcast Show is enabled, select this option to set the Broadcast Address. The Broadcast Settings dialog will appear. If multiple Tutor’s are attempting to use UDP/Broadcast Show simultaneously on the same subnet it is recommended that each uses a unique Port to avoid conflict.

Wireless Network

Check this option in order to optimise show performance across a wireless network.

Access Point Speed

Select the data rate applicable to your wireless access point.

Use IPX

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over IPX.

Record Clients’ Network Numbers

When IPX addresses are recorded for a client, the network number is normally set to 0 if the Clients are on the same IPX network as the Control (this prevents subsequent problems when a file server is down). This setting forces network numbers to be recorded and used when establishing a connection.

Use Networks

The Control normally obtains a list of network numbers from the nearest NetWare server or bridge.  On some networks, there is no NetWare server to ask or the list generated is unreliable.  Enter one or more network numbers to use, which replaces the normal discovery mechanism.  The numbers can be in decimal or hexadecimal, and must be separated by commas.  Such as "0x1, 0x2, 0x34db1d69".  You can also use the Test function to determine these values automatically.

Ignore Networks

This list of network numbers is generated in the same way as for Use Networks except that when browsing, these network numbers are ignored.  You can also use the Test function to determine these values automatically.

Test

Press this button to check the IPX network configuration. This determines if the IPX network stack is available and configured correctly.  You can also scan the network for network numbers that do and do not respond.

Use NetBIOS

Check this box if you wish the Client to be able to communicate over NetBIOS.

As you can have more than one NetBIOS stack loaded, Windows uses the concept of Adapter numbers . Each stack is allocated an Adapter number by the operating system. So for example, NetBEUI may be allocated Adapter 1, NetBIOS over TCP, Adapter 2 and so on.

By default, NetSupport uses Adapter number 0. Depending on how your Network is configured this may not be the correct Adapter number for your workstation. To overcome this you must select the required stack from the drop down list.

Whichever Transport Stack or Stacks you select you can test that they are available and correctly configured for NetSupport by pressing the Test Button next to the Transport.

Notes

•	NetSupport allows you to select multiple NetBIOS Adapters. Make sure only the ones you want are highlighted and therefore selected. If changing the selected adapter make sure that you first de-deselect the existing or default adapter number.

•	Under Windows 95, changing you Network settings may also change the NetBIOS adapter number. You may need to re-set the NetBIOS adapter number NetSupport uses after such a change.


Tutor General Settings

Use these options to personalise the Control machines configuration and to add security.

Identification

Control Name

This is the name by which the Control will be known on the network. Setting it to an asterisk defaults to the machine or Computer Name.

Description

This is used to provide a description for the Control program itself. This is displayed in the Title bar of the Client program.

Password

Setting a password will mean that the next time the Control program is started the user will be prompted to enter a password. If they do not enter the correct password they will not be able to start the Control.

Security Key

You can set a security key that will ensure that only Controls and Clients with matching keys are able to connect. Setting an asterisk *  defaults the security key to be the same as the serial number. Note that this must set at both the Control and the Client.


Setting Student Properties at the Tutor

NetSupport School allows you to store and display information about particular Client workstations such as the operating system they are running on.

You also have an option to display an alternative name to the actual Student or Client name. For example the Client workstation may be called XTEST1 but for the purpose of listing it at the Control you may want to use the name of the Student who uses that workstation e.g. John Apsey.

You do this by setting Client Properties at the Control workstation.

To set Client Properties

1.	Right Click on the Client in the List View and choose {Properties}.

Or,

2.	Highlight the Client and choose {Client}{Properties}.

3.	This will display the Client Properties dialog.

This has four Tabs:-

General

Displays the NetSupport Clientname, its network address and what transport it is running on.

As a rule you should avoid changing anything on this Tab and rely on NetSupport’s automatic procedures instead.

Details

Store background information about the Client workstation such as who normally sits at it, Contact name etc.

More importantly you can change the name that the Client workstation is displayed in the List view of the Control. Note that this is an alias. It does not physically change the actual NetSupport Client Name.

System Information

Contains some basic information about the version of NetSupport that the Client workstation is running and the operating system that it is running on.

Help Requested

This tab will only appear if there are any outstanding help requests from this Client.


Student Properties Details Tab

This is where you can store background information about the Client workstation. More importantly you can change the name that the Client workstation is displayed in the List view of the Control.

Display name

If set this is the name that will be displayed in the List View at the Control instead of the actual Client name. Note that this only applies to the Control workstation. The real name as set at the Client workstation remains the same.

Description

Using this for storing useful information about the Client.

Contact and phone number

Store the name of the workstation user and relevant telephone number for the workstation.

MAC/Ethernet address

Store the MAC/Ethernet address of the Client workstation.

Appearance

You can change the appearance of the Student icons by selecting from the drop down list.


Student Properties General Tab

This contains some basic information about the version of NetSupport that the Client workstation is running and the operating system that it is running on.

Client name

The physical NetSupport Client name as set at the workstation. Do not change this.

Transport

What network protocol the Client is running on.

Address

The physical network address of the Client workstation.

Include this Client in Shows Scans

Setting this defaults the NetSupport Control to include the workstation in Show and Scans. Normally this will be Yes.


Tutor View Settings

This property sheet provides configuration options for the Viewing of Client workstations.

The View Settings can be configured in two ways:

1.	To apply the settings for all Client View sessions, choose {View}{Current Settings-View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	To apply the settings for an individual Client View session, View the Client and choose {View}{Settings for Client-View} from the View Window drop down menu.

A brief description of the available options follows:

BIOS Keyboard

Checking this option causes the Control to emulate keystrokes on the Client, at the BIOS level rather than the Hardware level.  Use this if an application at the Client does not appear to be correctly accepting keystrokes from the Control.  Only use this option if you are experiencing problems with the default low-level Keyboard option.

Confirm Switch to Full Screen

When this box is checked, you will be prompted to confirm switching to full screen mode.

Full Screen

Checking this options will force the Control to view a Client in Full Screen Mode rather than in a windowed mode. Not available in NetSupport School Standard.

Scale to Fit

Check this option if you want the contents of the view window to be automatically shrunk to fit the sizeable frame.

Disconnect when closed

Check this option to disconnect from a Client when a View Window is closed.

Enable Screen Scrape

NetSupport’s favoured, and the most efficient, method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed. However, there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver. In these circumstances you can enable ‘screen scrape’ mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen. Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client’s screen.

Scrollbars

You can turn off scrollbars on the view windows by checking this option.  This is useful when using Auto-Scroll, as you gain a little extra workspace.

Use Compression

Check this box to enable compression when viewing a Client’s screen.  The state of this checkbox is also reflected in the General Tab.

Wallpaper

Check this box if you want the Client’s wallpaper to be visible when viewing.  Normally this is turned off to improve performance, so expect the screen update speed to be impacted by selecting this option.

Blank Client screen

This enables the Control to blank the client screen in any of the View modes.

Video Skipping

A Controls Viewing performance can be configured using Video Skipping. The Control program will not display Client screen updates if a subsequent update to the area of the screen is made. Unticking the box will result in all Client screen updates being displayed at the Control.

Default Mode

When you view a Client, by default, you start viewing in Share Mode.  If you prefer to start viewing in a different way, change the style from the list provided.

Cache Size

The NetSupport Control contains a cache to help improve overall performance. The cache sizes range from 256KB to 16Mb and a separate cache is allocated to each Client connection. If you are running applications on the Client that uses lots of or large bitmaps increase the cache size to improve the performance.

Max Colour Depth

When you connect to a Client, you can restrict the Colour Depth that is sent. This is done to reduce the amount of traffic between Client and Control. Reduce the Colour Depth to 16 colours if you are using applications that do not rely on anything other than the standard 16-colour palette.

Change DOS Font

Use this dialog to select the font to use when displaying DOS screens. This will be from  Windows Clients running Full Screen DOS boxes. Windows uses a graphic character set for displaying DOS Screens. The higher the resolution that you are running Windows in the larger the font size you will need to set to get an accurate representation of a DOS Screen.

Change Japanese Font

Use this dialog to select the font to use when displaying Japanese DOS screens.


Tutor File Transfer Settings

You can configure the File Transfer settings in NetSupport School. From the Control Window drop down menu choose (View}{Current Settings - File Transfer}. Here you can alter the way in which information is displayed, and set safety features such as confirmation before performing a damaging operation.

Show System/Hidden files

Check this box to display all files with System and Hidden attributes.  By default, this option is unchecked.

Show file details

Select this option to display multiple columns of information for each file in the list.  These show the file size, modified date, attributes and short filename.  You can toggle between this state and the filenames only state, by using the list style buttons in the File Transfer User Interface.

Show file names only

Select this option to only display filenames in the file lists.  This allows you to display more files at the same time than with file details. You can toggle between this state and the Details State, by using the list style buttons in the File Transfer User Interface.

Confirm

When you perform potentially dangerous file operations, such as deleting a directory or file you can make the Control display a Confirmation dialog box.  This helps prevent accidental loss of data.  If you are familiar with the User Interface, you can turn these options off as required.  By default, all the confirmation settings are turned on.

Directory copy

Make the user confirm before copying a directory structure.

Directory delete

Make the user confirm before deleting a directory structure.

File overwrite

If checked, displays a confirmation dialog before overwriting an existing file. However, if unchecked the confirmation message will still appear if system/hidden files are about to be overwritten.

File delete

Display a confirmation dialog before deleting one or more files.

Use Compression

Check this box to enable the use of compression.  When you are communicating with a Client, whether it is a File transfer, View or Chat session, the data being sent and received will be compressed.  This also provides a means of security, as the data will also be encrypted.

Delta File Transfer

Delta File Transfer improves performance by skipping the transfer of information that is unchanged. If the file being transferred already exists in the destination directory only the changed parts of the file will be updated.

Delta File Transfer is enabled by default.

Priority (when also Viewing)

When you are transferring files and viewing a Clients’ screen at the same time, each operation impacts the performance of the other.  You can reduce the priority of a File Transfer operation to make the viewing more responsive and vice-versa. Slide the control to the left to give the File Transfer higher priority, or to the right to give Client views higher priority.  If you are not viewing a Client, this setting is ignored.


Audio Settings

This property sheet provides configuration options for using Audio support.

The Audio Settings can be configured in two ways:

1.	To apply the settings for all Client sessions, choose {View}{Current Settings-Audio} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	To apply the settings for an individual Client session, View the Client and choose {View}{Settings for Client-Audio} from the View Window drop down menu.

Volume

Threshold – microphone sensitivity

Microphone – volume of microphone

Speaker – volume of speakers

Wave – volume of operating systems sound effects

Test

Check this box to test all of the above settings.

Enable

On -Turn Audio on.

Off –Turn Audio off.

Talk –Turn the Control Audio to Talk function only.

Listen –Turn the Control Audio to Listen function only.

Selecting the Audio transmission format buttons allows you to change the transmission format. Use only the level you need for acceptable quality. High quality settings can affect screen update performance.


Tutor User Interface Settings

The behaviour of the following interface options can be adjusted by selecting {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Tutor

Retrieve student login name when Performing a Student Register

Check this option to retrieve and display the login name of the Client on the Control Window when you perform a Student Register.

Remember Student user/ login names

Check this option to save the Student user/login names in the Known Client list.

Silent Disconnect

Should a Client inadvertently disconnect from the Control during a session a prompt appears at the Tutor machine. Check this option to disable this warning.

Automatically Reconnect to Students

Ensures that Student machines automatically rejoin a live remote control session should they inadvertently disconnect.

Student

Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard

Blanks the Client screen when their keyboard and mouse are locked. You can also blank a Client screen while Viewing.

Display image when locking mouse and keyboard

Displays a full-screen image on the Client screen when their keyboard and mouse are locked. The default NetSupport image can be replaced by one of your own choosing by setting the location of the file in the Client Configurator – Student Advanced Settings dialog.

Student to Student Chat

Check this option to enable Students to initiate a Group Chat session with other connected Students.

Lock/Unlock

When using the Lock function, the Students mouse and keyboard are locked by default. However, there may be occasions when you still want the Student to be able to use their mouse or keyboard.

Check/uncheck the appropriate box(es) as required.

Note:	Both boxes must be checked when the ‘Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard’ option is used.


Adding a Group

NetSupport allows you to organise Clients into Groups for easier access and management. For example you might work with particular sets of Client machines for set training exercises.

To create a new group

1.	Make sure that the required Clients are available in the List View.

2.	From the Control Window drop down menu bar, choose {Group}{New}.

Or,

Click the new Group icon on the Group Bar.

Or,

Right-click on selected Client icons and choose Add to Group and select New.

This will display the Create New Group Wizard.

3.	Add the name that you would like the Group to be known as and an optional description if required.

4.	Add / remove the required Clients to the Group.

5.	Press the Finish Button to complete the process.

6.	The Group that you have added will appear on the Group bar.


Selecting a Group

To work with a pre-defined Group of Clients you need to select the Group.

To select a Group

1.	From the Control Window drop down menu bar, choose {Group}{Select}.

Or,

From the Group Bar, select the required group.

2.	The Clients in that Group will then be displayed in the List View.


Deleting a Group

If you no longer need a Group that you have defined you can remove the Group. This will not affect the Clients that are members of the Group.

To delete a Group

1.	Select the group that you want to delete.

2.	From the Control Window drop down menu bar, choose {Group}{Delete}.

Or,

Click the delete Group icon on the Group Bar.


Maintaining a Group

Once you have created a group of Clients, you may find that you want to add or remove Clients from the group or change the name that you have assigned to the Group. You do this by modifying the Group Properties.

To change the properties of a Group

1.	Select the group that you want to modify.

2.	From the Control Window drop down menu bar, choose {Group}{Properties}.

Or,

Click on the Properties icon on the Group Bar.

Or,

Click on the Properties icon in the Control Window.

3.	The General Tab will be displayed. Here you can modify the Name that you have assigned to the Group and the optional Group description.

Selecting the Members Tab will display a list of available clients/Clients in the top half of the panel and a list of clients/Clients in the current Group in the lower half of the panel.

To add a Client simply select the Client in the available clients list and select the Add button.

To remove a Client simply select the Client in the list of Group Members and select the Remove button.

Repeat as necessary to make the desired changes then select the OK button to complete the process.


Customising the Toolbar

To enable you to tailor NetSupport to your exact requirements a variety of user interface customisation features are available. One of these is the ability to set which icons you want to display on the Control Toolbar.

To customise the Control Window toolbar

1.	From the Control Window drop down menu bar choose {View}{Toolbar – Customise}.

or

Right click on the Toolbar and choose Customise.

2.	The Customise Toolbar dialog will appear.

The main NetSupport toolbar can be customised to include the buttons that you use most frequently. The two lists you can see contain the buttons that can be added to the toolbar and those already on the toolbar.  To group the buttons together you can place separators between them.

Note:	In many cases, related tasks are grouped together within one toolbar icon for convenience, for example, Show, Show Video, Show Replay Files. These multi-feature buttons are indicated by a drop down arrow adjacent to the icon. However, you can still add the individual icons to the toolbar if preferred.

Available Buttons

Displays a list of all the buttons that can be added to your toolbar.  This list shows the icon and the associated text that will be added.

Current Buttons

Displays the current buttons on your toolbar.  Separators are shown as a horizontal broken line.  You can add a separator by selecting the item in this list to insert after and pressing the Separator >> button.

Add >>

Choose an item from the Available Buttons and select the position for this item in the Current Buttons list.  The item is inserted after the selected item when you press this button.

Separator >>

Press this button to insert a separator into the Current Buttons list after the selected item.  Separators are used to visually group buttons together.

<< Remove

Choose an item from the Current Button list to remove and then press this button.  The item will be added to your Available Buttons list unless it is a separator in which case it is just removed.

Reset

Pressing this button restores the Current Button list to the defaults provided by the User Interface.

Press this button to move the selected toolbar button up one position in the Current Button list.

Press this button to move the selected toolbar button down one position in the Current Button list.


Adjusting Configuration Settings

NetSupport provides a range of customisable options enabling you to tailor each Remote Control session to suit specific requirements and conditions.

The Tutor has the option of applying settings globally or, in some instances, at individual Student level.

To adjust global Configuration Settings

1.	From the Control Window drop down menu, choose {View}{Current Settings}.

2.	The Settings dialog will appear, select the relevant option;

Remote Control

View

Keyboard/Mouse

Replay Files

Audio

File Transfer

User Interface

Group Leaders

3.	Configure the options to be enabled or disabled.

4.	Click OK when complete. The selected settings will apply to all Clients and will automatically be saved for future Control sessions.

Configuration settings for individual Clients

The Remote Control settings, View, Keyboard/Mouse, Replay Files and Audio, can be customised for individual Clients. For example, on one Client you may want to use compression because it is on a slow link, but on another you may want to turn compression off.

To adjust settings for individual Clients

1.	View the required Client.

2.	Choose {View}{Settings for Client} from the View Window drop down menu.

3.	The Settings dialog will appear, select the relevant option, View , Keyboard/Mouse, Replay Files or Audio.

4.	Configure the options to be enabled or disabled during the View session.

Note:	If you want to change the settings permanently check the ‘Update Configuration NetSupport School’ box.


Tutor Startup Settings

Use these options to pre-determine the machines to connect to when the Control program starts. You can also specify the mode of Remote Control to be used.

At Startup

Browse and connect to Students starting with

If this box is checked NetSupport will browse and immediately connect to all Clients starting with the prefix set in the text box. Once found, Clients are stored in the Known Client List.

Connect to Known List of Students

If this box is checked NetSupport will only connect to Clients in the Known List.

Publish Class and allow Students to join

With the options above, the Tutor dictates which Clients are connected to. Selecting this option, enables you to create a ‘class’ which the Clients (students) themselves can join.

Notes:

•	Publish Class feature only supported over TCP/IP connections.

•	If the expected Clients are not found it may be because NetSupport has not been configured to browse the required Networks. See Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing for more information.

Start Viewing

If this box is checked, when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Viewing them.

Start Showing

If this box is checked, when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Showing the Controls screen to them.

Start Scanning

If this box is checked, when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Scanning them.

Display Class Wizard

If this box is checked the Class Wizard will appear at startup.


Group Leader Settings

When working with defined Groups of Clients, the Control can assign ‘Group Leader’ status to a selected member of the Group. The designated Leader can then take control of the Group, performing many of the tasks that the main Control can. The main Control retains overall responsibility while a Group Leader is in place, and can remove the status at any time.

To select the features to be made available to a Group Leader choose {View}{Current Settings – Group Leaders} from the Control Window drop down menu.

All Group Leader features are enabled by default but can be removed by un-checking the appropriate box.

The following functions are available to a Group Leader:

Show

Scan

Message

Chat

Execute

Send/Collect Work

Announce

View (Share, Control and Watch modes)

Exhibit

Click OK to accept the settings. You are now ready to assign Group Leader Status to selected Clients.


Install Configuration Options

When performing a Silent Installation or using NetSupport Deploy, you can customise the installation to suit individual requirements. This dialog, accessed by running INSTCFG.EXE /S from the NetSupport program folder if performing a Silent Installation or if using NetSupport Deploy, via the Install Properties General Tab, enables you to specify the variables for the installation. The information is stored in a parameter file, default name Values.TXT.

General

Install Directory

Specify the directory where NetSupport will be installed. Leave blank to install in the default directory, \Program Files\Netsupport School.

Start Menu Folder

Specify a name for the program group or leave blank for NetSupport School.

Restart Machine

Check this box to automatically Restart the Client workstations upon completion of the installation. The NetSupport Client does not become active until the workstation has been restarted.

Note:	Leave the box un-checked if using NetSupport Deploy to perform the installation. Additional Restart options are available withing the Deploy routine.

Icons

Leave the Icons box un-checked if you want to install an icon for each NetSupport Component. Check the required boxes to limit the number of icons created.

Components

Check the relevant boxes to indicate which NetSupport Components will be installed on the Client machines.


Tutor Administration - Security Settings

The Control Configuration can be protected by setting a password. This acts independently of the Control Password if set.

Check the Protect box to set the password.

Each time a Control User subsequently wants to make changes to the Configuration, they will be prompted to enter the password.


Tutor Keyboard/Mouse Settings

Keyboard Layout

Select from the list provided a Keyboard layout to be used at the Control during viewing.  These layouts map keys on the Control to keys on the Client machine.  If both Client and Control are using the same keyboard layout, you should select Unmapped Keyboard from the list.

Hotkeys

When you are viewing a Client in Full Screen Mode, hotkeys provide a way of returning to the possibly hidden user interface.  If the screen resolution at the Client is smaller than the resolution of the Control, you can simply click your mouse button outside the view window to stop viewing and display the view window again.  Check the boxes in this group to determine the keys that are used as Hotkeys.

AutoScroll Speed

When you are viewing a Client’s screen, the Control can automatically scroll the contents when the mouse moves close to the edges of the window.  Adjusting the sliding control sets the speed at which the view scrolls, from not at all to very fast.

Scroll Delay

When Auto Scroll is enabled, you can change the delay before the scroll is activated.  If you want the view to scroll as soon as the mouse is at an edge of the screen, move the slider towards Min.  If you prefer a longer delay before the AutoScroll takes effect, move the slider towards Max.

Mouse Delay

Adjusting the mouse delay allows you to reduce the rate at which mouse updates are sent from the Control to the Client when controlling or sharing.  Move the slider control towards Infinite to reduce the rate and conserve bandwidth, or towards Min for the best mouse response.  This is useful on dial-up or very slow networks.

Disable Num Lock Synchronisation

Check this option if using a Laptop as the Control machine to ensure that the keyboards behaviour corresponds with that of a standard desktop machine.


Student Security Settings

This property sheet is used to set security at the Client.

Student Security

Security Key

This sets a security key that must be the same as that set at the Control, before the Control will be allowed to connect. This setting is optional.

Enable User Acknowledgement

If enabled, a Remote Control session cannot take place until the Client has confirmed that they accept the link being made.

Display Customisable Text

When Connected

The message entered here is displayed at the Client machine when a Control connects to it.

When Viewed

The message entered here is displayed at the Client machine when it is being Viewed by the Control.

Configurator Security Settings

Configurator Password

As an extra level of security, you can associate a password with a Configuration File. This prevents unauthorised amendment of this Client’s configuration. When the Configurator is next started, the user must enter the required password before being able to change any Client parameters in this Configuration file. Choose Set, to set your password.


Student Advanced Settings

This property sheet enables further personalisation of the Client’s configuration. A meaningful Client name can be used rather than the machine name, or you can specify a particular image to load when the Client’s keyboard and mouse are locked rather than use NetSupport’s default.

Student Identification

Student Name

This is the name that the Client will be known as on the network for NetSupport School purposes. It must be a unique name of up to 15 characters.

You should try to use a sensible naming convention to help you identify which workstation is which.

It is also important to prefix each name in a group of related Clients with the same few characters, as this will be used when the Control connects to establish the workgroup. For example, you might start the name of each workstation in the same room with the prefix CLASS1_. Then configure the Control to connect to all Clients starting with CLASS1_ will avoid Client workstations outside of this room being inadvertently connected and receiving a show.

You can use an asterisk (*) to cause the Client name to default to the MachineName (also known as the Computer name).

Note:	Although internally the Control connects to Clients by referring to their Clientname, the user at the Control can configure the Control program to display a different name.

While Viewed

Silent Mode

Allows the Control to connect and View a Client without the Clients knowledge. If Silent Mode is not selected the Clients screen and mouse icon will flicker notifying the Client that a connection has been made and their screen is being Viewed.

Send Physical Fonts

When a Windows Client is sending its screen to a Control, it passes the font information by reference to reduce the volume of data sent.

The Control refers to its own internal font mappings and uses the closest matching that it has to the one being displayed at the Client.  In most cases, the same fonts will be available at both the Client and the Control and so what is displayed on the screen will appear identical.

However, there may be occasions when a close match cannot be found.  In these cases, it is desirable that the Client sends the Control the full information that it requires to display the data in the same font.

Setting this option forces TrueType text to be sent as glyphs (i.e. character shapes), rather than character codes.  This guarantees that they will be displayed correctly at the Control.

This will, however, impact on performance, especially on Dial-up lines, and is not usually required.

Performance

Cache size

Screen data that has been recently sent to the Control by the Client is cached to improve performance.  A larger cache improves performance, at the expense of using more memory at both the Client and the Control.

Setting this option enables you to tailor the cache size used for maximum performance. The lower of the cache size set at the Client and Control will be used so you must set at both ends for this to be effective.

Image Option

Image File

When a Client’s keyboard and mouse have been locked, a default image, nss_lock_image.jpg, appears on their screen. Alternatively you may prefer to specify an image personal to your organisation.

Note:	If you do not want to display an image, you can disable the option by choosing {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu and unchecking Display image when locking mouse and keyboard.

Enable DVD Playback and Direct 3D support (Win 2000/XP Only)

On Windows 2000 and XP, NetSupport uses the Microsoft Mirror Driver to capture screen data for view sessions. However, while hooked into the Mirror Driver it is not possible to play DVD’s. Therefore, if you do need the capability to play DVD’s, NetSupport provides options which load and unload the Mirror Driver as required.

Except While Viewed

If checked, DVD support is enabled but will be disabled for the duration of a view session while the Mirror Driver is loaded.

Except While Connected

If checked, DVD support is suspended while a connection to the Client is in place.


Tutor Administration - Profiles

After creating, for example, an approved or restricted list of websites and applications, you can add the files containing this information to a Tutor Profile. On entering the Tutor program, the user simply selects the required profile to load the pre-defined settings.

This property sheet enables you to Add, Edit or Delete Tutor Profiles.

•	Click Add to create a new Tutor Profile.

•	To remove a Profile, select the Profile name and click Delete.

•	To choose the files to include in a new or existing Profile, select the Profile name and click Edit.


Tutor Profiles - File Locations

Click Change and browse for the appropriate files to include in the Tutor Profile.

Applications File

Contains details of approved and restricted application packages. Default file name, NetSupport School Pro.app. See Application Control Module for more information about creating pre-defined lists of approved or restricted Applications.

Web Site File

Contains details of approved and restricted web sites. Default file name, NetSupport School Pro.web. See Web Control Module for more information about creating pre-defined lists of approved or restricted websites.

Survey File

Identifies the location of stored Student Surveys. Default file name, NetSupport School Pro.sul. See Student Surveys for more information.

Layout File

Stores the position of the Client machines as they appear in the Control Window and, if specified, a background image. Default file name, LAYOUT.LYT. See Working with Classroom Layouts for more information.

Testing Console Report Folder

Specify a location for storing test results. If left blank the reports will default to \netsupport school\tests\reports.


Tutor Profiles - File Locations Advanced

Pre-defined Client and Group Lists can also be included in a Tutor Profile but these aren’t enabled by default. Before deciding to apply these to a Profile consider the current method of browsing for Students on startup as you may not want to override this.

Click Change and browse for the appropriate files to include in the Tutor Profile.

Enable Advanced Options

Client File

Contains a list of Known Client machines that the Tutor program attempts to connect to when loading.  Default file name, CLIENT.NSS. See Known List of Students for more information.

Group File

Contains the details of any Client Groups that have been created. Default file name, GROUP.NSS. See Working with Groups for more information.


Replay File Settings

The Replay Files feature enables the Tutor to record and playback the screen activity that takes place at a Student workstation while it is being remote controlled/viewed.

See Using Replay Files for more information.

Record Replay Files

Check this option to enable the recording of Replay Files. A Replay File will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at any Student machine.

Include Audio

In addition to recording the screen, mouse and keyboard activity, if Student machines are configured for audio you can include any narration that takes place.

Prefix Files With Client Name

In order to identify each Replay File, filenames are prefixed with the Client Name and the date/time of the recording. Alternatively, by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001.rpf etc.

In Directory

Specify where the Replay Files should be stored.


NetSupport Protect

NetSupports desktop security product, NetSupport Protect, compliments NetSupport Schools range of functionality by further protecting Windows® operating systems and desktops from unwanted or malicious changes.

If NetSupport Protect is installed on the Student machine you may need to disable the protection in order to conduct your remote control session.

To Disable NetSupport Protect choose {School}{Configuration – NetSupport Protect} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Disable NetSupport Protect

Decide whether to switch protection off when you first connect to the Student machines or when you open a view session.

Note:	The Tutor program will need restarting for these settings to take effect.

Security

A NetSupport Protect configuration should be secured with an Administrator password. You will need to enter that password here as confirmation that you are authorised to turn desktop protection off.

To find out more about NetSupport Protect and to download a free trial copy, visit www.netsupportprotect.com.


Client xxx already connected to Control xxx

Meaning

The Client you are trying to establish a connection to is already connected to another Control.  This situation can sometimes occur if the Control machine was previously connected to the Client, but was turned off without first disconnecting.  The Client should notice this after 30 seconds or so and relinquish the connection unless it has been configured to disable Tickle packets.

Suggestions

Wait for 30 seconds or so and see if the Client responds

Contact the user at the other Control and ask them to release control of the Client


Dialup Link In Use
Already Dialled

Meaning

You have tried to dial a Remote Network while you are dialled into another Remote Network.  You can only connect to one Remote Network at a time.

To hang up from the existing Remote Network and dial this Remote Network press Yes.

To remain connected to the existing Remote Network and abort the operation press No.


File 'xxx' already exists.  Overwrite (click No to append)?
File ‘xxx’ already exists.  Overwrite (click No to append)?

Meaning

The file you are about to write to already exists.  You can elect to overwrite it, or press No to append data to the end of the existing file.


While Script is performing File Operations

Meaning

You are running a script which is copying a file (or performing some other file operation) on the Client.  If you wish to proceed, you can either stop the script or wait for it to finish the file operation in progress.


xxx is wrongly configured (no modem specified)

Meaning

The NetSupport Bridge you are attempting to connect to does not have a modem configured correctly.  Configure a modem on the Bridge machine using the NetSupport Configurator and try again.


Versions of xxx and xxx do not match

Meaning

The version of the NetSupport Bridge software you are attempting to connect to is too old.  Update the NetSupport Bridge software to the latest version and try again.


Changing the Print Capture settings will discard print data captured from xxx.  Proceed?

Meaning

There are print jobs captured from the Client waiting to print.  If you change the Print Capture settings now these outstanding print jobs will be deleted.

Press Yes to proceed with the changes and delete the outstanding print jobs, press No to Cancel the operation and leave the outstanding print jobs to print.


If you uncheck 'Permit a user of this Configuration to xxx', you will be unable to change certain settings from this Configuration
If you uncheck 'Permit a user of this Configuration to xxx', you will be unable to change certain settings from this Configuration in future.  Is this what you want to do?

Meaning

Disabling certain features in a Configuration will prevent you from re-enabling them unless you use an Administrator Configuration.  Of course, this implies that you must have such a configuration set up, and know the password.

You will receive this message if you uncheck any of the following in a Configuration:

Change Settings

If you remove this option you will not be able to access any of this Configurations settings, this includes Network, Startup, View and File Transfer.

Configure User Interface

Without this option a user cannot change user interface settings such as hiding or protecting Client/Group/Remote Network lists and removing features from the toolbar and menu.

Act as an Administrator

An administrator user is able to create, delete and modify other configurations.

To re-enable any of these options you have to use another Configuration that has Administrator rights.

Press Yes to proceed, No to leave the setting unchanged.


xxx is in use.  Please select a different configuration and try again.

Meaning

You are trying to delete the Configuration that is currently in use.  The operation will be aborted.

Suggestions

If you really want to delete this configuration, select another configuration (creating it if necessary) to be the current one and then try deleting this configuration again.


Sorry, you do not have sufficient privileges to do this.

Meaning

You cannot perform certain operations if the current Configuration does not have the required privileges.

Notes

•	To create a New configuration or edit an existing one you must have ‘Change User Interface’ privileges.

•	To Reset or Create Icons you must be allowed to ‘Switch Configurations’.


The name is invalid (must start with a letter)

Meaning

You have attempted to create a new Configuration, but the name you supplied was invalid.  The name must begin with a letter.

Suggestions

Check to make sure you didn’t accidentally enter a leading space or other non-printing character.


Checksum error receiving data from Client; expected: nnn, actual nnn

Meaning

While testing the connection to a Client incorrect data was received.  During a Receive Echo test, data is sent and then echoed back by the Client.  If the data received does not match the data sent this error occurs.

Suggestions

Check the physical connection between Control and Client including the Network Interface Card.

Check networking resources on both machines.

If going through a Router or Bridge device check they are not filtering out packets.

If dialling into a router, try disabling PPP compression.


Checksum error sending data to Client; expected: nnn, actual nnn

Meaning

While testing the connection to a Client incorrect data was sent.  During a ReceiveEcho test data is received and then echoed back to the Client.  If the data sent does not match the data received this error occurs.

Suggestions

Check the physical connection between Control and Client including the Network Interface Card.

Check networking resources on both machines.

If going through a Router or Bridge device check they are not filtering out packets.

If dialling into a router, try disabling PPP compression.


xxx failed to run at Client. Error Code nnn

Meaning

You attempted to run an application on the selected Client machine that could not be executed successfully.  The error code supplied is the DOS error Code of the failed operation.  If you do not specify a path to the file, the Client will attempt to find the application in the path environment on the Client machine, and the operating system directories.

Suggestions

Check to make sure that the application name you entered is valid.  Try supplying the full path to the application filename if you haven’t already done so.


xxx ran successfully at Client

Meaning

The application you ran at the Client was executed successfully.  Note that this does not necessarily mean that the application completed successfully - just that it started up OK.


Reboot/Logout this Client?

Meaning

You must confirm the Reboot or Logout action.  The user at the Client machine may lose unsaved work because of this action.


You do not have sufficient rights to modify the Client List.

Meaning

The Named Configuration you are currently using has the Client List set as read-only.  This means that you cannot modify the contents of this list.

Suggestions

Ask your NetSupport Administrator to enable this feature for you, or ask them to make the necessary changes to the Client list.


Client xxx has disconnected

Meaning

The specified Client has disconnected.  This will happen if the Client machine is shut down or rebooted, if the user at the Client elects to disconnect you, or if an Inactivity Timeout expires at the Client.

Suggestions

The Client machine has been turned off, has hung or the Client has been unloaded.

The network has failed or excessive traffic has been generated to interfere with tickle packets.

The Client has timed out.

There were insufficient network resources to keep the connection alive.

Tips

Check to make sure that the Client machine is reliable and applications that run on this machine do not utilise all the processor time.

Contact your network manager and see if anything can be done to remove bottlenecks or improve overall network performance.

Increase or disable the Inactivity Timeout on the Client machine.

Try configuring your network drivers to provide more resources for running applications.


Client xxx is about to disconnect due to inactivity. Click OK to remain Connected or Cancel to ignore.

Meaning

The Inactivity timeout configured at the Client is about to expire.  You must respond if you still want to remain connected to this Client.  If you do not respond to this message, the Client will disconnect.

Suggestions

If the period of inactivity is too short for your purposes, you can Inactivity Timeout


Wrong version of NSM Client installed on Client machine

Meaning

Despite what it says, this message means that the version of the NetSupport Client installed on the *this* machine does not match the version of the NetSupport Control.

Suggestions

Reinstall NetSupport on this machine.


Changing the Print Capture settings may truncate print data captured from xxx.  Proceed?

Meaning

There are print jobs waiting to print from the Client.  If you change the Print Capture settings these outstanding jobs will be deleted.

Press Yes to proceed with the changes and delete the outstanding print jobs, press No to Cancel the operation and leave the outstanding print jobs to print.


Error nnn: Unable to copy file 'xxx' to 'xxx'.  xxx
Error nnn: Unable to copy file ‘<SourceFile>’ to ‘<Destination>’.  <Error Message>

Meaning

An error occurred trying to copy a file.  <SourceFile> is the source path of the file, <Destination> is the target machine.  <Error Message> describes the nature of the problem and should give you sufficient information to sort it out.

Suggestions

A common cause of this problem is if the file on the target machine is opened by another application.  Close this application and try again.


Copy the selected files/directories to the Clients?

Meaning

You have performed an operation that will Copy the selected files and/or directories to the available Clients.

This message can be suppressed by unchecking the Confirm Directory Copy box in the File Transfer option of the settings dialog.


Error nnn: Unable to create directory 'xxx' on 'xxx'.  xxx
Error nnn: Unable to create directory ‘xxx’ on ‘xxx’.  xxx

Meaning

An attempt to create a directory has failed on the specified machine (Control or Client).

Suggestions

Make sure that the destination drive or network share is not write-protected.  Also, make sure you are not trying to create the directory on a CD-ROM drive, and that you have sufficient access rights in the parent directory.


Cannot load 'xxx'
Cannot load ‘xxx’

Meaning

This error occurs if a Transport DLL cannot be loaded when the Control is started or if the control DLL cannot be loaded when the API is started.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is present in the NSM directory and you have sufficient rights to load it.


Demonstration Client 'xxx' has been deactivated
Demonstration Client ‘xxx’ has been deactivated

Meaning

The Client you were connected to is a demonstration Client and has been deactivated.  You must restart the Client to continue using it.  The Client will again timeout after 5 minutes.

Suggestion

You should upgrade your demonstration Client license for a time expiry Client license or purchase a full copy.


Error nnn deleting 'xxx' on 'xxx'
Error nnn deleting ‘xxx’ on ‘xxx’

Meaning

There was an error deleting the file from the specified machine.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is not read only or open in another application, that the diskette is not write-protected, and that you have sufficient rights to delete files.


xxx is a demonstration Client.  It will deactivate after 5 minutes use

Meaning

You are connecting to a demonstration Client instead of a full or evaluation Client.  Demonstration Clients time-out after 5 minutes use and must be restarted.

Suggestions

You should upgrade your demonstration Client for a time expiry Client license or purchase a full copy.


Directory 'xxx' does not exist on xxx.
Directory ‘xxx’ does not exist on xxx.

Meaning

The specified directory could not be found on the specified machine (Control or Client).

Suggestions

Make sure the directory name entered is valid, or create the specified directory and try again.


Disk xxx full on xxx

Meaning

The disk on the target machine is full, and the current operation could not be completed.

Suggestions

Delete some files on the drive in question and retry the operation.


Error nnn reading drive xxx on xxx

Meaning

An error occurred when reading from the specified drive on the local or Client machine.

Suggestions

If the device is a floppy drive or CD-ROM drive make sure there is diskette/CD present, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


The Bridge modem has XON/XOFF flow control enabled!

Explanation:

This causes a conflict with characters sent by NetSupport and MUST be disabled. RTS/CTS hardware flow control should be enabled.

Possible Causes:

1.	The Bridge modem has XON/XOFF (software) flow control enabled.

2.	Wrong modem type selected at Control or Client computer.

3.	Modems incorrectly configured or incompatible - refer to modem manuals for further help

Recommended Action:

1.	Disable XON/XOFF flow control and enable RTS/CTS flow control.

2.	Check that the correct modems are selected.

3.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


The Control AND Bridge modems have XON/XOFF flow control enabled!

Explanation:

This causes a conflict with characters sent by NetSupport and MUST be disabled. RTS/CTS hardware flow control should be enabled.

Possible Causes:

The Control and Bridge modems have XON/XOFF (software) flow control enabled."

Wrong modem type selected at Control or Client computer.

Modems incorrectly configured or incompatible - refer to modem manuals for further help

Recommended Action:

Disable XON/XOFF flow control and enable RTS/CTS flow control.

Check that the correct modems are selected.

Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


The Control modem has XON/XOFF flow control enabled!

Explanation:

This causes a conflict with characters sent by NetSupport and MUST be disabled. RTS/CTS hardware flow control should be enabled.

Possible Causes:

1.	The Control modem has XON/XOFF (software) flow control enabled.

2.	Wrong modem type selected at Control or Client computer.

3.	Modems incorrectly configured or incompatible - refer to modem manuals for further help

Recommended Action:

1.	Disable XON/XOFF flow control and enable RTS/CTS flow control.

2.	Check that the correct modems are selected.

3.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


Unable to exchange 2KByte buffer with Bridge

Explanation:

A test of the flow control settings required by NetSupport failed indicating potential connection and/or performance problems.

Possible Causes:

1.	The Control and Bridge modems do not have RTS/CTS hardware flow control enabled resulting in buffer overrun.

2.	The Control and/or Bridge's PC to modem baud rate are too high causing data loss.

3.	Poor cable connection between modem and PC.

4.	Poor phone connection resulting in frequent retries.

Recommended Action:

1.	Make sure RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control is enabled at both modems.

2.	Set the PC to modem baud rate to one setting above the maximum connection speed.

3.	Ensure both modems are using good quality, correctly wired serial cables.

4.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


Error Code nnn
Error Code nnn <error message>

Meaning

The application you tried to execute on the specified machine (Control or Client) failed to run.

Suggestions

Check the error message, rectify the problem and try again.


You are currently performing a Scan.  Are you sure you want to exit?

Meaning

You are in the process of Scanning one or more Clients and are about to close the Control program down.  You are being asked to confirm this action before continuing.


You are currently performing a Show.  Are you sure you want to exit?

Meaning

You are in the process of performing a Show to a number of Clients and are about to close the Control program down.  You are being asked to confirm this action before continuing.

Exiting will stop the Show and release the Clients.


Your demonstration period has expired (dd/mm/yyyy).

Meaning

The evaluation license for this copy of NetSupport Manager has expired.  Evaluation copies generally run for 30 days from the date of installation.

Suggestions

If you intend to continue using NetSupport Manager you should contact your supplier and purchase a fully licensed copy (you know it makes sense).


You do not have sufficient rights to modify the Group List

Meaning

The Named Configuration you are currently using has the Group List set as read-only.  This means that you cannot modify the contents of this list.

Suggestions

Ask your Administrator to enable this feature for you, or ask them to make the necessary changes to the Group list.


There is already a group called 'xxx'. Please choose a different name

Meaning

You are trying to create a new Group that has the same name as an existing Group.  You must supply a new Group name before you can continue.

Suggestions

Choose a different Group name, or delete the existing Group and try again.


This license has not been activated.  Run 'winstall /a' to activate.

Meaning

Under certain circumstances you must activate NetSupport before you can use it.  This is usually done at install time.  If you manually copy a license file without going through the activation process first you will get this error.

Suggestions

Re-install NetSupport or run "winstall /a" to activate the license (winstall is located in the NSM directory).


You have reached the License limit for the number of concurrent connections.  Contact your vendor for details on increasing you
You have reached the License limit for the number of concurrent connections.

Meaning

Your license entitles you to establish a certain number of concurrent connections; you have reached this limit.  No further connections can be made unless you disconnect from other Clients first.

Suggestions

Disconnect from other Clients first.

Contact your vendor and inquire about upgrading your license.

If this is an evaluation copy of NetSupport contact your vendor for details of turning this into a full version.


Error loading transport 'xxx' (adapter nnn), operation: nnn, code: nnn
Error loading transport ‘xxx’ (adapter nnn), operation: nnn, code: nnn

Meaning

There was an error loading the network transport protocol detailed in the message.

If this is the first time you have run NetSupport you may need to configure your Network Transports.

If you have run NetSupport successfully before go to the Network Configure dialog and test each transport you have enabled.  If you are using NetBIOS you may need to change the adapter number(s) if you have changed your machines networking configuration.

See Also

Configuring Network Transports


Client 'xxx' is running on this machine
Client ‘xxx’ is running on this machine

Meaning

The Client that you are trying to connect to is running on this machine.  For obvious reasons, you can not do this.  Also, beware of creating a situation where you start a Control on a Client that you are controlling and then try to Control your machine from there.  This will cause unpredictable results

Suggestions

Check to make sure the name of the Client you are trying to Connect to is correct.  If you are using Quick Connect to connect to the Client, try performing a Browse (if possible) and connect from there.


All local connections will be lost!  Are you sure you want to dial Remote Network 'xxx'?
All local connections will be lost!  Are you sure you want to dial Remote Network ‘xxx’?

Meaning

You are about to dial a Remote Network and all your local Client connections will be lost.  You have the option to abort the dialup connection and remain connected to your local Clients, or disconnect from them and dial the remote site.


The actual throughput is low compared to the Connection Speed

Explanation:

Analysis of the actual throughput against the potential throughput (based on the Connection speed) shows it to be less than 90%% of optimum indicating a modem configuration or line problem.

Possible Causes:

1.	The Control and/or Bridge's PC to modem baud rate are too high causing data loss.

2.	Data compression is enabled and the resulting overhead is slowing NetSupport down.

3.	Flow control is incorrectly configured.

4.	Poor phone connection resulting in frequent retries.

Recommended Action:

1.	Set the PC to modem baud rate to one setting above the maximum connection speed.

2.	Make sure data compression is disabled for both modems

3.	Make sure RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control is enabled at both modems.

4.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


Cannot connect to more than nnn Clients

Meaning

You have reached the maximum number of concurrent connections for this network.  For Local LAN’s this is 255; when dialling into a NetSupport Bridge, this is 1.

Note: Network and machine resources may be exceeded before the 255 connection limit is reached on a Local LAN.

Suggestions

Disconnect from other Clients and try again.


Cannot execute 'xxx'
Cannot execute ‘xxx’

Meaning

NetSupport was unable to execute the MultiMedia player application.  Make sure the program is available and you have sufficient execute rights.


Cannot find window 'xxx', class 'xxx'
Cannot find window ‘xxx’, class ‘xxx’

Meaning

NetSupport was unable to locate the MultiMedia Window.  NetSupport uses this to communicate with the MultiMedia player.


MMPLAYER terminated unexpectedly

Meaning

The MultiMedia player closed down unexpectedly.  Check for any errors and try again.


Error opening modem log file 'xxx'
Error opening modem log file ‘xxx’

Meaning

This normally means that the Modem log file (modem.log in the NetSupport directory) does not exist; it will be created when you dial into a NetSupport Bridge with logging enabled.

Suggestions

If the file does in fact exist, check that you have sufficient rights to open and read this file and that it is not open in another application.


Name 'xxx' already in use (on NetBIOS adapter #nnn)

Meaning

When using NetBIOS, each Client and Control must use unique a name (but the same name can be used for both a Client and a Control).  If another machine is using the name you are trying to use on this machine, you will see this message on this machine.

Alternatively the NetSupport Control or Client may have previously shut down unexpectedly shut down, try restarting you computer to clear the error.

Suggestions

We recommend using the computer's ‘Machine Name’ (as set in Control Panel, Network, Identification) as the Control or Client name.


'xxx' is not configured correctly (xxx).
‘xxx’ is not configured correctly (xxx).

Meaning

There was a problem initialising the specified Network transport.

Suggestions

Use Control Panel, Network to check that the transport protocol in question is installed and configured correctly.


IPX network nnn is not responding

Meaning

There was an error communicating with the specified IPX network. The Control normally obtains a list of network numbers from the nearest NetWare file server or bridge.  On some networks, the list it returns is unreliable.  NetSupport reports the problem because, if left unresolved, it causes delays when browsing for IPX Clients.

Suggestions

You can tell the Control to ignore such network numbers by entering them in the Ignore Networks field in the Transport settings of the Configuration dialog; you can access this from the Network, Configure menu.

If a NetWare server on your LAN has been shut down recently try restarting the Control machine.


'xxx' error (adapter nnn), operation: nnnxH, code: nnnxH
‘xxx’ error (adapter nnn), operation: nnnxH, code: nnnxH

Meaning

An unexpected Network error has occurred.

Suggestions

Use Control Panel, Network to check that your machine's networking support is configured correctly.


Cannot contact 'xxx'
Cannot contact ‘xxx’

Meaning

There was no response from the NetSupport Bridge at the specified number. Make sure the Bridge is loaded on this machine and that you have the correct phone number.


'xxx' has disconnected, is not responding or has timed out
‘xxx’ has disconnected, is not responding or has timed out

Meaning

The specified Client has either disconnected, stopped responding or has timed out.  If there was a period of inactivity that exceeded the timeout specified on the Client machine, you should increase this value.

Suggestions

The Client machine has been turned off, has hung or the Client has been unloaded

The network has failed or excessive traffic has been generated to interfere with tickle packets

The Client has timed out

There was insufficient network resources to keep the connection alive

Tips

Check to make sure that the Client machine is reliable and applications that run on this machine do not utilise all the processor time.

Contact your network manager and see if anything can be done to remove bottlenecks or improve overall network performance.

Check the Inactivity Timeout on the Client machine to make sure that it is not disconnecting too soon after detecting the Control is missing.

Try configuring your network drivers to provide more resources for running applications.


Error deleting 'xxx'
Error deleting ‘xxx’

Meaning

The modem log file or modem definition file could not be deleted.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is not read only or open in another application, that the diskette is not write-protected,  and that you have sufficient rights to delete files.


Cannot load 'xxx'
Cannot load ‘xxx’

Meaning

There was an error loading the specified Transport DLL.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is in the NSM directory and you have sufficient rights to read it.


Cannot open 'xxx'
Cannot open ‘xxx’

Meaning

The specified file could not be opened.

Suggestions

Check that the file exists, and that you have permission to access it.  Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


File transfer disabled at Client 'xxx'
File transfer disabled at Client ‘xxx’

Meaning

The Client you are trying to perform a File Transfer operation on has been configured to reject any such operation.  This is done for security reasons and it can only be enabled at the Client machine.

Suggestions

Configure the Client to permit File Transfer Operations


Cannot communicate with the modem

Meaning

When NetSupport tried to communicate with the modem, one of the following happened:-

The modem is not turned on or has stopped responding

The modem is not connected to the correct communications port or is incorrectly cabled

The command strings for the currently selected modem do not correspond to the modem connected to your machine

The machine you are dialling did not answer


There are no printers installed on 'xxx' matching 'xxx'
There are no printers installed on ‘xxx’ matching 'xxx'

Meaning

In order to capture print output from the Client, the Client must have a printer driver installed that matches that requested by the Control.

For more details, see the Capture option in the configuration settings dialog.


Error reading file 'xxx'
Error reading file ‘xxx’

Meaning

The specified file could not be read.

Suggestions

Check that the file exists, and that you have permission to access it.  Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


Error renaming xxx to xxx

Meaning

The specified file could not be renamed; this also happens when updating files - they are saved to a temporary file first and then renamed in case the copy fails.

Suggestions

Check that the target file is not read-only and that you have sufficient rights to rename files. Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


You cannot save as 'xxx'; please choose another name.

Meaning

To avoid potential confusion, the settings for modem 'Hayes Compatible' cannot be changed.  Please save under a different name.


Client xxx does not respond

Meaning

The specified Client could not be connected to as it didn’t respond.

Suggestions

Check the Client machine is switched on and the NetSupport Client is loaded.

Make sure you are using the correct Network transport and address for the Client.

If the Client is using NetBIOS make sure you are using the same NetBIOS adapter on the Control.

If the Client is located over a Router or Bridge device make sure these are not filtering out packets or blocking ports.


Unable to connect to Client xxx

Meaning

You have tried to connect to a Client and the specified Client name could not be found on the Network.

Suggestions

Confirm the name of the Client machine you are connecting to, or perform a Browse to find the machine on the network.


Directory xxx not found

Meaning

You have specified a directory that could not be found.

Suggestions

Make sure you entered the directory name correctly and that you have the necessary access rights to it.


Error Reading Disk

Meaning

There was an error reading the specified disk.

Suggestions

Make sure there is media (diskette/CD) in the specified device or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


No Dialup Link Established

Meaning

An attempt to hang up the modem was made when it is not dialled.


Sorry, 'xxx' must be configured by editing CONTROL.MDM

Meaning

The settings for this modem cannot be edited from this dialog. Instead, you will have to modify them by editing the control.mdm file manually (this resides in the NSM directory).  See the contents of this file for more information.


Transport xxx is not enabled; to enable it, select 'Configure' from the 'Network' menu

Meaning

The Client you are trying to connect to is using a transport that is not enabled in the Control.

Suggestions

To enable the transport in the Control, select Configure from the Network Menu and check the transport boxes in the Transport settings.

Alternatively, reconfigure the Client and select a transport that is enabled in the Control.  Then perform a Browse to update the Controls icon for this Client.


Error writing file xxx

Meaning

The specified file could not be written.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is not read only or opened by another application and you have sufficient rights to write to files.  Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


Sorry, this is not supported on versions of Windows NT before 4.0.  Please refer to the help file for details on how to do this
Sorry, this is not supported on versions of Windows NT before 4.0.  Please refer to the help file for details on how to do this in Program Manager.

Meaning

You cannot create shortcuts using drag and drop on versions of NT older than 4.

To create Control Icons with different parameters manually see Creating Icons


Error nnn opening file xxx on xxx

Meaning

The file specified cannot be found, or cannot be opened.

Suggestions

Check that the file exists (unless you are writing to it), that you have sufficient rights to access it, and that it is not open in another application.  If the file is on a file server, the network connection may have failed.


The directory xxx on xxx already contains a file called xxx.

Meaning

You are about to overwrite a file that already exists.

This message can be suppressed by unchecking the Confirm File Overwrite box in the File Transfer option of the configuration settings dialog.

Checking the Overwrite All checkbox in this dialog will overwrite subsequent files without further prompting for this file transfer operation only.

System, hidden and read only files cannot be overwritten without confirming for each file. To copy a large number of such files, change the target files' attributes first, which you can do in a single operation.


Wrong Password

Meaning

You have supplied an incorrect password to a Client during the connection attempt.  The Client will reject your connection attempt until you supply the correct password.

Suggestions

Check to make sure you have spelt the password correctly.  NetSupport passwords are not case sensitive, so upper and lower case characters are treated the same.  Spaces are significant, however.


Another Program is currently using the specified communication device.

Meaning

Another program on this workstation is currently using the specified communication device.

Suggestion

Close all other programs and try again.


TCP/IP is not enabled, run the Configurator to enable it.

Meaning

TCP/IP is not enabled.

Suggestion

Edit the Advanced Client Configurator and enable it.


No Valid TAPI device Configured.

Meaning

No Valid TAPI device configured.

Suggestion

Configure the TAPI device in the {Settings - Dialin Bridge}.


TAPI Error

Meaning

An unexpected error has occurred with the TAPI device.

Suggestion

If this error message occurs please report the circumstances to your vendor.


Error nnn writing captured print output to xxx.

Meaning

The Control cannot send captured print data to the printer.

Suggestions

Check that the printer is online and configured correctly (from Settings, Printers in the Start menu).

You can display the printer currently being used for Print Capture, along with a list of printers installed, in the Capture option in the Configuration Settings dialog.


Using printer xxx for print capture on Client xxx

Meaning

This message reports the print driver in use at the Client when Print Capture is in effect.  Captured data must be sent to this type of printer (or a model with compatible control codes) in order to print correctly.

For more details, see the Capture option in the Configuration Settings dialog.


Do you want to check IPX network numbers?

Meaning

The IPX transport has been detected successfully and you can now interrogate the network for IPX network numbers.  If you press Yes, the nearest NetWare or NT server is contacted and all of the IPX network numbers it knows about are retrieved.

On some (typically, larger) networks the list returned contains some network numbers that don't respond.  We recommend telling NetSupport to ignore these because they cause delays when browsing for IPX Clients.


Done. See log file for results

Meaning

Your modem has been interrogated and the information returned is in file MODEM.LOG in the NSM directory.  You can view this file from the NSM DIALIN BRIDGE option in the Configuration Settings dialog.


Error nnn reading file xxx on xxx

Meaning

There was a problem reading the specified file.

Suggestions

Check that the file exists, and that you have permission to access it.  Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


Are you sure you want to reboot/logout the members of group 'xxx'?

Meaning

You must confirm the Reboot or Logout action for the Clients in the selected Group.  Any applications running on the Client machines may lose unsaved information because of this action.


Are you sure you want to reboot/logout the selected Clients?

Meaning

You must confirm the Reboot or Logout action for the selected Clients.  Any applications running on the Client machines may lose unsaved information because of this action.


Unable to receive 2KByte buffer from Bridge

Explanation:

A test of the flow control settings required by NetSupport failed indicating potential connection and/or performance problems.

Possible Causes:

The Bridge modem does not have RTS/CTS hardware flow control enabled resulting in buffer overrun.
The Bridge's PC to modem baud rate is too high causing data loss.

Poor cable connection between modem and PC.

Poor phone connection resulting in frequent retries.

Recommended Action:

Make sure RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control is enabled at both modems.

Set the PC to modem baud rate to one setting above the maximum connection speed.

Ensure both modems are using good quality, correctly wired serial cables.

Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


Client xxx rejected the link

Meaning

The Client you connected to rejected the connection attempt.  Either the user at the Client rejected the connection or you tried to connect to a Client using an invalid Security Key.

Suggestions

Remove User Acknowledgement from the Client machine if you regularly connect when there is no one at this machine, or ask the user at this machine to press Accept when the request is displayed.


You do not have sufficient rights to modify the Remote Networks List

Meaning

The Named Configuration you are currently using has the Remote Networks List set as read-only.  This means that you cannot modify the contents of this list.

Suggestions

Ask your  administrator to enable this feature for you, or ask them to make the necessary changes to the Remote Network list.


Are you sure you want to delete nnn selected Clients?

Meaning

You have selected one or more Clients from a list view and are about to delete them.  To prevent accidental deletion you must confirm the attempt by pressing Yes in this dialog box.

Suggestions

Make sure you really want to delete these Clients before continuing.


Are you sure you want to delete the group 'xxx'?

Meaning

If you proceed and delete the selected group, the members themselves are not deleted.  They remain in the  Known Client list so you can continue using them.  Only the Group 'container' is deleted.


Are you sure you want to delete Remote Network xxx?

Meaning

You are about to delete a Remote Network object and must confirm this action before continuing.  If you are currently dialed into the network, the connection will be hung up before the network is deleted.


Error nnn: Unable to remove directory xxx from xxx.  xxx

Meaning

You are trying to delete a directory on the local or a Client machine, and either the directory or drive is read-only.  The  numerical error code is displayed in the error message along with an interpretation of the error.

Suggestions

The directory may not be empty, or contain files that are read-only or op[en in another application.  Check also that you have sufficient access rights to the directory and the directory in which it resides, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


Error nnn renaming xxx to xxx on xxx

Meaning

An attempt to rename a file failed.  This can also occur when copying a file - the file is copied to a file called tempfile.$$$ and then renamed (to preserve the original file if the copy fails).

Suggestions

Check that you have sufficient access rights to the target file and directory, and that the file is not open in another application.


A file with this name already exists, please use a different name.

Meaning

You are trying to Rename a file and have supplied the name of an existing file.  This may also occur if you are copying a file from a long filename machine to a short filename machine, and the new short filename already exists.

Suggestions

Choose another filename that doesn’t already exist, or rename the long filename before copying it to the short filename system.


Reset list to default columns?

Meaning

This will restore columns displayed in the list, and their widths, to the default setting.


Cannot do xxx while the File Transfer window is open.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot perform the requested action while the File Transfer window for the Client in question is open.  To proceed, cancel any file copy in progress and close the File transfer window.

Suggestions

Pre-V4.00 Clients cannot perform View and File Transfer operations concurrently.  Ensure that an up-to-date version of the NetSupport Client is installed on the Client machine.  OS/2 and DOS Clients cannot perform View and File Transfer operations concurrently.


Cannot do xxx on Client xxx while you are Showing to it

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot perform the requested action while a Show is in progress or suspended.  To proceed, select Tools, Show from the menu and end the Show.


Cannot do xxx on Client xxx while you are Viewing it.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot perform the requested action while the View  window for the Client in question is open.  To proceed, cancel any file copy in progress and close the View  window.

Suggestions

Pre-V4.00 Clients cannot perform View and File Transfer operations concurrently.  Ensure that an up-to-date version of the NetSupport Client is installed on the Client machine.  OS/2 and DOS Clients cannot perform View and File Transfer operations concurrently.


xxx is in use by another program or window

Meaning

The Control is unable to use the specified communications port as another application is currently using it.  This may also occur if you are running another copy of the NetSupport Control that has dialled a Remote Network , or if the NetSupport Bridge is running on this machine.

Suggestions

Shut down any applications or NT services that may be taking control of the communications port.  If you are running the NetSupport Bridge, you can unload it from the Bridge's (or Client's) Command menu.


xxx is not a valid serial port (use com1 - com4); dial up support not available.

Meaning

An invalid serial port has been specified in the  NSM Dialin Bridge settings.

Suggestions

Select Settings, Control Panel, System, Device Manager from the Start menu to check the valid ports on your machine.


Sorry, Dialup is not available on xxx; please use RAS instead
Sorry, Dialup is not available on TCP/IP; please use RAS instead

Meaning

NetSupport does not support dialup over TCP/IP.  This problem will be rectified in a future release.

Suggestions

Use another protocol, or, if dialling into a machine running Windows NT, set it up as a RAS server (by installing the Remote Access Service from Settings, Control Panel, Networks from the Start menu).


Unable to send 2KByte buffer to Bridge

Explanation:

A test of the flow control settings required by NetSupport failed indicating potential connection and/or performance
problems.

Possible Causes:

1.	The Control modem does not have RTS/CTS hardware flow control enabled resulting in buffer overrun.

2.	The Control's PC to modem baud rate is too high causing data loss.

3.	Poor cable connection between modem and PC.

4.	Poor phone connection resulting in frequent retries.

Recommended Action:

1.	Make sure RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control is enabled at both modems.

2.	Set the PC to modem baud rate to one setting above the maximum connection speed.

3.	Ensure both modems are using good quality, correctly wired serial cables.

4.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


There was no response from the Bridge!

Explanation

The modems were able to negotiate a connection but NetSupport was not able to establish a software connection.

Possible Causes

1.	A NetSupport Bridge isn't running on the remote computer.- The Control's PC to modem baud rate is too high causing data loss.

2.	Wrong modem type selected at Control or Client computer.

3.	Modems incorrectly configured or incompatible - refer to modem manuals for further help

Recommended Action

1.	Make sure the Bridge is running on the remote computer.

2.	Set the PC to modem baud rate to one setting above the maximum connection speed.

3.	Check that the correct modems are selected.

4.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


Sent nnn x nnn byte packets in nnn msec = nnn bytes/sec

Meaning

This message is displayed on completion of the 'Test Network' command.  It gives an indication of the network performance obtained when communicating with the Client.  Figures below 100k bytes per second for the Send test and 50k bytes per second for the Echo test will adversely affect NetSupport's performance.


Sequence error receiving data from Client; expected: nnn, actual nnn

Meaning

While testing the connection to a Client, data was received in a different order to that in which is was sent.  NetSupport caters for this under NetBIOS, but if you see this error under TCP/IP you need to find out what is causing it and correct it.


Sequence error sending data to Client; expected: nnn, actual nnn

Meaning

While testing the connection to a Client, data was received in a different order to that in which is was sent.  NetSupport caters for this under NetBIOS, but if you see this error under TCP/IP you need to find out what is causing it and correct it.


Cannot read file xxx (nnn).  Please check this file exists and is valid.

Meaning

Your license file (NSM.LIC) is missing or invalid.

Suggestions

If you have a valid file available, copy it to your NSM directory.  If not, and you have a valid authorisation certificate or wish to run the software for a 30-day evaluation period, reinstall NetSupport, taking care to enter the information on the authorisation certificate exactly as supplied.  You obtain an authorisation certificate when you purchase the software.


Error nnn: Unable to set attributes for file 'xxx' on xxx
Error nnn: Unable to set attributes for file 'xxx’ on xxx

Meaning

An attempt to set the attributes for the file failed.

Suggestions

Check that the target file exists, that you have sufficient access rights to file and directory in which it resides, and that the file is not open in another application.


The time for the Bridge to respond seems excessive

Explanation:

Analysis of the NetSupport Bridge response times indicates that this connection will NOT achieve the expected throughput.

Possible Causes:

1.	Data compression maybe enabled in the modems.- Modems incorrectly configured or incompatible - refer to modem manuals for further help

2.	Poor phone connection resulting in frequent retries.

3.	This is an international (Satellite) phone line

Recommended Action:

1.	Make sure data compression is disabled for both modems.

2.	Check that the correct modems are selected.

3.	Correct any problems and redial the Bridge.


The Connection speed is greater than the PC to Modem baud rate

Explanation:

The effective throughput is being reduced by the PC to modem baud rate. It may also cause loss of data and/or connection if the modems run out of buffer space.

Possible Causes:

You have selected a baud rate lower than the rate of which these modems can connect

The modems are not configured to restrict the modem to modem speed to be less than or equal to the PC to modem baud rate.

Recommended Action:

Make sure that the baud rate set at the Control and Bridge is one setting higher than the maximum modem connection speed.

Restrict DCE speed to less than or equal to DTE speed. Refer to your modems manual.

NOTE: This also applies to the NetSupport Bridge but cannot be checked at this end.


Error in file xxx, line nnn

Meaning

There is an error in your control.mdm file.  This may occur if you hand-edit the file.

Suggestions

Edit the file to fix the problem  (the file itself contains a description if its internal format), or restore the file from the NSM release disk, using the EXPAND utility supplied, e.g.:

cd \NSM

expand a:\control.md_ control.mdm


Warning: xxx is too long to display it all.

Meaning

The file you are trying to view is too long to be displayed.  NetSupport can handle a maximum of 30k bytes.

Suggestions

Transfer the file to a working directory the Control machine and view it with notepad or wordpad.


Client xxx unavailable (in graphics mode or logged off)

Meaning

You are trying to send a Show to a Client that is running a full-screen DOS graphics application, or an NT Client that is not logged in.

Suggestions

Either exclude this Client from the Show or (if the Client is an NT Client) ask the user at the Client machine to log it on (or take Control of the machine and log it on yourself).


Error nnn writing file xxx on xxx

Meaning

The specified file could not be written.

Suggestions

Make sure the file is not read only or opened by another application and you have sufficient rights to write to files.  Check also for media errors, especially on floppy disks and CD's, or a network connection to a file server may have failed.


xxx has wrong version of CLIENT installed

Meaning

The version of the NetSupport Client installed on the target machine is not compatible with this version of the NetSupport Control.

Suggestions

Update the Client on the target machine or try running the corresponding (older) version of the NetSupport Control on this machine.


Are you sure you want to send Ctrl+Alt+Delete to Clients xxx?

Meaning

Only Windows NT Clients respond to this command (by displaying the Windows NT Security dialog).


You cannot connect to a Client while Show is running or Suspended.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot connect to a Client while a Show is in progress or suspended.  To proceed, select Tools, Show from the menu and end the Show.


Error nnn: Unable to delete file xxx from xxx.

Meaning

There was an error deleting the file from the specified machine.

Suggestion

Make sure the file is not read only or open in another application, that the diskette is not write-protected,  and that you have sufficient rights to delete files.


Dial another Remote Network?

Meaning

Your attempt to dial a remote network failed.  You can opt to dial again, or to switch to working on the local network.


Dial Remote Network xxx and connect to Client xxx?

Meaning

The Client to which you wish to connect resides on a remote network, which requires NetSupport to dial the Bridge at that site in order to make the connection.  You will lose your connections to Clients on the local network if you opt to do this.


Application xxx ran successfully at Client xxx

Meaning

The application you ran at the Client was executed successfully.   Note that this does not necessarily mean that the application completed successfully - just that it started up OK.


Enter the directory to go to!

Meaning

You can type a directory name in this box to position the directory tree in the left-hand pane to the directory in question.


You are currently connected to Remote Network xxx. Do you want to Hang-up? and connect to local Client xxx?

Meaning

The Client to which you wish to connect resides on the local network, but you are currently dialled into a  Remote Network .  NetSupport needs to hang-up the phone (and disconnect from the currently connected Client) to connect to Clients on the local network.

Note: All Remote connections will be lost.


All Connections will be lost on Remote Network xxx. Are you sure you want to Hang-up?

Meaning

You are trying to disconnect from a Remote Network and you are being asked for confirmation before this is done.  Any Clients that you are connected to on the Remote Network will be disconnected.


Configuration xxx not found.

Meaning

The  Named Configuration you have specified when creating a Control icon does not exist (or no longer exists).

Suggestions

Select Configure from the Network menu, choose startup, and open the  Icons dialog.  Then drag the offending icon from the desktop to this dialog to edit it.


There is no disk in drive xxx on xxx.

Meaning

You have tried to access a floppy drive or CD-ROM drive that does not have a disk in it.

Suggestions

Insert the relevant media into the specified drive and try the operation again.


You cannot perform a Scan while Show is suspended. End the Show and try again.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot perform a Scan  while a Show is in progress or suspended.  To proceed, select Tools, Show from the menu and end the Show.


You cannot perform a Show while a Scan is running. Close down the Scan and try again.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot perform a Show while the Scan window is open.  Close the Scan window and try again.


Not a valid NetSupport Replay File

Meaning

The file you have selected is not a valid Replay file.  The file either has become corrupted or is not a NetSupport Replay file.

Suggestions

Check the file and location to make sure that it is a valid NetSupport Replay file.


You cannot modify a Clients status during Show. End the Show and try again.

Meaning

The NetSupport Control cannot include or exclude a Client while a Show is in progress or suspended.  To proceed, select Tools, Show from the menu and end the Show.


Warning: xxx is not a text file. Edit it anyway - data will be lost?

Meaning

The file you are about to edit does not appear to be a plain text file.  If you proceed and edit this file, the contents may be unreadable and the result will be a truncated file.

Suggestions

Transfer the file to a working directory the Control machine and open it with it’s associated application.


The NetSupport Bridge is using the modem. Do you want to unload it while making this call?

Meaning

You are trying to dial a Remote Network whilst running a  NetSupport Bridge on this machine.  Only one program can use the modem connection at a time.  If you want to proceed NetSupport can unload the Bridge whilst you make the call.  The Bridge is then loaded again after the call is complete.

Suggestions

You can unload the NetSupport Bridge if it is not being used.


Connection Failed. Do you want to remain connected to Remote Network xxx?

Meaning

This Named Configuration dials a Remote Network at start up and connects to a Client.  This Client was not available on the Remote Network and you have the option to remain dialled up or hang-up the phone.

Suggestions

You can alter the Startup settings to specify a different Client name to connect to.  You can browse for Clients on the Remote Network while you are connected it.


There is another Remote Network called xxx. Please choose a different name.

Meaning

You are attempting to create or rename a Remote Network object and have supplied the name of an existing Remote Network.  You cannot proceed using the name supplied.

Suggestions

You must supply a different Remote Network name, or cancel the operation.


Are you sure you want to send Ctrl+Alt+Delete to the selected Clients?

Meaning

Only Windows NT Clients respond to this command (by displaying the Windows NT Security dialog).


Warning: xxx is too long, edit is anyway - data will be lost?

Meaning

The file you are about to edit is too large (more than 30K bytes) for the internal editor.  If you proceed with this action, the file will be truncated and data will be lost.

Suggestions

Transfer the file to a working directory on the Control machine and view it with notepad or wordpad.


One of the directories for Synchronisation is a root directory. Are you sure you want to Synchronise xxx and xxx?

Meaning

You are about to synchronise a root directory, which is a potentially destructive operation, as it will overwrite any files / subdirectories which are newer on one machine than on the other (and vice-versa).  You have been warned!


Drive xx on xxx is write protected.

Meaning

The specified drive at the specified location is write protected and cannot be written to.

Suggestions

Make sure that the drive is write-enabled if it is a floppy disk.  Also, make sure you have sufficient access rights to write to a shared network drive.


Error opening File xxx.

Meaning

The file specified cannot be found, or cannot be opened.

Suggestions

Check that the file exists, that you have sufficient rights to access it, and that it is not open in another application.  If the file is on a file server, the network connection may have failed.


No Files specified! You must specify at least one File to import.

Meaning

Please select one or more files from the list.


Import Complete!

Meaning

This message provides a summary of the results of importing the file(s) specified.  The figures displayed should correspond to the contents of the file(s).


Specify the Transport for the Client List File xxx.

Meaning

NetSupport needs to know the transport protocol being used by the Clients in the specified file.  You can change individual Client icons by hand after the import completes, if required.


Directory xxx does not contain a NetSupport WCONTROL.ini File.

Meaning

NetSupport reads the wcontrol.ini file to obtain a list of CLF/GLF files to import.  This file resides in your WINDOWS directory.

If you no longer have this file, leave the box blank and NetSupport will build a list of files in the specified directory.  You will then have to enter the transport protocol for each file you elect to import.


Bad Audio Format

Meaning

You have selected an Audio Format that is either unsupported or not available on your workstation.

Solution.

Select a different format from the {Settings}{Audio}{Transmission Format}.. Note that NetSupport will only support 8 bit data transmission rates.


Audio Error

Meaning

A problem has occurred with your Audio system.

Solution

Check that audio support is installed in Windows.

Check that your Audio settings in {Settings}{Audio}{Transmission Format}.. Note that NetSupport will only support 8 bit data transmission rates.


Audio Hardware Error

Meaning

An unknown problem has occurred with your audio hardware.

Solution

Check that your audio hardware is properly installed and running.


Audio already in Use

Meaning

You are trying to use the audio functions in NetSupport but your audio system is already in use by another system.

Solution

End the other application and try again.


Invalid Background

Meaning

You are trying to save a background for use with a saved layout but the file you have chosen is not in the correct format.

Solution

Choose a different file for the background making sure that it is a BMP file of less than 24 bits.


Invalid Directory

Meaning

The directory you have chosen in the path is invalid.

Solution

Enter a valid directory.


Invalid name

Meaning

The name you have chosen for a description is invalid or contains invalid characters such * ? etc.

Solution

Choose a valid name.


File Transfer NOT available.

Meaning

You are trying to use File transfer but it is not available, either because it has been disabled at the Client or is not in your Profile.

Solution.

Enable File Transfer


Cannot include/exclude a Client during a Show/Scan

Meaning

You are trying to change the include/exclude status of a Client whilst you are showing or scanning it.

Solution

End the show or scan, then make the change.


Error Creating File

Meaning

You are trying to create a File, but do not have sufficient rights.

Solution

Login as a user with the required access rights and try again.


Wrong Product

Meaning.

You are trying to connect to a NetSupport School Client from a NetSupport Manager Control. You can not do this.

Solution

Install full NetSupport Manager Clients.

Note: You can run a NetSupport School Control with NetSupport Manager Clients.


Client not installed on this Machine

Meaning

You are running the Client Configurator, but have not installed a Client on this workstation.

Solution

Install a NetSupport Manager Client.


Waiting for User Acknowledgement

Meaning

The Control is trying to connect to a Client that has been configured for User Acknowledgement.

Solution

The User at the Client must either accept or reject the link, before access is granted.


There was an error executing the User Defined Tool

Meaning

You have been unsuccessful in launching selected Defined Tool.

Suggestions

1.	Check that the path of your defined tool is correct.

2.	Check that the tool you are attempting to launch is available.

3.	Check that you have sufficient security rights to launch this tool.


The User Defined Tool was not found

Meaning

The Defined Tool you have chosen to launch, could not be found.

Suggestions

Check that the launch path of the Defined Tool is correct and that the tool you are attempting to launch is available.


User has run a User Defined Tool and wishes to terminate it.

Meaning

You are currently running a Defined Tool, but want to terminate it before completion.

Suggestion

1.	Choose Yes, if you wish to stop the application before it completes. Note: This could result in data loss.

2.	Choose No, to continue and complete the application.

3.	If you wish to run the application and be able to utilise your workstation, uncheck the ‘Wait for Program to Finish’ box.


The Configurator was unable to write some information to the Registry.

Meaning

The current Control Profile was unable to write some information to the Registry.

Suggestion

Check the Controls profile settings, does it have sufficient security rights?

1.	Choose {Tools}{Configurations- select the correct Profile}{Settings}

2.	Adjust the necessary settings. For example: Check the box Act as an Administrator in the User Interface settings.

3.	Choose OK, then close, to save all changes made to that Profile.


Valid Usernames for xx Profile
Valid Usernames for xxx Profile

This is a list of Usernames associated with this profile.

When a Control connects it will be prompted for a Username and Password. The Client will search through its profiles until it finds a matching Username. It will then apply all the settings for that profile to the subsequent Control session.

Both the Username and its encrypted password are displayed. The User at the Control must enter the unencrypted password.

An Asterisk denotes a wildcard, so a Control User can enter any Username.

Note: If this is an NT workstation and you have elected to use the NT Security option to validate the Control Users ID and password then you do not need to specify the Username and Password. However, you may still wish to set this option to provide an additional filter when using NT Security validation to restrict access to particular NT Users and determine which Client profile they will use.


Valid NT Groups for Profile

These are the NT Groups Known to this workstation. Select the ones that you require NetSupport to authenticate that the Control User is a member of, before allowing the connection.

You can manually add a Group if you know the full path.


Reset Send/Collect Log

This will clear the log of the details of when the task was last run.


Password on Bridge

This dialog displays the Passwords and Dialback numbers setup for this Bridge. Press Edit to change an existing entry, or Add to create a new one.


Send/Collect Work - File with that name has already been added.

Meaning

The Send/Collect Work feature already contains a file with this name.

Suggestion

Rename the file and try again.


The Transport DLL(s) are older than the NetSupport Control version.

Meaning

The Transport DLL(s) (ipctl32.dll, tcctl32.dll and nbctlax.dll) are older than the installed NetSupport Control version.

Suggestion

Reinstall NetSupport or contact your vendor for an update solution.


Send/Collect Work - Tried to create a new Send/Collect Work operation, but the description has already been used.

Meaning

Tried to create a new Send/Collect Work operation, but the description is already in used by another Send/Collect Work operation.

Suggestion

Rename your new Send/Collect Work operation, or delete the old operation and try again.


The Control is not responding.

Meaning

The Control workstation you are trying to connect to is either not on or refusing your connection attempt.

Suggestion

Attempt to connect to another Control workstation or contact the User(s) of the Control workstation, using Request Help, and advise them of your need to connect.


Print Capture has been disabled at the Client workstation.

Meaning

Your attempt to capture the print cycle of the Client workstation has failed as Print Capture is disabled in the Clients Configurator.

Suggestion

Enable Print Capture at the Client.


Client xxx cannot be powered on as there is no valid MAC address stored.

Meaning

You cannot Power On a Client workstation unless their MAC address is stored.

Suggestion

1.	Click No, this will cancel the Power On command. Manually set the MAC address in the Client Properties dialog by right clicking on the Client icon in the Control Window List View and selecting Properties – Details tab.

2.	Click No, this will cancel the Power On command. Choose {School}{Modify Known List} from the Control Window drop down menu. Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to in the text box and click Browse. NetSupport will browse for all Available Clients, dynamically finding their MAC addresses and storing it in the Client Properties – Details tab.

3.	Click Yes to continue Powering On the remaining Client workstations.


There are no Clients stored to Wake Up.

Meaning

You cannot Power On a Client workstation unless their MAC address is stored.

Suggestion

Choose {School}{Modify Known List} from the Control Window drop down menu. Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to in the text box and click Browse. NetSupport will browse for all Available Clients, dynamically finding their MAC addresses and storing it in the Client Properties – Details tab.


There are no machines defined.

Meaning

At Startup, the Control could not find any Client machines in the Known Client List.

Suggestion

To Add a Client to the Known List, click Yes. Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to in the text box and click Browse. NetSupport will browse for all Available Clients and display their icons in the Available Students List. Select the Client icons and click Add. The selected Client icons will appear in the Known List.


Define a list of Students that are connected to at startup.

Meaning

At Startup you are configured to Browse and Connect to Clients, therefore you do not have a list of Known Clients. Having a list of Known Clients will simplify future Client connections.

Suggestion

To define a Known Client List, click Yes. The Modify Known List dialog will appear. Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to at Startup in the text box and click Browse. NetSupport will browse for all Available Clients and display their icons in the Available Students List. Select the Client icons and click Add. The selected Client icons will appear in the Known List. At Startup, all Known Clients will be automatically connected to.


The file SYSINFO.SCP is missing

Meaning

You have selected Update in order to retrieve a Hardware and Software Inventory for the connected Client. The file SYSINFO.SCP is called in order to interrogate the Client machine and return the information.

The error has been returned because NetSupport has been unable to run SYSINFO.SCP.

Suggestion

Check the Program Files folder where NetSupport is installed to see if the file is there. It may have been renamed, moved or deleted.

If the file cannot be found, reinstall NetSupport.


There are no Clients stored to Wake Up

Meaning

You cannot Power On a Client workstation unless their MAC address is stored.

Suggestion

Choose {School}{Modify Known List} from the Control Window drop down menu. Enter a prefix for the Computer Names of the Client workstations you want to connect to in the text box and click Browse. NetSupport will browse for all Available Clients, dynamically finding their MAC addresses and storing it in the Client Properties – Details tab.


Student Is Already A Group Leader

Meaning

A Client can only be leader of one group at a time.

Suggestion

Click Yes to make them Leader of this Group.

Click No to cancel this action. The Client will remain Leader of the other Group.


Group Already Has A Leader

Meaning

A Group can only have one Leader.

Suggestion

Click Yes to make this Client the new Group Leader.

Click No to cancel this action. The current Group leader will remain in place.


Required Group Leader Files Are Missing

Meaning

You have tried to make this Client a Group Leader but the required Group Leader files are not available.

If you are running a pre Version 5 NetSupport School Student program, the files which support the Group Leader feature will not have been installed or an error has occurred while installing the Student program.

Suggestion

To ensure the correct files are available, install/re-install the Version 5 Student program.


Cannot Add An Existing Group Leader To Another Group

Meaning

Although Clients can be a member of more than one group, you cannot add them while they are Group Leader of another group.

Suggestion

If you still want to add them to this group, you must first of all remove them as Group Leader from their existing group.

To Remove Group Leader Rights

1.	Select the group that the Client is currently leading.

2.	Right click on the Client icon and choose Group Leader.

or,

Choose {Client}{Group Leader} from the Control Window drop down menu.

You can now add the Client to the required group, and if still required, you can reinstate them as Group Leader of the other group by following the process above.


Cannot View Client While Show In Progress

Meaning

The Client you are trying to View is currently performing a Show to the Group it is leading. You cannot continue until the Show has ended.

Suggestion

To be able to View the Client, choose Yes to temporarily suspend the Show that is being performed. When you stop Viewing, the Group Leader rights will be automatically reinstated.


Cannot Change Group Members When Group Leader Is Present

Meaning

A group that has a Group Leader cannot have Clients added or removed.

Suggestion

To be able to add or delete Clients you must first of all remove the Group Leader rights.

To Remove Group Leader Rights

1.	Select the group containing the Group Leader.

2.	Right click on the Group Leaders icon and choose Group Leader.

or,

Choose {Client}{Group Leader} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Change the group members as required. To reinstate the Group Leader, follow the process above.


Group Already Has Leader

Meaning

You cannot make this Client Group Leader because the group is already being led.

Suggestion

Click Yes to change the Group Leader.

Click No to leave the existing Group Leader in place.


NetSupport Client Not Installed

Meaning

A ‘Class’ cannot be created if the NetSupport Client component is not installed on the Tutor machine.

Suggestion

Install the NetSupport Client component.


Must Specify Gateway Address

By checking the Use HTTP box, you have indicated that connections to and from this Client will be made via a NetSupport Gateway. In order to proceed you must specify:

1.	The IP address of the workstation where the Gateway is installed.

2.	A Gateway Key for added protection against unwanted connection attempts. The same key must be specified at the Control, and gateway end.


Starting the Installation

Insert the NetSupport CD.

The NetSupport Welcome menu will automatically appear when you insert the CD. (If it does not, access the CD-ROM drive from your workstation and run SETUP.EXE.)

Notes:

•	If you are upgrading Windows NT to Windows 2000/XP or 2000 to XP, you must ensure that you de-install NetSupport prior to upgrading the operating system. NetSupport can then be re-installed once the operating system upgrade has been completed.

•	If you are installing to an NT/2000/XP workstation or server, make sure that you are logged in as an Administrator.

Selecting a Set-up Type

Choose NetSupport School for the required language variant. This will start the install program.

Next Step

NetSupport School v8 Installer Program


NetSupport School v8 Installer Program

NetSupport School Setup Program

The Setup program Welcome screen will appear.

Please read the information on the screen carefully, before proceeding with the installation.

Click Next to continue.

NetSupport Licence Agreement

The NetSupport Licence Agreement will be displayed. Please read the License Agreement carefully and select I Agree and click Next to continue.

If you reject the Licence Agreement, (I Disagree) click Cancel. NetSupport School will not be installed and you will be directed to Exit from the install program.

Licence Information

Enter the licence details as provided with your NetSupport product.

If you are evaluating NetSupport, simply enter EVAL in the Licensee field and leave all other fields unchanged.

Existing Installation Detected

Select Installation Type


Existing Installation Detected

This screen will appear if a copy of NetSupport is already installed on the workstation.

You can choose to:

•	Overwrite the existing installation.

Select this option if you want to install the new version of NetSupport in the same folder as the existing installation. Although this overwrites the existing program, configuration files (.ini, .nss, .nsm, .lyt) containing details of known Clients, groups, classroom layouts etc will be retained.

•	Install in a new folder and keep your existing settings.

Select this option, to retain the existing installation in its current folder. When prompted, you will need to choose a different folder for the new installation.  The existing configuration files will be copied to the new location.

•	Create a new installation.

Installs the new version of NetSupport in the required folder but does not retain existing configuration files. If installing in a different folder, the existing version will remain on the workstation, you may want to manually delete these files after the workstation has restarted.

Select the required option and click Next.

Select Installation Type


Select Installation Type

Select the component(s) to install on the workstation.

Student

Install this component, sometimes called the Client, on workstations that will be remote controlled. By installing this component, you are enabling a Tutor machine to establish a link with the Student. The range of features available to students are limited to those that enable them to communicate with the teacher, for example sending a help request.

Tutor

This component, sometimes called the Control, should be installed on workstations which will be used to remote control other PCs. It gives teachers access to NetSupport’s full range of features, for example, viewing student screens and showing their screen to students.

Selecting this component will also install a Portable Tutor folder, this allows you to run the Tutor from a portable device such as USB Pen Drive, Memory Stick or Flash Drive. For further information please visit www.netsupportsoftware.com/support and refer to Technical Document Running NetSupport School Tutor from a Portable Device (TD496).

Note:	If you need the flexibility of allowing other machines to view this one, you can also install the Student component.

Install Configurator Component

The NetSupport Client Configurator is used to customise the Student set up at each workstation. For example, setting the Transport to be used, allocating a Student name and setting security.

When you choose the Student component you will also be given the option of installing the Client Configurator. The advantage of installing this at the Student machine is that it makes it easier to make changes to the settings in the future. The disadvantage is that the Students themselves could unwittingly access the option and make changes.

Uncheck this box if you do not want to install the component, you can still configure the Student machine by running the Client Configurator at a later stage of this installation.

Remote Deployment Utility (NT/2000 Only)

The Remote Deploy Utility enables you to perform multiple NetSupport installations without the need to visit each individual workstation.

Destination Folder

By default, NetSupport will be installed in the folder C:\Program Files\NetSupport School. If you want to install in a different folder, click Browse.

Click Next when ready to continue.

Completing The Installation


Completing The Installation

Start Installation

To start the installation, click Next. To change any of the previous selections, click Back. To quit the installation, click Cancel.

Note:	If you have elected to install a Client (Student), Set-up will make the required amendments to your System.INI and or registry, to load the Client as Windows initialises.  NetSupport will not replace any of your existing Drivers.

Installation Complete

To complete the installation:

•	Choose whether to create a desktop icon for the Control (Tutor) to enable easy access to the Tutor program.

•	Choose whether to run the Client Configurator. This enables you to set basic Client information and security.

Click Finish to exit the Setup program. Remove the CD and restart the workstation.


NetSupport Deploy

The NetSupport Deploy Utility provides Network Administrators with the facility to install and configure NetSupport on multiple workstations without the need to visit the machines individually.

You are provided with a view of your Network, allowing you to pick and choose, which workstations you want to deploy to.

Note:	NetSupport Deploy is currently only supported on Windows XP, 2000 and NT workstations.

With NetSupport Deploy you can:

•	Remotely Install a NetSupport package on multiple workstations simultaneously.

•	Create and download specific Client Configurations to multiple workstations.

•	Remotely update NetSupport License details on multiple workstations.

•	Remotely Uninstall a NetSupport package from multiple workstations simultaneously.

See

NetSupport Deploy - Getting Started

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.

System Pre-Requisites


NetSupport Deploy - Getting Started

Installing the Deploy Utility

When installing NetSupport you decide which combination of components to include. To install NetSupport Deploy, select the Remote Deployment Utility along with any other components you require.

Note:	NetSupport Deploy is currently only supported on Windows XP, 2000 and NT workstations.

Planning

NetSupport Deploy is a powerful utility that makes installing NetSupport packages on multiple workstations a quick and easy process. However, while we endeavour to ensure that there are no limitations or incompatibility issues in the use of the software, it is recommended that a trial deploy is performed on a small number of workstations to ensure there are no conflicts with other similar products such as remote control or desktop security packages. In addition, for added security and protection you must have appropriate administrator rights for the machines you are deploying to.

Starting NetSupport Deploy

1.	Select NetSupport Deploy from your NetSupport Program Group.

2.	The NetSupport Deploy Main Window will appear.

See

Preparing a deployment


NetSupport Deploy Main Window

The Deploy Main Window is divided into the following sections:

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities for the deploy process.

Left Hand Pane

Contains three tabs, Network, Log Files and Security.

Network and Security Tabs

List, in a Tree View, the available Networks, Domains and Workgroups that can be selected for a deploy routine.

Log Files Tab

Lists, in a Tree View, a history of previous deployments.

Right Hand Pane

With the Network Tab selected, you are provided with a range of general information, machine name and platform for example, about the workstations located on the selected Network/Domain.

The Log Files Tab provides a breakdown of past deployments categorised by type.

The Security Tab also lists information specific to each individual workstation located on the chosen Network/Domain. In addition to the machine name, you will be able to identify the IP Address, determine if the machine already has a NetSupport Client installed and which version is running, whether the Client is password protected or has User Acknowledgement set. With this information to hand you can decide in advance which machines to include or exclude from the forthcoming deployment. For example, if a current NetSupport Client is already installed at some of the workstations you might choose to ignore it.

See also

NetSupport Deploy

NetSupport Deploy - Getting Started

Deploy - Preparing a deployment


Deploy - Preparing a deployment

Choosing Who To Deploy To:

1.	From the Main Window select the Network or Security tab.

2.	A list of available Networks, Domains and Workgroups will appear in the left hand pane. Expand or reduce the tree list by clicking on + or -.

Note:  You can also deploy to specific IP Ranges by adding the appropriate address range to the tree. Select {Tools}{Add IP Domain} from the Menu Bar.

3.	Highlight the required group.

4.	The names of the workstations belonging to the selected group will appear in the right hand pane.

5.	Select the workstations to include in the deploy routine. (You can use CTRL-Click or SHIFT-Click). Before deciding to include or exclude a workstation, you can view its properties by right clicking on the machine name.

Choosing What To Deploy:

You can choose:

 NetSupport Package.

 Client Configuration.

 NetSupport License File.

 Uninstall NetSupport.

See also

NetSupport Deploy - Main Window

NetSupport Deploy - Getting Started

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.


Deploy a NetSupport Package

With the required workstations selected:

1.	Choose {Deploy}{NetSupport Package} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.

or,

Right click on the selected workstations and choose Deploy - NetSupport Package.

2.	The Deploy Summary dialog will appear.

This dialog provides a summary of the options you have selected for the deployment.  If a first time deployment, the text will appear in red to indicate that required information has not been entered. To enter or amend the information for the deployment, Click Properties.

3.	The Install Properties dialog will appear. Enter the properties for the deployment by selecting the five tabs in turn.

General tab

Options Tab

Acknowledgement Tab

Message Tab

Restart Tab

4.	When you have completed all five tabs, click OK to return to the Deploy Summary dialog. You can review your selections and edit if required.

5.	Click Deploy to commence the installation. A progress dialog will appear, enabling you to monitor the deployment as it installs on each workstation. The dialog has two tabs:

Log tab enables you to monitor the deployment as it reaches each workstation.

Status tab lists the stage the deployment has reached on each workstation. For example, the installation may be complete on one machine but still in progress on another.

6. 	Click Close to return to the Deploy Main Window when the installation is complete.

Note:	If you Close while the deployment is in progress, the installation will continue but the Log will not be updated.

See also

Deploy - Preparing a deployment

Deploy a Client Configuration

Deploy a NetSupport License File

Deploy - Remote Uninstall

Deploy - Log Files

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.


Deploy a Client Configuration

Using NetSupport Deploy, you can remotely deploy a Client Configuration file containing specific Client settings.

1.	Select the required workstations.

2.	Choose {Deploy}{Client Configuration} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.

or,

Right click on the selected workstations and choose Deploy-Client Configuration.

3.	The Deploy Summary dialog will appear.

4.	Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment.

5.	Click Browse to specify the folder containing the Client Configuration file that is to be deployed. The default configuration file is CLIENT32.INI and is stored in the NetSupport installation directory.

6.	Click Edit to access the Client Configurator in order to make changes to the Configuration file.

7.	For the new settings to take effect immediately, by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment. If not required, uncheck the Restart the NetSupport Client service box.

8.	Click OK to return to the Summary dialog. You can view the contents of the configuration file by clicking on the file name.

9.	Click Deploy. A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the status of the deployment.

10.	Click Close when complete.

See also

Deploy - Preparing a deployment

Deploy a NetSupport Package

Deploy a NetSupport License File

Deploy - Remote Uninstall

Configuring Clients

Deploy - Log Files

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.


Deploy a NetSupport License File

When installing a NetSupport package, a license file is sent to each workstation. However, there may be occasions when the license information needs updating. For example, you have purchased additional licenses and the license file needs updating to reflect this. By using NetSupport Deploy you can remotely update the file on user workstations.

1.	Select the required workstations.

2.	Choose {Deploy}{NetSupport License file} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.

or,

Right click on the selected workstations and choose Deploy-NetSupport License file.

3.	The Deploy Summary dialog will appear.

4.	Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment.

5.	Click Browse to specify the folder containing the license file that is to be deployed. The default file is NSM.LIC.

6.	For the new settings to take effect immediately, by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment. If not required, uncheck the Restart the NetSupport Client service box.

7.	Click OK to return to the Summary dialog. You can view the contents of the license file by clicking on the file name.

8.	Click Deploy. A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the status of the deployment.

9.	Click Close when complete.

See also

NetSupport Licensing

Deploy - Preparing a deployment

Deploy a NetSupport Package

Deploy a Client Configuration

Deploy - Remote Uninstall

Deploy - Log Files

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.


Deploy - Remote Uninstall

Using NetSupport Deploy you can remotely uninstall a NetSupport package.

1.	Select the required workstations.

2.	Choose {Deploy}{Uninstall NetSupport} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.

or,

Right click on the selected workstations and choose Deploy-Uninstall NetSupport.

3.	The Deploy Summary dialog will appear.

4.	Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment. The Uninstall NetSupport dialog will appear.

5.	Enter the properties for the deployment by selecting the four tabs in turn.

General tab

Acknowledgement Tab

Message Tab

Restart Tab

6.	When you have completed all four tabs, click OK to return to the Deploy Summary dialog. You can review your selections and edit if required.

7.	Click Deploy to commence the uninstall. A progress dialog will appear, enabling you to monitor the deployment as it uninstalls each workstation.

8.	Click Close when complete.

See also

Deploy - Preparing a deployment

Deploy a NetSupport Package

Deploy a Client Configuration

Deploy a NetSupport License File

Deploy - Log Files

Pre-define settings for a future deployment.


Deploy - Log Files

Log Files

When using NetSupport Deploy, information about each deployment, whether a package install, license update, configuration download or uninstall, is recorded. This provides a useful reminder each time you use the utility of what you have previously deployed. The information is stored in a Log File.

To view Log Files

1.	From the NetSupport Deploy Main Window, select the Log Files tab.

2.	In the left hand pane of the Main Window, increase or decrease the Tree View to see a description of each type of deployment, the date and time the deployment took place and the workstations that were deployed to.

3.	As you select an item from the left hand pane, itemised information about that deployment will appear in the right hand pane.

Printing a Log File

To print a Log File:

1.	Select the required Log File in the Tree View.

2.	Choose {Log}{Print} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.

Deleting a Log File

To delete old or unwanted Log Files:

1.	Select the required Log File in the Tree View.

2.	Choose {Log}{Delete} from the Deploy Main Window Drop Down Menu.


Entering Deploy Settings In Advance

There may be occasions when you want to defer a deployment until a more convenient time of the day. With NetSupport Deploy you can prepare the settings in advance and choose when to perform the deployment.

Note:	You select the workstations to deploy to when you are ready to run the deployment.

To Prepare The Settings For A Future Deployment

1.	Choose {Deploy}{Configuration} from the Deploy Main Window drop down Menu.

2.	The Deploy List dialog will appear. Select the required Deploy Option. (Package, Client Configuration, License File or Uninstall)

3.	Click Properties and enter the required settings.

4.	When all settings are entered, click Close to return to the Deploy Main Window.

To Run The Deployment

1.	Select the workstations to Deploy to. See Preparing a Deployment.

2.	Choose {Deploy} from the Main Window Drop Down Menu.

or

Right click on the selected workstations and choose Deploy.

3.	Select the required Deploy option.

4.	The Deploy Summary dialog will appear, showing your pre defined selections. You can edit these if required.

5.	Click Deploy to start the deployment.

See also

Deploy a NetSupport Package

Deploy Client Configuration

Deploy NetSupport License File

Remotely Uninstall NetSupport


Deploy A NetSupport Package - Properties General Tab

Used to specify the NetSupport package to deploy and which components are to be installed.

•	Enter a description for the package being deployed. If left blank, the package name/version number will be used.

•	Click Browse and select the folder containing the NetSupport package to install. Ideally, this will be a folder containing a distribution copy of NetSupport.

•	Click Edit to specify the components to install. The Install Configuration Options dialog will appear.

Choose {File}{Exit} to return to the Install Properties dialog.


Deploy A NetSupport Package - Properties Options Tab

Use the information supplied in the Network and Security tabs to identify which machines may already have NetSupport installed, you can then choose to:

•	Ignore them by checking the Skip machines already running NetSupport box.

•	Update the machines with the latest version by checking the Update new or older systems to current version box.

•	After deploying the package, you can confirm that the Client is running by checking the Verify Client running after restarting box. Ensure that workstaions are restarted automatically after the deploy for this option to work. See Restart tab.


Deploy A NetSupport Package - Properties Acknowledgement Tab

Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy. You can choose to:

•	Install NetSupport Immediately. No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to.

•	Warn user before installing NetSupport. The user will receive a prompt and needs to click OK for the install to commence. Users cannot cancel this.

•	User can postpone NetSupport installation. You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the installation. If the user does choose to postpone, they will be re-prompted at hourly intervals or the next time they restart the workstation whichever comes earlier.


Deploy A NetSupport Package - Properties Message Tab

You can specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the installation is in progress.


Deploy A NetSupport Package - Properties Restart Tab

Note:	If you have asked for verification that the Client is running, see Options Tab, you must choose an option that will force the workstations to be restarted immediately.

•	Advise user to restart machine. At the completion of the deployment, a message will be displayed at workstations asking the user to restart the PC at the next convenient opportunity. Do not choose if above Note applies.

•	Insist user restarts machine. A message will be displayed at workstations, advising the user to restart the PC to complete the installation.

•	Force restart. At the end of the deployment, a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted. A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences.

•	Automatic restart if not logged on. If the workstation being deployed to is not logged on, restart will commence automatically.


Remote Uninstall - Properties General Tab

Provides a description of the package being uninstalled.


Remote Uninstall - Properties Acknowledgement Tab

Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy. You can choose to:

•	Uninstall NetSupport Immediately. No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to.

•	Warn user before uninstalling NetSupport. The user will receive a prompt and needs to click OK for the uninstall to commence. Users cannot cancel this.

•	User can postpone uninstall of NetSupport. You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the uninstall. If the user does choose to postpone, they will be prompted the next time they restart the workstation.


Remote Uninstall - Properties Message Tab

You can specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the uninstall is in progress.


Remote Uninstall - Properties Restart Tab

To completely remove all NetSupport files, the workstations must be restarted.

•	Insist user restarts machine. A message will be displayed at workstations, advising the user to restart the PC to complete the process.

•	Force restart. At the end of the deployment, a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted. A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences.

•	Automatic restart if not logged in. If the workstation being deployed to is not logged in, restart will commence automatically.


Deploying on Windows XP

To enable you to deploy NetSupport on Windows XP Professional, you need access to the Admin$ share on the remote machine in order to transfer the package to be deployed. By default there is no access allowed to Admin$ share.

To enable Network access:

1.	In Administrative Tools select Local Security Policy.

2.	Select {Security Settings}{Local Policies}{Security Options}

3.	Select {Network access : Sharing and security model for local accounts}

4.	Alter the setting for this policy to {Classic – local users authenticate as themselves}

The Admin$ share will now be available and you can deploy as normal.

If upgrading from Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 1 to Service Pack 2, Windows Firewall will by default block all Network activity produced by NetSupport School. To enable NetSupport to function correctly we have provided a utility that will configure Windows Firewall.

To enable NetSupport School in the Windows Firewall Configuration

1.	Download the ICFCONFIG.EXE File (link at www.netsupportsoftware.com/support/)

2.	Run this utility on a machine with NetSupport School Installed using the following command
                 ICFCONFIG -e NSS

3.	This will create all the required entries in the Windows Firewall Configuration to allow NetSupport School to function correctly.

The ICFCONFIG utility can also be used to remove a NetSupport Product from the Windows Firewall Configuration see our website at: www.netsupportsoftware.com/support/ for all the ICFCONFIG Command line options.


NetSupport Deploy - Enter Deploy Properties In Advance

There may be occasions when you want to defer a deployment until a more convenient time of the day. With NetSupport Deploy you can prepare the settings in advance and choose when to perform the deployment.

Note:	You select the workstations to deploy to when you are ready to run the deployment.

To pre-define the Deploy settings, select the required item from the Deploy List dialog and click Properties.

For more information about each option and how to run the pre-defined deployment when you are ready, see:

Entering Deploy Settings In Advance

Deploy a NetSupport Package

Deploy a Client Configuration

Deploy a NetSupport License File

Deploy - Remote Uninstall


Deploy Client Configuration - Properties General Tab

To deploy a Client Configuration

1.	Click Browse to specify the folder containing the Client Configuration file that is to be deployed. The default configuration file is CLIENT32.INI and is stored in the NetSupport Manager installation directory.

2.	Click Edit to access the Client Configurator in order to make changes to the Configuration file.

3.	For the new settings to take effect immediately, by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment. If not required, uncheck the Restart the NetSupport Client service box.

4.	Click OK to return to the Summary dialog. You can view the contents of the configuration file by clicking on the file name.


Deploy a NetSupport Package - Install Properties General Tab

Specify the NetSupport package to deploy and which components are to be installed.

1.	Enter a description for the package being deployed. If left blank, the package name/version will be used.

2.	Click Browse and select the folder containing the NetSupport package to install. Ideally, this will be a folder containing a distribution copy of NetSupport.

3.	Click Edit to specify the components to install. The Install Configuration Options dialog will appear.

Note:	Because of the way NetSupport Deploy handles restarting workstations, leave the Restart Machine box un-checked. This is only relevant when performing a Silent Install.

Choose {File}{Exit} to return to the Install Properties dialog.


Deploy a NetSupport Package - Install Properties Message Tab

Specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the installation is in progress.


Deploy a NetSupport Package - Install Properties Options Tab

Use the information supplied in the Network and Security tabs to identify which machines may already have NetSupport installed, you can then choose to:

•	Ignore them by checking the Skip machines already running NetSupport box.

•	Update the machines with the latest version by checking the Update new or older systems to current version box.

•	After deploying the package, you can confirm that the Client is running by checking the Verify Client running after restarting box. Ensure that workstaions are restarted automatically after the deploy for this option to work. See Restart tab.


Deploy a NetSupport Package - Install Properties Restart Tab

Note:	If you have asked for verification that the Client is running, see Options Tab, you must choose an option that will force the workstations to be restarted immediately.

1.	Advise user to restart machine. At the completion of the deployment, a message will be displayed at workstations asking the user to restart the PC at the next convenient opportunity. Do not choose if above Note applies.

2.	Insist user restarts machine. A message will be displayed at workstations, advising the user to restart the PC to complete the installation.

3.	Force restart. At the end of the deployment, a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted. A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences.

4.	Automatic restart if not logged on. If the workstation being deployed to is not logged on, restart will commence automatically.


Deploy a NetSupport Package - Install Properties Acknowledgement Tab

Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy. You can choose to:

1.	Install NetSupport Immediately. No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to.

2.	Warn user before installing NetSupport. The user will receive a prompt and needs to click OK for the install to commence. Users cannot cancel this.

3.	User can postpone NetSupport installation. You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the installation. If the user does choose to postpone, they will be re-prompted at hourly intervals or the next time they restart the workstation whichever comes earlier.


NetSupport Deploy - Summary Dialog

This dialog provides a summary of the options you have selected for the deployment.  If a first time deployment, the text will appear in red to indicate that required information has not been entered. To enter or amend the information for the deployment, Click Properties.

When the properties have been set, Click Deploy to commence deploying the chosen option.


Uninstall NetSupport - General Tab

Provides a description of the package being uninstalled.


Uninstall NetSupport - Message Tab

Specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the uninstall is in progress.


Uninstall NetSupport - Restart Tab

To completely remove all NetSupport files, the workstations must be restarted.

1.	Insist user restarts machine. A message will be displayed at workstations, advising the user to restart the PC to complete the process.

2.	Force restart. At the end of the deployment, a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted. A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences.

3.	Automatic restart if not logged in. If the workstation being deployed to is not logged in, restart will commence automatically.


Uninstall NetSupport - Acknowledgement Tab

Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy. You can choose to:

1.	Uninstall NetSupport Immediately. No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to.

2.	Warn user before uninstalling NetSupport. The user will receive a prompt and needs to click OK for the uninstall to commence. Users cannot cancel this.

3.	User can postpone uninstall of NetSupport. You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the uninstall. If the user does choose to postpone, they will be prompted the next time they restart the workstation.


Deploy NetSupport License File - General Tab

1.	Click Browse to specify the folder containing the license file that is to be deployed. The default file is NSM.LIC.

2.	For the new settings to take effect immediately, by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment. If not required, uncheck the Restart the NetSupport Client service box.

3.	Click OK to return to the Summary dialog. You can view the contents of the license file by clicking on the file name.


About NetSupport Deploy

The NetSupport Deploy Utility provides Network Administrators with the facility to install and configure NetSupport Manager on multiple workstations without the need to visit the machines individually.

You are provided with a view of your Network, allowing you to pick and choose which workstations you want to deploy to.

Note:	NetSupport Deploy is currently only supported on Windows XP, 2000 or NT workstations.

With NetSupport Deploy you can:

•	Remotely Install a NetSupport package on multiple workstations simultaneously.

•	Create and download specific Client Configurations to multiple workstations.

•	Remotely update NetSupport License details on multiple workstations.

•	Remotely Uninstall a NetSupport package from multiple workstations simultaneously.

•	Enter the settings in advance and Deploy when it is convenient.

Log Files

When using NetSupport Deploy, information about each deployment, whether a package install, license update, configuration download or uninstall, is recorded. This provides a useful reminder each time you use the utility of what you have previously deployed. The information is stored in a Log File.

See also

Planning and preparing a deployment

NetSupport Deploy Main Window

System Pre-Requisites


About NetSupport Testing Module

NetSupport’s Testing Module is a powerful utility that enables Tutor’s to design tests and examinations with the minimum of effort. Incorporating an intuitive Test Designer allowing a Tutor to set customised tests including text, picture, audio and video questions, once the specified Students have completed the test in the pre-set time, the results are automatically collated, marked and made available to the Tutor.

The following components are available within the Testing Module:

The Test Designer

Launched from the NetSupport School program group, the Test Designer is used to create questions and tests.

The Testing Console

Run from within the NetSupport School Tutor program, the Testing Console is used to launch the required test at selected Student workstations, monitor progress and collate results.

The Test Player

This component runs the test at the Student workstation, it loads automatically when the Tutor launches a test.

See also

System Pre-Requisites


Starting the Test Designer

The NetSupport School Test Designer is the primary interface for:-

•	Creating questions.

•	Creating tests/examinations.

•	Maintaining stored questions and tests.

•	Providing user access to the designer.

Note:	Selecting participants, running the test at student machines and recording the results of tests is managed within the NetSupport School Tutor program. See Testing Console for more information.

Starting the Test Designer

1.	Choose {Start}{Programs}{NetSupport School}{NetSupport School Test Designer}.

2.	The Test Designer logon screen will appear. Enter your User Name and Password.

Note:	NetSupport provides a default Administrator logon for use the first time you access the Designer (User Name admin, Password admin) but you can add additional users.

3.	At startup, you can enter the Designer in one of two modes, Question Editor or Exam Editor. Select the appropriate icon. Once in the Designer, you can easily toggle between modes.

4.	The main window for the selected mode will appear.

See also

Creating Questions

Creating Tests/Exams

Add Additional Users


Question Editor

The Question Editor is the primary interface for creating and managing questions. A choice of question formats is available and additional resources such as pictures, video and sound clips can be incorporated into the questions.

The Editor Window provides a number of menu and toolbar options enabling you to create, edit and manage questions. For ease of navigation, stored questions are listed in a user defined tree view that can be sorted by subject, question type, author, or level of difficulty.

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various Question Editor tools and configuration utilities.

File

Enables you to switch to the Exam Editor Window, Import/Export data, logout of the Designer or quit the application.

Management

Create, edit or delete questions and manage the various supporting resources such as pictures, videos and sound clips.

Admin

Primarily used to create and maintain user details.

View

Show or hide the Editor Window toolbar and status bar.

Help

Displays the program Helpfile.

Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools such as Create, Edit and Delete Questions.

Sort by

Enables the content of the tree view to be sorted by Author, Level of difficulty, Question Type, or Subject.

The Tree View

Displays details of the Subjects and Topics you have created and the questions stored within each group.

See also

Create Questions

Exam Grading

Exam Editor


The Test Player

The NetSupport School Test Player is the testing utility that loads at Student PCs when an exam is running. While the Player is loaded, Students are unable to use any other applications. However, the Tutor can elect to unlock the machines as each Student finishes the exam rather than make them wait for all Students to finish.

The Tutor uses the Testing Console option to choose the Students to participate in the exam and select the exam to run. At this point the Test Player loads automatically at each Student PC. When the Tutor starts the exam, the first question appears and the Students can then work their way through the exam.

The Test Player window displays the following:

Exam Time

Counts down the time remaining.

Question List

Numbered buttons indicate how many questions there are in the exam. The Student can click these to quickly move between questions. Useful at the end of the exam to review answers and to make changes before the time runs out.

Question Area

The main body of the window displays the question and, depending on the question type, the associated options. Buttons are provided to view any resources that may have been included, pictures, videos or sound clips, and a reference button is available which provides Students with tips on how to answer the particular type of question.

Navigation Buttons

In addition to the numbered buttons in the question list, navigation buttons are also available at the bottom of the window enabling Students to move between questions.  When they have completed the exam they click Finished.

When the exam has finished, the Tutor has the option to show Students their results and, if required, include the answers. The Test Player will re-open at the Student workstations enabling them to view each question in turn. The window will indicate which questions they got right, wrong or, in the case of questions that have multiple answers, partially correct. If the Tutor has chosen to include the answers a Show Answers button will appear enabling the Student to toggle between their response and the correct answers.

See also

The Testing Console

The Test Designer


The Testing Console

Having used the Test Designer to create questions and exams, you use the Testing Console option in the NetSupport School Tutor program to run the exam at Student workstations and monitor results.

Running an Exam

1.	Select {School}{Testing Console} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the ‘Testing Console’ icon on the Control toolbar.

2.	The Select Students dialog will appear. From the list of connected Students, indicate which ones should participate in the exam by checking or un-checking the box next to their name. Click Next to continue.

3.	Select the exam to run. Details of the published exams are listed, choose the one that you want to run at the selected Student PCs. If required, you can alter the time limit for the exam. Click Finish when ready to run the exam.

4.	The NetSupport School Test Player will automatically launch at the Student PCs and a dialog enabling you to administer the exam will appear on the Tutor screen.

See also

The Test Player


Administration

The Test Designer Admin Options are primarily used to:

•	Create and maintain User Logins

•	Specify the location for imported resources

The Admin option can be selected from either the Question or Exam Editor drop down menu.


Exam Editor

The Exam Editor enables you to take the questions you have previously created in the Question Editor and build them into a test or exam.

The Editor Window provides a series of menu and toolbar options enabling you to create, edit and manage exams. It also displays, in a tree view, the list of stored exams and the questions contained within them. Each question can be previewed in the window.

Menu Bar

The Menu Bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various Exam Editor tools and configuration utilities.

File

Enables you to switch to the Question Editor Window, Import/Export Data logout of the Designer or quit the application.

Management

Options are available to Create, Edit, Delete Exams, Exam Grades, Preview and Publish Exams. Publishing an exam bundles up the questions and associated resources into a ZIP file that can be accessed from the Testing Console.

Admin

Primarily used to create and maintain user details.

View

Show or hide the Editor Window toolbar and status bar.

Help

Displays the program Helpfile.

Toolbar

The Toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools such as Create, Edit and Delete Exams.

The Tree View

Lists the exams that have been created together with the associated questions.

See also

Create Exams

Question Editor


Create Questions

When creating a question, you can apply one of eight different styles ranging from a basic multiple-choice text question to ones that incorporate audio and video clips.  For each question type a wizard will appear which guides you through the process. For most questions it is a three-stage process, five for Label Graphic.

The basic procedure for creating a question is:

•	Enter the question or statements and the associated options/answers.

•	If required, include any supporting resources such as pictures, sound and video clips.

•	Store the question and add any author’s notes.

To Create a Question

1.	Choose {Management}{Create Question} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click Create on the Question Editor toolbar.

2.	The Create Question dialog will appear.

3.	Select the required type of question.

4.	The Create Question Wizard for the selected question type will appear.

Note:	Questions can also be created in the Exam Editor at the time you compile a test.

The eight question types are:

Multi Choice

The Student is required to pick the correct answer from a list of four possible options.

Drag And Drop Text

Students must try to complete a statement by adding a word or phrase from the alternatives provided.

Drag And Drop Image

Students must match an image with the appropriate statement.

Combo List

Students are presented with four questions and need to select the correct answer from a drop down list. You can insert additional 'decoy' answers into the list.

Label Image

You provide students with a picture that has various areas marked. The student needs to label each area correctly.

True or False

The Students are provided with a statement and they must decide whether this is true or false.

Multi True or False

Students are presented with four statements and must decide whether they are true or false.

Order Items

The Students are required to place the four answers to the question in the correct order.

Note:	For Questions other than Multi Choice, Students can gain a maximum of four points depending on how many correct matches they get.


Create Question - Multiple Choice

Students select the correct answer from a list of four possibilities.

The first stage, of three, is to set the question followed by the correct answer and three false answers. When the question is run at Student machines, the four answers are randomly arranged.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Create Question - Combo List

The Student is presented with four statements, alongside each statement is a drop down list containing a choice of possible answers. They must select the correct answer from the list.

The first stage, of three, is to enter the instructions along with the four statements or phrases. Alongside each statement enter the correct answer text. You can then add two further dummy answers, meaning that when the question is run at Student machines, for each of the four statements there is a choice of six possible answers in the drop down list.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Create Question - Label Image

Students are presented with a picture that has four areas marked, each with an adjacent ‘blank’ text box. At the bottom of their screen will be four text labels which they must drag and drop into the correct text box.

The first stage, of five, is to enter the question along with the four text labels. You then select the image that the Students will need to label. Click Browse to search for the images. The list of pictures currently stored in the Images database will appear. Either select an existing image or Import a new one. Click Use to apply the image to the question.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Adjust Image

Label Image

Include additional resources

Store Question, add author's comments


Create Question - Drag and Drop Graphic
Create Question - Drag and Drop Image

The Student is presented with four statements or questions, and a selection of images. They must match the image with the correct statement.

The first stage, of three, is to enter the instructions along with the four statements or phrases. Alongside each statement you add the appropriate image. Click Browse to search for the images. The list of pictures currently stored in the Images database will appear. Either select an existing image or Import a new one. Click Use to apply the image to the question.

When the question is run at Student machines, the four pictures are randomly arranged at the bottom of the screen and the Students Drag and Drop the images next to the appropriate statement.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Create Question - Drag and Drop Text

The Student is presented with four partially completed statements. They must complete the statement by dragging and dropping the appropriate word or phrase from a list.

The first stage, of three, is to enter the instructions for the question along with the four statements. Within each statement, highlight with your mouse the word or phrase that you will want the Students to drag and drop, clicking ‘Set Answer’ when you are happy that you have selected the appropriate text. When the question is run at Student machines, the four highlighted items are removed from the statements and randomly arranged.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Adding Additional Resources to Questions

Supporting images in the form of pictures, video or sound clips, can be included in questions. The images must first of all be imported into NetSupport School’s internal Resources database from where they can be added to questions.

You can add new multi-media files to the Resources database when creating or editing a question or by selecting {Management}{Manage Resources} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

The default path for the Resources area is C:\Program Files\NetSupport School\resources but you can change this to a different location if required. Select {Admin}{Configuration – Configuration Tab} from the Question or Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

Note:	All standard multi-media file formats are supported, jpg, bmp, gif, avi, wav etc.

To Include Additional Resources In A Question

1.	Decide which resource type is appropriate, image, sound or video and click Browse. The resources list for the selected type will appear.

2.	If the required file has already been imported into the database highlight it in the list and click Use. You can Preview the files before selecting them.

or

To add a new item to the list, click Import and browse for the file. When you have selected the file, you can preview it to ensure it is the correct one. It is also important that you include a suitable description for the item, as this will appear in the Resources list rather than the file name. Once added to the list, click Use to add the item to the question.

3.	Click Next.

Observation Mode

Selecting this option allows you to force the Students to view a resource file before the question appears, they will not be able to view the resource in the question. When the exam is run at the Student machines they will be advised that the question media will only be shown once. If this option is selected you will not be able to continue until a resource has been added to the question.

See also

Create Questions


Manage Resources

The Manage Resources option provides a central area where you can administer the pictures, videos and sound clips that are used in questions. New items can be imported into the database for later use in questions.

To access the resources list, select {Management}{Manage Resources} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

Items can be listed by category, Image, Sound, Video, or you can view All types simultaneously. The resources list provides the following information:

Description    This is the user-defined description given to the item when it is imported into the database, not the original file name.

Type	Indicates the file type, jpg, bmp, gif, avi etc.

Ref 	The number of times that the item appears in a question.

Size/Length	In the case of images, displays the image size in pixels. For sound and video, displays the duration of the clip.

The following buttons are available:

Image	Lists the picture files that have been imported.

Sound	Lists the sound files that have been imported.

Video	Lists the video files that have been imported.

All	Lists all categories.

Import	Import a new item for later use in questions.

Delete	Delete a selected item. Items cannot be deleted if they are used in a question. The Ref Count column indicates how many times the item has been used.

Preview	View the imported item.

Edit	Enables you to change the description of the resource and the version number. Overwrites the original.

See also

Adding Additional Resources to Questions


Question Details

The Question Details dialog completes the Create Question process. Decide where to store the question and whether to add any additional author notes.

Stored questions are maintained in an internal database, school.mdb, within the NetSupport School program folder. The Question Editor Window displays stored questions in a tree view. You are able to customise this to your own requirements by creating subjects and topics within each subject.

The Question Details dialog also displays the Tree View and you can choose whether to add a question to an existing Subject/Topic or to create a new area. Supporting text can also be added.

To create new Subjects

1.	Select Create Subject and enter an appropriate name. Click OK. The Subject will be added to the Tree View.

2.	Within the Subject, create a Topic. Select Create Topic and enter a name. Click OK.

3.	Author’s information can now be added. If required, edit the description and add any additional supporting text. You can also assign a Level to each question to indicate the level of difficulty.

4.	Click Finish to store the question and return to the Create a Question dialog. Either select another question type or click Close to return to the Question Editor Window.

See also

Create Questions

Delete/Rename Subjects and Topics


Edit Questions

The content of stored questions can be changed at any time.

To Edit A Question

1.	In the Question Editor Tree View, select the required question.

2.	Choose {Management}{Edit Question} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Edit toolbar icon.

or

Right-click on the question and select Edit.

3.	The Edit Question screen will appear. Select the appropriate Tab to change the required details.

See also

Create Questions


Adjust Image

If the image you have chosen for the Label Image question is too large for the viewable area you can resize it.

Use the scroll-bars to position the image within the viewable area. To select the required section, use your mouse to draw around the area you require. When ready, hit Enter or click Next to continue.


Label Image

Use this preview window to position the answers on the image and choose an appropriate colour scheme for the ‘pointer’ lines and background.

1.	Drag the end of each ‘pointer’ to the correct region of the image.

2.	Drag the associated text box to an appropriate area.

3.	Select the pointer style you wish to use and choose a colour for the pointers and background.

4.	Click Next when ready.


Delete Questions, Subjects and Topics

In Question Editor mode redundant or orphan items can be removed from the Tree based on certain criteria being met.

A Question can only be deleted if it does not appear in an exam. A Subject or Topic can be removed if there are no items beneath it in the Tree, the currently selected Sort View determining the extent of the deletion.

To Delete a Question

1.	In the Question Editor Tree View, select the required question.

2.	Choose {Management}{Delete Question} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Delete Question toolbar icon.

or

Right-click on the question and select Delete.

3.	Confirm that you want to delete the question.

4.	If the question appears in an exam, a warning message will be displayed indicating how many exams the question is in. You will not be able to delete the question until it has been removed from the exam(s).

Delete Subjects and Topics

When deleting a Subject or Topic the program will check to see if there are items beneath it in the Tree and, depending on the current Sort View, if the item appears anywhere else in the Tree.

When sorted by Subject Type, there will only be one occurrence of the item. Therefore, a Topic will be removed if it does not contain any questions and a Subject if it does not contain any Topics. However, when sorted by Question Type, for example, there may be multiple occurrences of the same Subject and Topic in the Tree. If you delete the only occurrence of a Geography question in the Multi-Choice category, that Topic or Subject will be removed from Multi-Choice but not from any other category that Geography appears in.

1.	In the Question Editor Tree View, select the required Topic or Subject.

2.	Choose {Management}{Delete Topic/Subject} from the Question Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Right-click and select Delete.

3.	Confirm that you want to delete.

4.	If there are items within that branch of the Tree a warning message will appear.

Rename Subjects and Topics

1.	Select the required item in the Tree.

2.	Right-click and choose Rename.

3.	Enter the new name and press Enter.

See also

Create Questions

Edit Questions

Edit Exam


Edit Exam

To Edit the Content of an Exam

1.	Select the exam name in the Exam Editor Window tree view.

2.	Choose {Management}{Edit Exam} from the Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click Edit on the toolbar.

or

Right-click on the exam name and select Edit Exam.

3.	The Exam Wizard will appear.

4.	Select the Exam Details or Exam Question tab and edit the required items.

5.	Click OK.


Create Exam

Having created a suitable mix of questions in the Question Editor, adding those questions to an exam is a quick and easy process.

The Exam Wizard guides you through the process of selecting the required questions, setting a time limit for the exam, using your own grading system and including supporting information. New questions can also be created during this process.

To Create an Exam

1.	Choose {Management}{Create Exam} from the Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click Create on the Exam Editor toolbar.

2.	The Exam Wizard will appear.

3.	The first stage is to enter general supporting information about the exam. Enter a Title and Description for the exam. Choose whether to have the exam timed, if so set the time limit, hh:mm. You can use your own grading system by selecting from the Grading Schema drop down. Decide whether to use the default scoring system (you can assign your own scores to questions in stage two). You can then add some optional information such as the age range or class group that the exam is aimed at. Click Next when ready.

Note: If you wish to use a Grading Schema you must first create one in the Exam Grades dialog.

4.	Stage two is to select the questions for the exam. Expand the tree in the left-hand pane of the window and highlight the required question, click the Add Question button. The tree view can be sorted by Author, Level, Question Type and Subject. Repeat this process until all questions are selected.

5.	Selected questions appear in the right-hand pane of the window. From here you can use the buttons to remove a question from the exam, sort the questions into the required order, preview the question, assign a new score to the question or even create a new question.

6.	Click Finish to store the exam in the Exam Editor Window tree view.

Once created, you can use the Exam Editor menu or toolbar options to edit or delete exams, preview exams and publish the exam.

Note:	Although the newly created exam appears in the Exam Editor tree view, it cannot be run at Student workstations until it has been ‘published’. This bundles the various elements of the exam, questions, pictures, videos etc, into a single ZIP file which is then made available in the Testing Console.

See also

Edit Exam

Create Exam Grades

Delete Exam

Preview Exam

Publish Exam

Testing Console - Run Exam at Student Workstations


Delete Exam

Although this procedure removes the exam from the Exam Editor Window, it does not delete the Zip file that is created when an exam is published. The exam will therefore still be available to run at Student workstations.

To Delete an Exam

1.	Select the exam name in the Exam Editor Window tree view.

2.	Choose {Management}{Delete Exam} from the Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click Delete on the toolbar.

or

Right-click on the exam name and select Delete Exam.

3.	Confirm that you want to delete the exam.


Publish Exam

When you create a new exam, it is not immediately available to be run at Student workstations. You must first ‘Publish’ it. The Publish Exam option bundles the various components of the exam, questions, pictures, videos etc, into a single Zip file which is stored in a central Tests folder, C:\Program Files\Netsupport School\Tests.

Once published, the test can be selected in the Testing Console.

Note:	Due to the enhanced results reporting introduced in version 7.50, tests created pre v7.50 will need to be re-published.

To Publish an Exam

1.	Select the name of the newly created exam in the Exam Editor Window tree view.

2.	Choose {Management}{Publish Exam} from the Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

or

Click Publish on the toolbar.

or

Right-click on the exam name and select Publish.

3.	A window will appear confirming the exam properties. Click Publish.

4.	The Save As dialog will appear. Give the exam a suitable name, this is the name that will appear in the Testing Console when selecting an exam to run. Click Save to create the Zip file.

See also

Create Exam


Preview Exam

You can preview an exam at any time in order to simulate what the Students will see. This is a useful way of checking each question and viewing the resources, pictures, video’s etc, that may have been included. Although the exam runs exactly how it would at the Student workstations, the preview facility does not return any results.

To Preview an Exam

1.	Select the exam in the Exam Editor tree view.

2.	Choose {Management}{Preview Item} from the Exam Editor drop down menu.

or

Click Preview on the toolbar.

or

Right-click on the exam name and select Preview.

3.	The Preview Exam Window will appear. This enables you to answer each question exactly as the Students would have to. You can also view any supporting images, videos or sound clips.

4.	Click Finish to end the preview.

Note:	Individual questions can also be previewed in this mode. Expand the tree beneath an exam to reveal the questions, highlight the appropriate item and click Preview.


Testing Console - Select Students For Exam

From the list of connected Students, indicate which ones should participate in the exam by checking or un-checking the box next to their name.

Click Next to continue.


Testing Console - Select Exam

This dialog lists details of the published exams. Choose the one that you want to run at the selected Student PCs.

If required, you can alter the time limit for the exam.

Click Finish when ready to run the exam. The NetSupport School Test Player will automatically launch at the Student PCs and a dialog enabling you to administer the exam will appear on the Tutor screen.


Testing Console - Run Exam

This dialog is used to start the exam, monitor Student progress and collect results.

The window enables you to track individual Student progress. Each question is marked in real-time so you can see immediately how each Student is doing! At the end of the exam you can view the results by class and individual Student and print a permanent record. You can also show each Student their results giving them the opportunity to see where they made mistakes.

The following toolbar options are available:

View Client

You can view a particular Student screen at any point during the exam. All options normally associated with the View Window are available.

Chat

If required, you can open a Chat session with Students while the exam is running. Although the Test Player provides a help button offering Students guidance with each question type, you may find that you need to offer additional assistance.

Test Login

Before starting the exam you can ask each Student to Login with their own name. This would be useful if, for example, the Machine Name is listed and be more meaningful when checking results against each Student.

Pause Test

You can Pause the exam at any point. Click Start when ready to continue.

Start Test

Starts running the exam at Student PCs.

Stop Test

If Students answer all the questions within the time limit you can Stop the exam rather than wait for the clock to tick down.

Report

This option gathers the results when the exam has finished. (When the Tutor stops the exam or the time limit elapses)

Unlock Student Machines when they finish

While an exam is in progress Students are prevented from using other applications. Enabling this option will unlock each Student Machine as they finish the exam. Alternatively all machines will remain locked until the Tutor ends the exam.

See also

The Test Player

Test Reports Window


Admin - User Management

This option enables Test Designer operators, with Admin rights, to add, edit or delete User Logins.

A default Administrator logon is provided, Login Name: admin, Password: admin, providing access to the full range of Designer functionality as well as the ability to create additional user accounts.

Create User Logins

1.	Click Add.

2.	The User Details dialog will appear.

3.	Enter a User Name, generally the persons full name, followed by a Login Name and Password. Decide if the User should have Admin Rights. This gives the user full functionality access within the Designer along with the ability to edit and delete questions and tests created by other users. Non-Admin Users cannot create or edit questions but can create exams.

4.	Click OK.

Edit User Logins

1.	Highlight the required User and click Edit.

2.	The User Details dialog will appear.

3.	Amend the User Details as required.

4.	Click OK.

Delete User Logins

1.	Highlight the required User and click Delete.

2.	Confirm the deletion.


Admin - Options

Questions, exams etc are stored in an internal database supplied with NetSupport School. This dialog provides version information about the Database. You also have an option to edit the path where imported resources (images, video, sound clips) are stored.

Expanding the tree reveals two options:

General

Tracks the version number of the database, school.mdb, that is currently in use. NetSupport may on occasions supply updates to the internal database and this dialog indicates which version is currently in use.

Resources

By default, imported resources such as images, video files and sound clips, are stored in the Resources area within the NetSupport School program folder. This option enables you to edit the path if required.


User Details Dialog

Use this dialog to create or edit User Logins.

Create User Logins

1.	Enter a User Name, generally the persons full name, followed by a Login Name and Password. Decide if the User should have Admin Rights. This gives the user full functionality access within the Designer along with the ability to edit and delete questions and tests created by other users.

2.	Click OK.

Edit User Logins

1.	Amend the User Details as required.

2.	Click OK.


Edit Resource Path

Specify the path where imported resource files, images, videos, sound clips, are stored. The default path is \ program files\netsupport school\resources.


Import/Export Data

The Test Designer provides an Import/Export facility enabling you to store external backups of data or make information available to other users. Exported files can be password protected for security. You have the choice of exporting all items in the database or just the exams, questions or resources.

The Import/Export options can be accessed from either the Question or Exam Editor Windows.

Exporting Data

1.	Select {File}{External Data - Export} from the drop down menu.

2.	The Export Database dialog will appear. Select the category of information to be exported and Click Export.

3.	The Export Wizard will appear. Specify the location for the exported data and provide a filename. By default, files are prefixed with the current date but you may prefer to enter a custom name. If required, password protect the file, add any additional notes and click Next when ready to proceed.

4.	Depending on the category selected, (Exams, Questions, Resources etc) the Wizard will now prompt you to choose, from a tree view, the specific items to be exported. Select each item in turn and click the Add Item To Export List button. When the Export List is complete, click Next.

5.	The Wizard will confirm the items to be exported. Any resources associated with exams or questions are included. Check the details and if required click Back to change the information.

6.	Click Finish to begin exporting.

7.	A progress dialog will appear. Click Close when complete.

Note:	Exported data is not removed from the Designer.

Importing Data

1.	Select {File}{External Data - Import} from the drop down menu.

2.	The Import Database dialog will appear. Browse for the required Export file and click Open.

3.	Click Import DB to start importing. If the file has been protected you will be prompted for the password.

4.	A progress dialog will appear. Click Close when complete.


Export Database Dialog

Choose one of the options on this dialog to indicate the category of data to be exported. You can export the entire database, just the exams, questions or resources, or you can select from all items.

Make your selection and click Export to continue.


Export Wizard - Information

Use this dialog to specify where exported data should be stored and to password protect the files.

Export File Path

The exported data could be stored locally for backup purposes or in a network share enabling other users to import the information for use in their own tests. By default, files are prefixed with the current date but you can specify a new name if required.

Accept the default details provided or browse for the required path.

Password protection of export files

If exported data is to be shared with other users it is recommended that the file is password protected for security.  Passwords are case sensitive. When a user attempts to import the file they will be prompted for the password.

Optional description of exported items

Add any additional descriptive notes. This will help users identify the data when importing.

Click Next when ready.


Export Questions

Select the Questions to export. All associated resources are included.

Questions can be selected from the Tree by subject, topic or individually. Highlight the required item(s) and click the Add a question button.

Click Next when complete.


Export Exams

Select the Exams to export. All associated questions and resources are included.

Highlight the required exams, you can select multiple items using Shift-Click or Ctrl-Click, and click the Add exam to export list button.

Click Next when complete.


Export Resources

Select the Resources to Export. Items can be selected from the Tree by type, image, sound or video, or by individual file.

Highlight the required resource file(s) and click the Add resource to export list button.

Click Next when complete.


Export - Select Items

Select the items to export from each category.

Expand the appropriate part of the Tree, highlight the required item and click the Add item to export list.

Click Next when complete.


Import Database Dialog

Browse for the file to be imported and click Open. The content of the file will be displayed.

If this is the required file click Import DB to start importing or click Browse to select another file.


Import Security

The file you are trying to import has been password protected, enter the password using the correct capitalisation and click OK to proceed.


Export Wizard - Ready to Process

This window confirms details of the information to be exported. Click Back to amend the details, click Finish to start exporting.


Export Processing

This dialog enables you to monitor progress as the data is exported. Click Close when the routine is complete.


Import Processing

This dialog enables you to monitor progress as the data is imported. Click Close when the routine is complete.


Archived File Details

Before continuing with the import you can Preview the file.

Enter a meaningful description of the item as this will be displayed in the imported items list, not the filename.

To indicate whether the newly imported item is an updated version of an existing file you can manually increase the Version number.

Click Save to add the resource to the database.


Database Resources

In order to attach additional resources to questions, the file (image/sound/video) must firstly be imported into the database. Once imported, the file can be selected from the list, previewed and added to the question being created.

The dialog provides the following options:

Preview

Enables you to preview an item in the list before adding it to a question.

Import

Enables you to browse for and import new resources.

Use

Once imported, select the resource file in the list and click Use to add it to the question.


Question Preview Window

Select a question from the tree to preview. The question will be displayed as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources in preview mode but the system won’t tell you whether you are right or wrong!


Preview Multi-Choice Question

This window displays the multiple choice question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Drag & Drop Text Question

This window displays the drag & drop text question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Drag & Drop Image Question

This window displays the drag & drop image question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Combo List Question

This window displays the combo list question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Label Image Question

This window displays the label image question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Question

Preview mode enables you to display a question as it will appear at Student machines. You can answer the question and view any additional resources that may be attached.


Exam View

This area of the Exam Editor window displays details of the exam highlighted in the tree view. A thumbnail view of the questions is displayed and each one can be opened and previewed.


Question Details Dialog

This window displays summary information about the selected question.


Select Question Type

Double-click to select the required question type.


Publish Exam Progress

The selected exam is in the process of being Published.

The Publish Exam option bundles the various components of the exam, questions, pictures, videos etc, into a single Zip file which is stored in a central Tests folder, C:\Program Files\Netsupport School\Tests.

Once published, the test can be selected in the Testing Console.


Duplicate Import Item

An import item matches an existing record in the database. To avoid overwriting the information you should change the title of the item being imported.


Duplicate Resource

An import item matches an existing resource in the database. Preview each item before proceeding.

If the items are the same, click Yes. If they are not, click No and enter a new description for the imported item.


Test Reports Window

The Reports Window enables the Tutor to review the results of an exam. You also have the option to allow Students to see their own results.

By selecting the required item in the Tree View you can display two types of report, a Class Summary and individual Student summaries. Each can be printed and copies are also stored, in HTML format, in the \\NetSupport School\Tests\Reports folder.

Note:	An alternative location for the reports can be specified in the Tutor Profiles option.

Class Summary

This provides a summary of each Students result in tabular format. The report details the number of questions in the exam, the number of points available (questions other than multi-choice are worth 1 point for each correct answer) and itemises each Students score.

Individual Student Summary

By selecting the Student name in the Tree View you can display a full breakdown of the individual results. This is ideal for highlighting any problem areas that the Student may have. If you have applied a Grading Schema the marked grade along with any comments you added would also be displayed. An index itemising the points scored for each question is provided from which you can jump to each question to see how the Student answered.

The toolbar provides shortcuts to a number of additional features:

Show Results

This enables you to show each Student their results and, if required, include the answers. To display to all Students simultaneously highlight Students Reports in the tree, to show to an individual Student select their name.

The Test Player will re-open at the Student workstations enabling them to view each question in turn. The window will indicate which questions they got right, wrong or, in the case of questions that have multiple answers, partially correct.

If you have chosen to include the answers, a Show Answers button will appear on the Test Player window enabling the Student to toggle between their response and the correct answers.

Show Report

This option enables you to display the individual summary reports at Student workstations.

Print Report

Enables the Tutor to obtain a printed copy of the Class and Student summaries. Highlight the required item in the Tree and click Print Report.

When ready, close the window to return to the Test Console dialog from where you can exit the test. This will clear the results or reports from the Student screens.


Enter Subject/Topic Name

Enter an appropriate Subject/Topic name and click OK.


Create Question - True or False

Students are provided with a statement and they must decide whether it is true or false.

The first stage of three is to provide instructions for the question, then enter the statement you want the students to answer and specify whether the statement is true or false.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Create Question - Multi True or False

Students are provided with four statements and they must decide whether they are true or false.

The first stage of three is to enter instructions for the questions along with four statements. Alongside each of the statements choose whether they are true or false, by selecting the appropriate button.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments.


Create Question - Order Items

Students are required to correctly place in order the four answers to the question.

The first stage of three is to set the question, with the four answers in the correct order. When the question is run at the Student machines, the four answers will be randomly arranged and the Students will drag and drop each item to the correct place.

Once you have completed part one of the wizard, click Next.

See also

Include additional resources.

Store Question, add author's comments


Exam Grades

The Test Designer allows you to custom design your own grading system which can be applied to exams. When the exam has been completed by the Students you will then be able to review how well they performed and what ‘grades’ they achieved.

Note: To apply a Grading Schema to an exam the grading scores must be set up first.

Create Exam Grades

1.	Select {Management}{Exam Grades} from the Exam Editor Window drop down menu.

2.	The Exam Score Grading dialog will appear.

3.	Enter a name for the Grading Schema and set a report image. You must set a report image, this appears next to each grade and provides a pictorial indictor of the Students performance, for example, grade A will have 4 images next to it, Grade B, 3 images etc. To select an appropriate image click the icon, this will take you to the Image Database, select an existing image or alternatively you can import one from a saved file.

Note: The image must be 32x32 pixels.

4.	Enter a name for each of the grading bands, you then need to choose a value for the band, for example, grade A 80%-100%, grade B 61-79% etc.  Click Add to include this in the current grading scheme.

Note: You can add extra text in the Band Name, this will appear on the test report, for example, A  - well done! D - could try harder etc.

5.	Click Edit to amend any of the details and Delete to remove a band value.

6.	Once you have completed the dialog, click Save.

You can view the grades each Student has achieved in the Test Reports Window.

See also

Create an Exam


Question Score

Questions are created with a default score, the Question Score dialog allows you to allocate your own score to individual questions.

1.	In the Exam Wizard, select the question you wish to amend the score for and click on the Question Score icon.

Note: You must ensure that the Default Scoring System option is un-checked.

2.	The details of the question will appear and the score that would normally be awarded for the question will be shown. You can then increase the score by using the appropriate buttons.

Note: Questions with multiple answers can only be incremented by a corresponding number.

3.	When you have finished click Save to exit.


Preview True or False Question

This window displays the true or false question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Multi True or False Question

This window displays the multi true or false question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Preview Order Items Question

This window displays the order items question as it will appear at the Student machine when run as part of an exam. You can answer the question and view any associated resources.


Identify applications currently running on the Student workstation

In the List View, the Student icons can be viewed in a number of different ways. Choose {View}{Large Icons/ Small Icons/ List/ Details} or right click in the List View and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student Icons.

When viewing the "Large Icons" or "Details" layout, an icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current application in use.

If the application is currently listed in the Approved or Restricted lists, then a visual Green (Approved) or Red (Restricted) identifier is shown surrounding the application icon to make identification easier.

If the List View is in "Details" layout then a list of all other applications running on the Student workstation is also displayed.

When viewing any one of the four layout options, the order of the Student and Application icons can also be rearranged by the Tutor. Right click in the List View and choose {Arrange}. The Tutor is able to change the layout of the icons using the following options:

By Name	Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to their Client Name/ Display Name/ Student Register Name.

By Current Application	Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the current application.

By Running Applications	Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the running applications on the Student workstation.

Selection of one of the above options is identified by a black dot.

Auto Arrange	If a new Student has been added to the list, or a new application is running on a Student machine, this option will automatically arrange the icons into the previously selected order above. A black tick will identify selection of this option. To deselect this option, simply re-click on "Auto Arrange" and the tick will disappear.

Ascending	If this option has been selected, the Student icons will appear in ascending order according to the previously selected option above. A black tick will identify selection of this option. To deselect this option, simply re-click on "Ascending" and the tick will disappear. This will arrange the Student icons in descending order.


Close current/ running applications on a Student workstation

The Tutor has two options when closing down an application on a Student workstation:

Close	Close down an application but respect any applications requests at the Student e.g. to save file before closing.

Kill	Force the application to close, without any application prompts.

1.	To close an application running on a Student workstation choose {View}{Details).

2.	The Details List View will appear.

3.	Right click on an application icon listed under "Current Application" or "Running Application" in the List View.

4.	Choose Close or Kill.

5.	The application will be closed at the Student workstation and the icon will disappear from the List View.

Note:	By right clicking on an application in the Approved or Restricted List, the Tutor is able to "Close" a running application on all connected Students.


Change the current application running on a Student workstation

1.	To change the current application running on a Student machine choose {View}{Details).

2.	The Details List View will appear.

3.	Right click on an application icon listed under "Running Application".

4.	Choose Activate.

5.	The current application running on the Student workstation will now be replaced by the newly activated application.

6.	The icon listed under "Current Application" will be replaced with the newly activated application icon.


Launch an application on all connected Students

1.	Right click on an application icon in the "Approved Applications" List.

2.	Choose Send to Students.

3.	The application will be Launched on all connected Student workstations.

4.	In the List View the Launched application icon will appear in the current application list.

Or

1.	Highlight an application in the "Approved Applications" List.

2.	Drag and drop the highlighted application into the List View.

3.	The application will be Launched on all connected Student workstations.

In the List View the Launched application icon will appear in the current application list.


Setting up Approved or Restricted Application Lists

Approved Applications	The Student is only able to run the applications specified on this list.

Restricted Applications	The Student is unable to run the applications specified on this list.

Add an application to your Approved or Restricted List

1.	Click on + to add an application to your List.

Or

Right click in the List boxes and select "Add Application".

Or

Drag and drop applications from your desktop or Start Menu into the Approved or Restricted List box.

2.	The Add Application Dialog will appear.

3.	Type in the .exe file name (e.g. winword.exe) under Application or Browse for your chosen application.

4.	Type in the description e.g. Microsoft Word.

5.	Click OK.

6.	The application icon, name and description will appear in your Approved or Restricted List box.

Or

1.	Choose {View}{Details}.

2.	Right click on an application icon in the List View under "Current Application" or "Running Applications".

3.	Choose "Add to Approved List".

Or

Choose "Add to Restricted List".

4.	The application icon and description will appear in the Approved or Restricted List.

Remove an application from your Approved or Restricted List

1.	To remove an application from the List, simply highlight the chosen application and click x.

Or

Right click in the list boxes and select "Remove Application".

Note:	The default Application List is NetSupport School Pro.app.

Apply Approved or Restricted Applications

Restrictions can be applied to individual Students or all connected Students.

1.	If you want to apply restrictions to individual Students select their icons in the List View.

2.	To apply these restrictions choose {Applications}{Allow Approved Applications Only or Block Restricted Applications}.

Or

Click on the Approved or Restricted icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

3.	To acknowledge which restriction has been activated an appropriate indicator will appear next to the Student icons. (When viewing Large icons only). Red for restricted, green for approved.

4.	If a Student is currently running an application included in your activated restriction list, an "Application Blocked" dialog will appear on their screen, stating the application that has been blocked by the Tutor. This will also appear if a Student attempts to run any of the applications included on the restriction list.

End Approved or Restricted Applications

1.	To remove the restrictions for individual Students, select their icons in the List View.

2.	Choose {Applications}{Unrestricted Access} from the drop down menu

Or

Click on the Unrestricted Access icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

3.	The green or red indicator will be removed from the selected Student icons.

Create a new Application List

1.	To create a new Application List choose {Applications} {Create New Application List}

Or

Click on the New Application List icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	A dialog will appear. Enter a file name and click Save.

3.	A new blank Application List will appear.

Note:	Application Lists can be assigned to different Control Users, by setting up a Tutor Profile.

Open an existing Application List

1.	To open an existing application list choose {Applications} {Load Existing Applications List}

Or

Click on the Open an Application List icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	Highlight the relevant file and click Open.

3.	The existing application list will appear.

Notes:

•	Any changes that have been made to the new or existing Applications List will be automatically saved when a new Applications List is created, or when you exit out of the NetSupport School program.

•	The default Application List is saved as NetSupport School Pro.app.


View Application History

This feature of the Application Control Module enables you to monitor the Applications being used by connected Students and, if required, store or print a permanent record.

1.	In Applications View choose {Applications}{History} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Application History dialog will appear.

This provides details of any application used by the Student(s) during the currently connected session. The list is cleared when the Control disconnects.

The available options are:

Show Application History for:

The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients.

Refresh

While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display.

Save

To keep a permanent record of the displayed items, you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting.

Print

Prints details of the currently displayed items.

Close

Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected.

See also

Application Control Module


View Web History

This feature of the Web Control Module enables you to monitor the websites being visited by connected Students and, if required, store or print a permanent record.

1.	In Web View choose {Web}{History} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Web History dialog will appear.

This provides details of the sites visited by the Student(s) during the currently connected session. The list is cleared when the Control disconnects.

The available options are:

Show Web History for:

The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients.

Refresh

While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display.

Save

To keep a permanent record of the displayed items, you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting.

Print

Prints details of the currently displayed items.

Close

Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected.

See also

Web Control Module


Identify URL's currently running on the Student workstation

In the List View, the Student icons can be viewed in a number of different ways. Choose {View}{Large Icons/ Small Icons/ List/ Details} or right click in the List View and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student Icons.

When viewing the "Large Icons" or "Details" layout, an icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current Student activity. This icon will be the default Internet Explorer icon or a personalised url icon.

If the url is currently listed in the Approved or Restricted lists, then a visual Green (Approved) or Red (Restricted) identifier is shown surrounding the url icon to make identification easier.

If the List View is in "Details" layout then a list of all other url’s running on the Student workstation is also displayed.

When viewing any one of the four layout options, the order of the Student icons can also be rearranged by the Tutor. Right click in the List View and choose {Arrange}. The Tutor is able to change the layout of the icons using the following options:

By Name	Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to their Client Name/ Display Name/ Student Register Name.

By Current Web Site	Student Icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the current url the Student is viewing.

By All Web Sites	Student Icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the running url’s on the Student workstation.

Selection of one of the above options is identified by a black dot.

Auto Arrange	If a new Student has been added to the list, or a new application is running on a Student machine, this option will automatically arrange the icons into the previously selected order above. A black tick will identify selection of this option. To deselect this option, simply re-click on "Auto Arrange" and the tick will disappear.

Ascending	If this option has been selected, the student icons will appear in ascending order according to the previously selected option above. A black tick will identify selection of this option. To deselect this option, simply re-click on "Ascending" and the tick will disappear. This will arrange the Student icons in descending order.


Close the current/running URL on a Student workstation

1.	To close a url on a Student workstation choose {View}{Details}.

2.	The Details List View will appear.

3.	Right click on a url icon under "Current Web Site" or "All Web Sites".

4.	Choose Close.

5.	The url will be closed at the Student machine and the url icon will disappear from the List View.

Note:	By right clicking on a url icon in the Approved or Restricted List, the Tutor is able to close a url on all connected Students, by choosing "Close at Students".


Change the current URL running on a Student workstation

1.	To change the current url running on a Student workstation choose {View}{Details}.

2.	The Details List View will appear.

3.	Right click on a url icon listed under "All Web Sites".

4.	Choose "Activate" or "Activate Maximise" (the Internet Explorer window will appear full size on the Student screen).

5.	The newly activated url will now replace the current url running on the Student workstation.

6.	The icon listed under "Current Web Site" will be replaced with the newly activated url icon.


Launch a URL on all connected Students

1.	Right click on a url icon in the "Approved Sites" List.

2.	Choose "Send to Students".

3.	The url will be launched on all connected Student workstations.

4.	In the List View the launched url icon will appear in the current web site list.

Or

1.	Highlight a url in the "Approved Applications" List.

2.	Drag and drop the highlighted url into the List View.

3.	The url will be launched on all connected Student workstations.

4.	In the List View the launched url icon will appear in the current web site list.


Setting up an Approved or Restricted Web Site List

Approved Sites	When activated, the Student is only able to view the url’s specified on this list. A page will appear at the Student machines displaying the list of approved sites that they can choose from.

Restricted Sites	When activated, the Student is unable to view the url’s specified on this list. However, all other sites, even those that are not on the Approved List, can be viewed.

Notes:

•	The Tutor also has the option to enter keywords to prevent/ allow a Student to view a url that includes these keywords. This can be used to deal with websites that are re-directed.

•	To temporarily block all Internet usage, select {School}{Block all Internet} from the Control Window drop down menu or if displayed select the Block all Internet icon on the Control toolbar. An indicator will appear next to the Student icons to confirm Internet usage is suspended.

Add a URL to your Approved or Restricted List

1.	Click on + to add a url to your Approved or Restricted list.

Or

Right click in the list boxes and select "Add Site".

2.	The Add Web Site dialog will appear.

3.	Type in the website address under URL, e.g. www.netsupportschool.com

4.	Click "GO" to check that the url website address is correct.

5.	Type in the Description, e.g. NetSupport (this is optional).

6.	Type in keywords, e.g. NetSupport (this is optional).

7.	Click OK.

8.	The url icon and description will appear under the Approved or Restricted List.

Or

1.	Choose {View}{Details}.

2.	Right click on a url icon in the List View under "Current Web Site" or "All Web Sites"

3.	Choose "Add to Approved List".

Or

Choose "Add to Restricted List".

4.	The url icon and description will appear under the Approved or Restricted List.

Note: You can also add a URL to the Approved or Restricted list from the Co-Browser.

Remove a URL from your Approved or Restricted List

1.	To remove a url from the list, simply highlight the chosen url and click x.

Or

Right click in the list boxes and select "Remove Site".

Apply Approved or Restricted Web Sites

Restrictions can be applied to individual Students or all connected Students.

1.	If you want to apply restrictions to individual Students select their icons in the List View.

2.	To apply these restrictions choose {Web}{Allow Approved URL’s Only or Block Restricted URL’s}

Or

Click on the relevant restriction icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

3.	To acknowledge which restriction has been activated an appropriate indicator will appear next to the Student icons. (When viewing Large icons only). Red for restricted, green for approved.

4.	If a Student is currently viewing a website included in the activated restriction list they will be redirected to a message stating that the url has been blocked by the Tutor.

Note:	Full internet redirection is supported on Internet Explorer, Netscape (in IE Mode) and Browsers that provide IE based rendering. For Mozilla and Firefox the Browser window will close.

End Approved or Restricted Web Sites

1.	To remove the restrictions for individual Students, select their icons in the List View.

2.	Choose {Web}{Unrestricted Access} from the drop down menu

Or

Click on the Unrestricted Access icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

3.	The green or red indicator will be removed from the selected Student icons.

Create a new URL List

1.	To create a new URL List choose {Web}{Create new URL List}.

Or

Click on the new URL List icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	A dialog will appear. Enter a file name and click Save.

3.	A new blank URL List will appear.

Note:	The default URL List is saved as NetSupport School Pro.web

Open an existing URL List

1.	To open an existing URL List choose {Web}{Load Existing URL List}

Or

Click on the Open a URL List icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	Highlight the relevant file and click Open.

3.	The existing URL List will appear.

Notes:

•	Any changes that have been made to the new or existing Web List will be automatically saved when a new Web List is created, or when you exit out of the NetSupport School program.

•	The default Web List is saved as NetSupport School Pro.web.


Survey Lists

Surveys can be re-used by adding them to a Survey List. NetSupport provides a default list, NetSupport School Pro.sul, into which questions and responses are automatically stored, but you can create custom lists if you want to categorise different types of question.

Create a Survey List

1.	In Survey View, choose {Survey}{Create New Survey List} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Create New Survey List icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane.

2.	Enter a name for the file and click Create.

3.	Any new Surveys you enter will be added to the list.

Load a Survey List

1.	In Survey View, choose {Survey}{Load Existing Survey List} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Load Existing Survey List icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane.

2.	Select the required list and click Open.

Using Survey Lists

With the required Survey List loaded you can enter new questions or use and manage previously stored questions and responses.

To Add a New Question to a Survey List

1.	In the Student Survey pane enter the question and choose the required responses from the drop down list or add new options if the defaults aren’t appropriate.

2.	Send the Survey to Students. The Survey will automatically be stored in the current list.

or

Rather than send the Survey immediately, choose {Survey}{Add Survey to List} from the Control Window drop down menu or click the Add Survey to List icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane to store the question and responses for future use.

To Use an Existing Survey

1.	In the Student Survey pane click the Select/Add Question icon. (Green Cross). The Select Question dialog will appear.

2.	Select a question from the list and click OK.

3.	The question will be displayed in the Survey pane ready to be sent to Students.

Manage Questions and Responses

As well as enabling you to choose an existing Survey, the Select Question dialog can be used to add new questions/responses and edit questions/responses if the current examples are not appropriate.

1.	If the Survey list does not currently include the required question, enter the new question along with the responses in the boxes provided and click Add.

or

To edit an existing question, select it from the list, change the question and/or the responses and click Add.

Note:	If you change the question it will be added to the list in addition to the original. If you only change the responses, the original will be overwritten.

2.	To use the question in a Survey, select it from the list and click OK.

3.	The question will be displayed in the Survey pane ready to be sent to Students.

Note:	When you use customised responses in a Survey they will be attached to that question only. If you want to make the responses available to other Surveys they need to be added to the default drop down list.  Click Manage, the Manage Responses dialog will appear, enter the required responses and click Add.

See also:

Student Surveys


Monitor Mode

Monitor Mode, similar to the Scan feature, enables the Tutor to view multiple Student screens simultaneously.

A convenient thumbnail view of each connected Student screen is displayed at the Tutor providing a quick and easy method for monitoring Student activity. While in Monitor mode the Tutor still has access to the full range of NetSupport features such as View, Chat and File Transfer.

1.	Choose {View}{Monitor View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Monitor Mode icon on the left hand side of the Control Window.

The List View will display each Student thumbnail. By mousing over a thumbnail you can zoom into that screen. Double-clicking on a thumbnail will open a view session to the selected Student, right-click and you can select from the full range of available Client features. For example, by selecting multiple thumbnails you can invite those Students into a Chat session.

Note:	The Zoom facility can be toggled on/off by selecting {Monitor}{Zoomed Mode} from the Control Window drop down menu or clicking the ‘Zoom Student Windows’ icon.

Monitor Mode provides a number of additional tools:

Customise Thumbnail Size

Student thumbnails can be resized to suit personal preferences. This is particularly useful when connected to large numbers of Student machines.

1.	Choose {Monitor}{Size} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Change Size icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	Select the required size from the available options.

Auto-Fit Size of Student Thumbnail

This option will automatically adjust the size of the displayed thumbnails to fit the window.

1.	Choose {Monitor}{Auto fit Students} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Auto Size icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

Changing The Thumbnail Refresh Rate

Depending on how closely you want to monitor Student activity you can adjust the frequency at which the thumbnails are refreshed.

1.	Choose {Monitor}{Update} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Click the Change Frequency icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	Select the required time interval from the available options.

Show Active Application

When enabled, an icon will appear in the top left of each thumbnail indicating which application is currently active at the Student machine. In addition, if you have created approved and restricted application lists, a green (approved) or red (restricted) border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of applications.

1.	Choose {Monitor}{Show Active Application} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Show Active Application icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

Show Active Web Site

Displays an icon in the bottom right of each thumbnail indicating which site the Student is currently visiting. If you have created approved and restricted web lists, a green (approved) or red (restricted) border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of the Internet.

1.	Choose {Monitor}{Show Active Web Site} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Show Active Web Site icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

Show Help Requests

If enabled, this option highlights when a Student has outstanding help requests. A flashing Question Mark icon appears in the top right of the relevant thumbnail.

To enable/disable, choose {Monitor}{Show Help Requests} from the Control Window drop down menu.


Student Register

By default NetSupport will display the computer name of the Client workstation in the Control Window. However, there may be times when you want the control to display the actual name of the student and request additional information.

The Student Register option enables the Tutor to prompt the Students for their details.

Note: You can also change the name of the Client workstation by editing the Client Properties Details Tab.

To Prompt Students to Login:

1.	If specific Student details are required select the relevant Client icons in the Control Window. Alternatively, to prompt all connected Students leave the icons unselected.

2.	Choose {School}{Student Register} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Student Register icon on the Toolbar.

3.	Select Sign In from the available options.

4.	The Student Register dialog will appear. The Tutor can then select the information that the Student will be required to complete.

Note: The Student Register will also appear if you check Create a Student Register on the Class Wizard.

Sign Out

At the end of a lesson you can reset the Client Names using the Sign Out option.

1.	Choose {School}{Student Register} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Student Register icon on the Toolbar.

2.	Select Sign Out from the available options. Confirm that you want to unregister the Students.

Registration Report

Student registration details can be viewed in a report but this will be lost when the Control disconnects.

1.	Choose {School}{Student Register} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Student Register icon on the Toolbar.

2.	Select Registration Report from the available options.

Note: 	If you want to store a copy of the report ensure that the Auto Save Register option is enabled on the Student  Register dialog when requesting the Student details. The report can be stored in CSV, HTML or XML format.

See also

To display the Login name of Students

To save Students Login name


Student Register Dialog

This dialog enables the Tutor to create a customised Registration form, which will prompt Students for their details. By selecting a name the Tutor can also interact with Students using the View and Chat options.

Class Details

If required the Teacher Name, Lesson Title and Room Number can be included on the Registration form that is sent to Students.

Required Student Details

Decide which details to prompt the Students for. You can also add two custom fields to the form.

Note:	If the "Retrieve Student Login Name when performing Student Register" option is enabled in the Tutor Configuration, the First Name and Surname will be greyed out and the Student name will automatically default to the Login name. Choose {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} to enable this facility if preferred.

Auto Save Register

Student registration details can be viewed in a report but this will be lost when the Control disconnects. If you want to store a copy of the report check this option. You will be prompted for a file name, location and file format (CSV, HTML or XML).

Click Register to send the form to Student machines. You can monitor progress as the Students respond. Click Close when all Students have Signed In, the Client icon in the Control Window will now display the Registered name.


Lesson Planner

A NetSupport Lesson Plan enables a Tutor to structure a session around a pre-defined set of tasks with appropriate timings and prompts allocated to each part of the plan.

Common NetSupport functionality can be built into the plan, such as run test, send/collect work, scan and show.

To create a Lesson Plan

1.	Choose {Planner}{Manage Planner}.

Or,

Click the ‘Lesson Plans’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Manage Plans.

Or,

Select the Create button on the Class Wizard dialog.

Or,

If displayed, click on the create a Lesson Plan icon on the Lesson Plan bar.

2.	The Lesson Plan Window will appear.

3.	From the Available Items list drag the required task and drop it into the Window. Enter any addition properties that are required.

4.	When all tasks are in place save the lesson.

5.	To create a new lesson click New on the toolbar or to re-load a saved lesson click Open.

6.	Click Ok.

7.	The Start Lesson Window will appear. This confirms the lesson content, total time, author and description of the lesson.

8.	To start the currently loaded lesson click Ok or click Cancel to close the Window.

Managing a Lesson Plan

When a lesson is activated a progress bar will appear at the Tutor. The Tutor will be prompted before each task is due to begin and they can choose whether to continue or abort. At any point during a task you can use the tools on the Lesson bar to pause, skip to next item or abort the lesson.

Note:	If you simply want a timed session without the need to run a pre-defined Lesson Plan select {Planner}{Set Class Time} from the Control Window drop down menu. This enables you to select an end time for the lesson or the duration. The timer will appear on the Lesson Bar and can be switched off by selecting {Planner}{Set Class Time}{Remove}. The timer shows hours/minutes until there is 5 minutes remaining when it will switch to minutes/seconds.


Interactive Whiteboard

A full screen Interactive Whiteboard is provided, enabling the Tutor to use NetSupports annotation tools to highlight the screen and show the results to a selected group of Students.

1.	To switch to Whiteboard mode, choose {View}{Whiteboard View} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Click the Whiteboard icon on the left hand side of the Control Window.

2.	Use the range of annotation tools to highlight the screen and add any stored graphics. Choose {Whiteboard} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Select the relevant icons at the bottom of the Control Window.

3.	If required you can save the content of the Whiteboard for later use. Choose {Whiteboard}{Options- Save Whiteboard}.

Or,

Select the Save icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

To show the Whiteboard to Students

1.	If showing a stored Whiteboard image select {Whiteboard}{Options – Load Image} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Choose the Open image icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

2.	From the Group Bar, select the Group of Students to show the Whiteboard to.

3.	Choose {Whiteboard}{Turn Whiteboard On} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or,

Select the Turn Whiteboard On icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

4.	The content of the Whiteboard will appear on the selected Student screens. The Tutor can continue to annotate the Whiteboard in real time.

5.	To remove the Whiteboard from Student screens, select {Whiteboard}{Turn Whiteboard On} from the drop down menu.

Or,

Select the Turn Whiteboard On icon at the bottom of the Control Window.

Whiteboard Leader

When Students are viewing the Whiteboard they cannot initially annotate the screen themselves. However, the Tutor can nominate a Student to be the ‘Whiteboard Leader’. This activates the annotation options at the selected machine. The Tutor can switch control to any of the other participants as required by selecting their icon in the Student List.

1.	Select the required Student from the Student List.

2.	Choose {Whiteboard}{Activate Student} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Right-click on the required icon in the Students List and select Activate.

3.	The Student can now use the available tools to add content to the Whiteboard.

4.	Control can be switched to another Student by simply selecting their icon in the Student List and repeating step 2.


Client Disconnects from an Active Session

During an active session you may find that Students inadvertently disconnect, for example, when they reboot their machine. Each time a Student disconnects a message will appear advising which Student has disconnected, you can dismiss this prompt or leave to timeout as it will allow you to carry on working, this message can be disabled if required.

To Disable the Disconnect Prompt

1.	Select {View}{Current Settings – User Interface} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	Select the Silent Disconnect option and Click Ok. The next time a Student disconnects no message will be displayed.

Note: To automatically reconnect to Students when they become available, ensure that the Automatically Reconnect to Students option is selected in the Tutor User Interface Settings.


Student Automatic Login

If a generic naming convention is used for your classroom PCs, you can automatically log the Students in to save time at the start of a lesson.

Note: Student Automatic Login does not support Windows 9X Clients.

To automatically login Student machines

1.	Select the Student machine(s) you wish to login.

2.	Choose {Client}{Login} from the Control Window drop down menu.

Or

Click the Manage icon on the Control Toolbar and choose Login.

3.	The Auto Login dialog will appear.

4.	Enter the Username, Password and Domain and click Login. The Username will appear once the login has been successful.

5.	When you have finished click Done to exit.

See also

Power PCs On


Co-Browser

NetSupport School provides the Tutor and Students with a shared Web Browser. This enables the Tutor to lead a browser session, navigating Students through various web pages, with the added security of locking the Students so they can only view the pages opened by the Tutor.

Note: The Co-Browser is not supported with websites that use Flash Navigation or Java Scripting.

To open a Co-Browse Session

1.	Select the Client(s) that are to be included in the session.

2.	Choose {Client}{Co-Browse} from the Co-Browse Window drop down menu.

Or

If displayed, click the Co-Browse icon on the Toolbar.

3.	The Co-Browse Window will open and also appear on the selected Student machines. From here you can open web pages and create new tabs that allow you to navigate between web pages.

See also

Using the Co-Browser

Lock/Unlock Students in the Co-Browser


To Lock/Unlock Students in the Co-Browser

There are several different modes you can apply to the Students when using the Co-Browser. Lock Students, lets you guide Students through a selection of web pages with Students having no control over what they are viewing. Restrict Students, enables Students to have some control but only view web pages that you have selected. Free Students, allows Students have full control over what websites they can access.

Note: Whilst the Students are unlocked, any restrictions applied in the Web Control Module will apply to the Students in the Co-Browser session.

To Lock Students

1.	Select {File}{Lock Students} from the Co-Browser drop down menu.

Or

Click the Lock/Unlock icon on the Toolbar and select Lock Students.

2.	Students will now be locked, they will only be able to view websites that the Tutor shows them, with no access to any of the Co-Browse functions.

To Free Students

1.	Select {File}{Free Students} from the Co-Browser drop down menu.

Or

Click the Lock/Unlock icon on the Toolbar and select Free Students.

2.	Students will now have control over the Co-Browser and will be able to open new websites etc. Any web pages or tabs selected by the Tutor will be left open.

To Restrict Students

1.	Select {File}{Restrict Students} from the Co-Browser drop down menu.

Or

Click the Lock/Unlock icon on the Toolbar and select Restrict Students.

2.	Students will be unlocked, but they will only be able to access web pages or tabs left open by the Tutor. Students will not have access to other websites or be able to open links on existing pages.

See also

Using the Co-Browser


Using the Co-Browser

Using the Co-Browser is a very straightforward process with a simple to use interface. Once the Co-Browser is active on the selected Students screens, you can guide Students through a variety of web pages to suit the needs of your lesson. You can view multiple websites by creating new tabs which allows you to easily switch between different web sites.

To Create a New Tab

1.	Select {File}{New Tab} from the Co-Browser drop down menu.

2.	A new tab will appear. Enter the website address in the Address Bar and select Go.

3.	The website will be displayed under the new tab.

To Approve/Restrict Websites

You can add websites to the approved or restricted lists in the Web Control Module from the Co-Browser Window.

1.	Select the website you wish to approve or restrict.

2.	Choose {Restrictions}{Add to Approved Sites or Add to Restricted Sites} from the Co-Browser drop down menu.

3.	The website will now either be approved or restricted and this will apply to the Students when using the Co-Browser.

Notes:

•	There are three different modes that you can apply to Students while they are using the Co-Browser, Locked, Restricted and Free, by default the Students will be locked.

•	You can pause the Students Co-Browse session by selecting the Pause icon on the Toolbar. This may be useful if you wish to perform any functions you don’t wish the Students to see.

•	To set the Students web pages to the same as the Tutor’s click the Synchronise icon on the Toolbar.

See also

Co-Browser

Lock/Unlock Students


Customise Client and Group Icons

The Student and Group icons displayed in the Control Window can be customised to suit individual requirements. A choice of images can be used and you can apply these to the machine name or to the logged on user.

Customise Client and/or Group Icons

1.	Select {Client}{Customize} or {Group}{Customize} from the Control Window drop down menu.

2.	The Image Customisation dialog will appear. Select one of the three tabs:

Clients	Applies the selected image to the machine name.

Logged On User Name	Assigns the image to the user name so will load at whatever PC the Student logs onto. This option takes precedence over the machine name.

Groups	Enables you to apply an image to each defined Group of Students.

3.	Select the Client Name or Group from the list and click Modify. If using the Logged on User name option, click Add and enter the Students logon name.

4.	Browse for the required icon image. A number of default libraries (*.ncl) are provided in the Program Folder or you can select a picture of your own choosing. Highlight the required image and click OK. Repeat this process for any other Clients and Groups.

5.	Click Done when complete.

Note:	Individual Client and Group icons can be changed by amending the properties of the selected item. Choose {Client}{Properties}{Details Tab} or {Group}{Properties} form the Control Window drop down menu. Select Customise Appearance.


Show Application

The Show feature enables you to display the Control screen to Students. However, if a number of programs are open at the Control, there may be occasions when you want to show a single application in isolation.

To Show an Application

1.	Choose {Client}{Show Application} from the Control Window drop down menu.

or

Right-click on a selected Client icon and choose Show Application.

or

Click the ‘Show Menu’ icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Application.

2.	The Show Application dialog will appear.

3.	Drag the icon to the required application on the Controls desktop and release. (A pink border will appear around the selected application as you move the mouse around the desktop)

or

Click Select and choose the application from the displayed list.

Note:	NetSupport will identify if the Control is running multiple monitors, giving you the option to confirm which one the selected application is sited on. If you are unsure which is the correct screen, click Identify. If only one monitor is detected, select Whole Desktop.

4.	Choose the Clients to include in the Show.

5.	Set additional Show Options if required.

6.	Click Show.